PDF Service Manual Discovery PDF Compress

™
DISCOVERY
QDR® Series
FAN BEAM X-RA
X-RAY
Y BONE DENSITOMETER
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Hologic, Inc. Phone in US: 800-321-4659 Document 080-1085

35 Crosby Drive Fax (Domestic): 781-280-0670 Revision 008
Bedford, MA 01730 Fax (International): 781-280-0671
USA
Discovery QDR Series Technical Manual
December 2010
Notice
The information contained in this manual is confidential and proprietary to Hologic, Inc.
This information is provided only to authorized representatives of Hologic's customers
cu stomers
solely for the purpose of facilitating the use of Hologic's products. No information
contained herein may be disclosed to any unauthorized person for any purpose whatsoever
without the prior written consent of Hologic, Inc.
The procedures described in this document are intended for use by direct employees of
Hologic, Inc., or authorized Hologic Equipment Resellers and their trained field
engineers. Any unauthorized or untrained persons performing these procedures may affect
the warranty of the Discovery QDR Series.
Exercise proper caution when servicing the system. There are dangerous and potentially
lethal voltages accessible within the Discovery system. To avoid exposure to shock
hazards, the Main Circuit Breaker should be switched off, and the power cord removed,
before working inside any part of the system.
The Discovery QDR Series Fan Beam X-ray Bone Densitometer produces ionizing
radiation in the form of X-rays. It may be dangerous
d angerous to the patient, operator or field
engineer unless safe exposure factors and operating instructions are observed. To avoid
unsafe exposure, do not attempt to service the equipment unless you are a Hologic, Inc.,
certified field engineers. Exercise proper caution when servicing the system. A dosimeter
(film badge) should always be worn while on site. Dose and scatter measurements must be
taken after each service call to ensure that the parameters are still within specifications.
Hologic, Inc., has made all effort to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate
and complete. Hologic, Inc., shall not, however, be liable for any technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained herein, or for incidental, special or consequential dangers in
connection with the furnishing or use of this manual.
manua l. The information in this manual is
subject to change without notice.
Discovery and the Hologic logo are registered trademarks of Hologic, Inc. All other
products and company names used in this manual are trademarks and registered
trademarks of other manufactures.
Printed in U.S.A.
Copyright© 2003-2010 by Hologic, Inc., All rights reserved
ii
Chapter 1 -
INTRODUCTION
1.1 System Overview .............................................
...............................................................................................
.................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 X-Ray Scanning Principles
Principles .......................................................................
........................... ............................................ 1-2
1.2 Functional Overview .......................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Product Specifications ................................................................
.....................................................................................
..................... 1-10
1.3.1 Exam Mode(s) Performance ................................................................... 1-12
1.3.2 Duty Cycle: ...........................................................................................
................................... ..........................................................
.. 1-13
1.3.3 Leakage Technique Factors .................................................................... 1-13
1.3.4 Minimum Beam Filtration ..........................................................
......................................................................
............ 1-13
1.3.5 Measured Half Value Layer (HVL) At Different Operating Potentials . 1-13
1.3.6 Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current ............................................. 1-13
1.3.7 Technique Factors for Maximum Line Current ......................................
................................... ... 1-13
1.3.8 Maximum Deviation ...............................................................................
............................. .................................................. 1-14
1.3.9 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors ......................................... 1-14
Chapter 2 -
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 Computer ........................................................................
.. .........................................................................................................
................................... 2-1
2.2 PCI Communications Controller Boar Board d .............................................................
................................ ............................. 2-1
2.2.1 Interface Connections ...............................................................................
................................................................... ............ 2-1
2.3 Distribution Board .....................................................
.............................................................................................
........................................ 2-3
2.3.1 Power ..............................................................................................
......................... ...............................................................................
.......... 2-3
................................................................... ............ 2-4
2.4 Motor Controller Board .....................................................................................
................................................................. .................... 2-5
2.4.1 Power ..............................................................................................
......................... ...............................................................................
.......... 2-5
................................................................... ............ 2-6
2.5 TZ Drive Board (A and SL Only) ...................................................................... 2-6
2.5.1 Service Switches .......................................................................................

.......................................... ............................................. 2-7
2.5.2 Power ..............................................................................................
......................... ...............................................................................
.......... 2-7
................................................................... ............ 2-8
2.6 Control Panel Controller
Controller Board .......................................................................
.......................................................... ............. 2-10
2.6.1 Power ..............................................................................................
......................... .............................................................................
........ 2-10
2.6.2 Interface Connections .............................................................................
................................................................... .......... 2-10
2.7 C-Arm Interface Board ....................................................................................
............................................................................... ..... 2-12
2.7.1 Continuity Daisy Chain .......................................................
..........................................................................
................... 2-13
2.7.2 Power ..............................................................................................
......................... .............................................................................
........ 2-13
2.7.3 Interface Connections .............................................................................
................................................................... .......... 2-13
2.8 X-Ray Controller Assembly (P/N
(P/N 010-1273) .................................................. 2-16
2.8.1 Interface ..................................................................................................
........................ .......................................................................... 2-16
Table of Contents iii

2.8.2 X-Ray Controller Board .......................................................................... 2-18

2.9 X-Ray Source Unit ...........................................................................................
.............................................................. ............................. 2-19
2.10 Data Acquisition System (C, W, and SL) ..................................................... 2-20
2.10.1 Solid State Detector .............................................................................
............................................................ ................. 2-20
2.10.2 Integrator/Multiplexor Subsection ........................................................
............................. ........................... 2-20
2.10.3 Analog To Digital Board ............................................................
......................................................................
.......... 2-21
2.10.4 Power ...............................................................................................
.......................... ..........................................................................
..... 2-21
2.10.5 Interface Connections ...................................................................
...........................................................................
........ 2-21
2.11 Data Acquisition System
System (A Model only) ..................................................... 2-23
2.11.1 Solid State Detector .............................................................................
............................................................ ................. 2-23
2.11.2 Power ...............................................................................................
.......................... ..........................................................................
..... 2-23
...........................................................................
........ 2-23
2.12 Integrator/Multiplexor
Integrator/Multiplexor Board .........................................................................
............................................................... .......... 2-24
2.12.1 Power ...............................................................................................
.......................... ..........................................................................
..... 2-25
...........................................................................
........ 2-25
2.13 Analog To Digital
Digital Board (A Model Only) .................................................... 2-27
2.13.1 Power ...............................................................................................
.......................... ..........................................................................
..... 2-27
...........................................................................
........ 2-27
2.14 Torroid Power Module and DIN Rail ............................................................ 2-29
Chapter 3 -
INSTALLATION
3.1 Pre-Installation
Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Required Tools .......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Required Documentation ..........................................................................
.................................................................... ...... 3-1
3.1.3 Room
Room and Doorway Size ..........................................................................
............... ........................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Arrange For Help ..............................................................................
.. ....................................................................................
........ 3-6
3.2 Uncrate and Move to Destination ...................................................................... 3-6
3.2.1 Inspect For Shipping Damage ................................................................... 3-6

3.2.2 Uncrate Unit .............................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 Take Inventory ..............................................................
..........................................................................................
............................ 3-8
3.2.4 Measure
Measure Path To Final Destination .......................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Remove
Remove Tabletop (If Necessary) .............................................................. 3-9
3.2.6 Remove Discovery A or SL Lower C-Arm Assembly Assembly (If Necessary)Necessary) ... 3-10
3.2.7 Prepare the Tabletop
Tabletop for Moving (A, W,Wi) .......................................... 3-12
3.2.8 Move
Move Unit To Destination
Destination ............................................................
......................................................................
.......... 3-12
3.2.9 Set Up the Unit .......................................................................................
........................................................... ............................ 3-16
3.3 Install
Install the System .........................................................
.............................................................................................
.................................... 3-18
3.3.1 IInstall
nstall Cables ........................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.2 Check
Check Power Line Voltage
Voltage ..................................................................... 3-23
3.3.3 Install Computer .....................................................................................
................................................................ ..................... 3-24
iv Table of Contents
3.3.4 Start QDR Software in Service Mode ..................................................... 3-24

3.3.5 Check Table Alignment ..........................................................................
....................... ................................................... 3-25
3.3.6 Perform C-Arm Parallelism
Parallelism Adjustment (A and SL systems only) ........ 3-27
3.4 Calibrate and Test the System .........................................................................
................................................................ ......... 3-28
3.4.1 Check Tube kV Peak Potential
Potential ...............................................................
.................................................. ............. 3-28
3.4.2 Check Tube Current ....................................................................
...............................................................................
........... 3-30
3.4.3
3.4.4 Adjust Belt
Calibrate Tension
Motors ................................................................................
............................................................ ....................
....................................................................
.....................................................................................
................. 3-32
3-33
3.4.5 X-Ray Beam Alignment ...............................................................
........................................................................
......... 3-47
3.4.6 Calibrate Aperture (Cannot be run on Ci and Wi models) ..................... 3-53
3.4.7 Check Laser Positioning Offset ..............................................................
............................................... ............... 3-54
3.5 A/D Gain Control
Control Adjustment
Adjustment .........................................................................
........................ ................................................. 3-54
3.5.1 Check and Verify
Verify the A/D Gain ............................................................. 3-54
3.5.2 Adjust
Adjust the A/D Gain ...............................................................................
............................................................... ................ 3-55
3.5.3 Perform Detector Flattening ............................................................
..................................................................
...... 3-55
3.5.4 Perform Lateral Alignment Test (A and SL) .......................................... 3-56
3.5.5 Check HVPS/S (Tank)
(Tank) For Radiation Leakage ...................................... 3-58
3.5.6 Calibrate For Area, BMD And BMC ...................................................... 3-60
3.5.7 Scan
3.5.8 Scan Thickness
Thickness Measurement
Measurement & & Calibration
Calibration (A (C and
and W) SL)........................
....................... 3-61
3-61
3.5.9 Calibration of Area and BMC, for Array Scan Modes Modes ........................... 3-62
3.5.10 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC Database ................ 3-63
3.5.11 Install Software Options .......................................................................
............................................................ ........... 3-64
3.5.12 Test Scan Modes ..........................................
...................................................................................
......................................... 3-64
3.5.13 Finish
Finish Assembling Unit ........................................................................
............................................................... ......... 3-66
3.5.14 Measure X-Ray Dose To Patient .......................................................... 3-66
3.5.15 Measure X-Ray Scatter From Phantom ................................................
......................... ....................... 3-67
3.5.16 Perform QC ........................................................................
...........................................................................................
................... 3-67
3.5.17 Run Reproducibility Test ......................................................................
.................................................... .................. 3-67
3.5.18 Table Top Radiographic Uniformi Uniformity ty (A, W and Wi) ........................... 3-68
3.5.19 Instruments using
using Body Composition
Composition Analysis (BCA) ........................ 3-69
3.5.20 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis ................................... 3-70
3.6 The Radiation Measurement
Measurement Report ................................................................
................................. ............................... 3-70
Chapter 4 -
ALIGNMENT AND CALIBRATION
4.1 Check Table Alignment ................................................................................
................ .....................................................................
..... 4-1
4.2 Align the Table ..................................................................................................
.................................................................. ................................ 4-1
4.2.1 Table Edge to T-Rail (“A” Dimension) Adjustment ................................ 4-1
4.2.2 Front to Back T-Rail and Table Edge/Rail Gap Adjustment .................... 4-3
4.3 C-Arm Parallelism Adjustment .........................................................
........................................................................
............... 4-3
4.4 X-Ray Beam Alignment ...................................................................................
.............................................................. ..................... 4-4
4.5 Aperture Calibration .........................................................................................
.................................................................... ..................... 4-9
Table of Contents v
4.6 Motor Calibration ............................................................................................

............................................................... ............................. 4-10
4.7 Laser Positioning Offset Adjustment
Adjustment ............................................................
...............................................................
... 4-26
4.8 A/D Gain Control Adjustment .........................................................................
.................................... ..................................... 4-26
4.8.1 Check and Verify
Verify the A/D Gain ............................................................. 4-27
4.8.2 Adjust
Adjust the A/D Gain ...............................................................................
.................................................................. ............. 4-27
4.9 Filter
Filter Drum Encoder Alignment ....................................
......................................................................
.................................. 4-28
4.10 Detector Flattening ..................................................................
.......................................................................................
..................... 4-29
4.11 Lateral Alignment Test (QDR 4500A and SL) ..............................................
.......................................... .... 4-30
4.12 Table Top Radiographic Uniformity ....................................................
.............................................................
......... 4-32
4.12.1 Instruments using
using Body Composition
Composition Analysis (BCA) ........................ 4-33
4.12.2 Instruments using BMD
BMD Whole Body Analysis ................................... 4-33
4.13 Check Phantom values ...............................................
...................................................................................
.................................... 4-34
4.14 Area, BMD, and BMC Calibration
Calibration ................................................................ 4-34
4.14.1 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (C and W) ...................... 4-35
4.14.2 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (A and SL) ..................... 4-36
4.14.3 Calibration of Area and BMC, for Array Scan Modes ......................... 4-37
4.14.4 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC Database ................ 4-38
Chapter 5 -
REMOVE AND REPLACE PROCEDURES
5.1 Recommended Tools .........................................................................................
............................................................. ............................ 5-1
5.2 Electronics
Electronics Tray FRUS
FRUS ......................................................................................
................. ..................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Electronics Tray Printed Circuit Boards ................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 C-Arm Y Motor or Gearcase .................................................................... 5-3
5.2.3 C-Arm
C-Arm Y Encoder ..............................................................................
.. ...................................................................................
....... 5-4
5.3 Table Y FRUs (A, W and Wi
Wi Only) .................................................................. 5-4
5.3.1 Control Panel (All
(All models)
models) ..............................................................
.......................................................................
......... 5-5
5.3.2 PCBs
5.3.3 Table Under
Y Belt Right-Side of the Table ........................................................
................................. .......................
..............................................................................................
........................................................ ...................................... 5-5
5-6
5.3.4 Table
Table Y Motor or Gearcase ...................................................................... 5-7
5.3.5 Table Y Encoder ...........................................................................
.......................................................................................
............ 5-7
5.4 Table X FRUS ...............................................................
...................................................................................................
.................................... 5-8
5.4.1 Table X Motor Controller PCB ................................................................ 5-9
5.4.2 Table X Belt ............................................................................................
........................................................ .................................... 5-10
5.4.3 Table
Table X Motor or Gearcase .................................................................... 5-10
5.4.4 Table X Encoder ...........................................................................
.....................................................................................
.......... 5-11
5.5 Table Z FRUs (A and SL only) ......................................................................
..................................................................... . 5-12
5.5.1 Pedestal ...................................................................................................
........................................................ ........................................... 5-12
5.5.2 The Linear Rotary String (Encoder) ....................................................... 5-14
5.6 Lower C-Arm FRUS ........................................................................................
...................................................................... .................. 5-16
vi Table of Contents
5.6.1 C-Arm Interface Board ........................................................................... 5-17

5.6.2 X-Ray Controller Assembly ...................................................................
............................................................... .... 5-18
5.6.3 Filter Drum Assembly ............................................................................
............................................................ ................ 5-18
5.6.4 Tank Assembly .......................................................................................
..................................................................... .................. 5-19
5.6.5 Arm R FRUS (A and SL only) ...............................................................
................................................. .............. 5-21
5.6.6 Motor Controller Board .........................................................................
................................................................. ........ 5-23
5.6.7 Arm R Belt
Belt ......................................................
..............................................................................................
........................................ 5-23
5.6.8 Arm R Motor, Gearcase, Encoder or Encoder Belt ................................ 5-24
5.6.9 Gas Spring ............................................................................................... 5-25
5.7 Upper C-Arm FRUS ........................................................................................
...................................................................... .................. 5-25
5.7.1 Detector Assembly A, SL, W, C Systems .............................................. 5-26
5.7.2 Detector Assembly C1 and Wi Systems ................................................. 5-27
5.7.3 Laser Assembly ....................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.4 Analog to Digital
Digital Converter Board (A Model only) only) ............................... 5-30
5.8 Aperture Assembly FRUS ...............................................................................
............................................................. .................. 5-31
5.8.1 Aperture Stepper Motor ..........................................................................
.................... ...................................................... 5-31
5.8.2 Aperture Motor PCB ...............................................................................
..................................................................... .......... 5-32
5.8.3 Aperture Position Belt ................................................................
............................................................................
............ 5-32
5.8.4 Rotary Potentiometer ..............................................................................

........... ................................................................... 5-33
5.9 Drum Assembly FRUS ....................................................................................
.............................................................. ...................... 5-34
5.9.1 Drum Encoder PCB .............................................................
................................................................................
................... 5-34
5.9.2 Drum Belts ..............................................................................................
............................................................... ............................... 5-36
5.9.3 Stepper Motor Assembly ........................................................................
..................................................................... ... 5-37
5.9.4 Drum Bearings ........................................................................................
.......................................................... .............................. 5-37
5.10 Replacing EMI Cables ............................................................................
....... ............................................................................
....... 5-40
5.11 FRU Lists .......................................................................................................
................................................................. ...................................... 5-41
Chapter 6 -
FAULT ISOLATION
6.1 Before Starting ...................................................................................................

............................................................ ....................................... 6-1
6.2 Software Configuration ...................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................
........................................................................ ............ 6-1
6.4 Power Problems ...............................................................................
.......... .......................................................................................
.................. 6-1
6.5 Motion Problems ................................................................................................ 6-2
6.6 Control Panel Problems .....................................................................................
............................................................... ...................... 6-5
6.7 Display Problems ...............................................................................................
......................................................... ...................................... 6-5
6.7.1 Vertical Stripe ...........................................
...........................................................................................
................................................ 6-5
6.7.2 Horizontal Stripe ..................................................................
.......................................................................................
..................... 6-6
6.7.3 Noise .........................................................................................................
............................................................... .......................................... 6-7
6.7.4 No Display .................................................................................
.................. ..............................................................................
............... 6-7
6.8 Targeting/Laser Problems ..................................................................................
..................................................................... ............. 6-8
Table of Contents vii

6.9 Data Communications Problems .......................................................................

................................................................ ....... 6-8
6.10 Area/BMD/BMC/CV
Area/BMD/BMC/CV Specification Problems ................................................. 6-9
6.11 X-Ray Problems ............................................................................................... 6-9
6.11.1 No X-Rays ..............................................................................................
................................................................. ............................. 6-9
6.12 X-Ray Alignment Problems
Problems ............................................................................. 6-9
6.12.1 X-Ray beam does not align
align properly ...................................................... 6-9
6.12.2 System Fails X-Ray
X-Ray Beam Alignment Verification
Verification ............................. 6-10
6.13 Detector Flattening Problems ........................................................................
....................................................... ................. 6-10
6.13.1 System Consistently
Consistently Fails the Detector Flattening Procedure .............. 6-10
6.14 Laser Problems ....................................................................
..............................................................................................
.......................... 6-11
6.15 Oil leakage .....................................................................................................
................................................................. .................................... 6-12
6.15.1 The Torque Specifications ....................................................................
................................ .................................... 6-12
6.15.2 Tank Top Cover Components and Screw Location .............................. 6-12
6.15.3 Tightening the Lexan Cup Screws ........................................................ 6-13
6.15.4 Tightening the Bladder Gasket
Gasket Screws ................................................. 6-13
6.15.5 Tightening the Transformer Seal Screws .............................................. 6-14
6.15.6 Tightening the Tank Cover Gasket Screws .......................................... 6-14
6.16 Miscellaneous Problems ................................................................................
........................................................... ..................... 6-15
Chapter 7 -
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
7.1 Customer Preventive Maintenance .................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Field Service Preventive Maintenance .............................................................. 7-1
7.2.1 Guide Rail and Bearing Maintenance .......................................................
...................... ................................. 7-3
Chapter 8 -
PCB SUMMARY INFORMATION
Chapter 9 -
SOFTWARE TOOLS
9.1 X-Ray Survey ....................................................................................................
...................................................................... .............................. 9-1
9.1.1 Invoking X-Ray Survey ............................................................................
................................................................ ............ 9-1
9.1.2 The Main Display .....................................................................................
.................................................................. ................... 9-2
9.1.3 The Display Controls ................................................................................
.................................. .............................................. 9-3
9.2 SQDRIVER .........................................................................
......... ..............................................................................................
.............................. 9-9
9.3 SQVERIFY .............................................................................................
......................................................................................................
......... 9-10
9 -10
9.4 SQKEYPAD .........................................................
....................................................................................................
........................................... 9-10
Appendix A -
ERROR MESSAGES
viii Table of Contents

Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 System Overview
The Hologic Discovery® X-ray Bone Densitometer (Discovery-C and -W is shown in Figure 1-1
on Page 1-2;
1-2; Discovery-A and -SL is shown in Figure 1-2 on Page 1-2) 1-2) estimates the bone
mineral content (BMC) and bone mineral density (BMD) of selected areas of the body or of the
entire skeleton. It does so using X-rays of two different energy levels. This dual-energy scheme
allows soft tissue within the selected area to be subtracted out leaving only bone to be scanned
and estimated.
This manual uses "Discovery" to refer to all models in the Discovery series of systems.
Information presented in this manual that applies only to a particular model, or models, will be
noted as such.
The patient lies face up on the table and, with the aid of a cross-hair laser, the operator positions
the
sizescanning arm over
of scan desired, the
the region of
operator interest.
initiates theAfter
scan entering patient
with a single data and selecting the type and
keystroke.
The operator is not required to select technique factors as tube current and voltage are pre-
selected and fixed. Since testing is performed by fan beam method, rather than by flooding the
area as in conventional radiography, the scanning time is a function of the dimensions of the area
to be measured, the desired resolution, and the desired precision.
BMC results are expressed in grams of calcium hydroxyapatite and
an d BMD is reported in grams/
cm2 of the same compound.
In most cases, no additional shielding is necessary for patient,
pa tient, operator, or room. The Discovery
system can be placed in any convenient non-shielded examination room. Contact your state
regulatory agency for details about additional shielding requirements, if any
an y.
The Discovery system employs a patented Automatic Internal Reference

Referenc e System, which
continuously calibrates the machine to eliminate the effects of variations in temperature, tube
flux, etc. No daily calibration is required. The daily scanning of a q
quality
uality control phantom is
required to provide assurance that the system is functioning correctly and to aid in the detection of
any long-term drift.
The X-ray scans produced by the Discovery, and displayed on the monitor, are intended only to
locate anatomical sites for measurement and to assure the operator that the machine is operating
properly.. They are not intended
properly intende d as a substitute for conventional film-based diagnostic scans.
1-1
1-1. Discovery®-C and -W System

Figure 1-1.
1-2. Discovery®-A and -SL System

Figure 1-2.
1.1.1 X-Ray Scanning Principles

An X-ray source, consisting of a high voltage generator and X-ray tube in a common,
shielded enclosure, is mounted beneath the patient on the C-Arm. It generates a narrow,
tightly collimated, fan-shaped beam of X-rays which alternate, at power line frequency,
between 100kVp and 140kVp. At the other end of the C-Arm, above the patient, is a
crystal/solid state detector array.
array. During a scan, the C-arm and table move, under
computer control, to guide the beam over the desired scan area.
1-2
Before passing through the patient, the beam

bea m is filtered through a rotating drum in which
alternating segments having radio-opacities equivalent to tissue, bone and air are located.
When finally intercepted by the detector, the beam contains information about the X-ray
absorbing characteristics of both the patient and the calibration materials in the filter
drum. An A/D converter, fed by the detectors, supplies a complex digital signal to the
computer, which uses that signal both to construct the screen display, and as the basis for
its computations of BMC and BMD.
The Discovery computer algorithm is based on the principle that bone attenuates the X-ray
beam differently at high and low energies. The bone mineral content of any sample point
can be computed from:
Q= L - kH
where L and H are
a re the logarithms of the sample attenuation at high (140kVp) and low
(100kVp) energies, respectively.
respectively. The constant k depends
depen ds on the tissue attenuation
characteristics of the beam. In the Discovery, k is continuously measured using the
“tissue” segment in the filter wheel.
The program works in the following manner:
1. Load prelim
preliminary
inary scan and obtain
obtain regions
regions of interest
interest from operator
operator..
2. Esti
Estima
mate
te k as
as an
an aver
average
age valu
valuee of:
of:
k = [Ltissue - Lair] / [Htissue - Hair]
where Ltissue indicates a low-energy measurement with tissue-equivalent material
interposed by the filter drum, and L air, Htissue and Hair are similarly defined.
Note: The subscript
subscript "air" designates the filter drum segment that is empty (i.e., contains
neither bone- nor tissue-equivalent material).
3. Using this value of k, calculate
calculate Q for each
each point
point scanned
scanned using the formul
formulaa given
given
above (Q = L - kH). This array of Q values constitutes a "Q scan". Displays the Q
scan.
4. Compile
Compile a histogr
histogram
am of the Q values.
values. Because
Because a large
large portion
portion of the scan
scan con-
tains soft tissue only, this histogram will have a large peak.
p eak. Choose a threshold
value just above this peak, and apply that value to discriminate, point by point in
the Q scan, between "bone" points (whose Q is above the threshold) and "non-
bone" points (whose Q is below the threshold).
1-3
1-3. Q Scan Plot

Figure 1-3.
5. Use the
the "non-bone"
"non-bone" points
points to calculate
calculate a baseli
baseline
ne value
value for each scan
scan line.
line. Using
Using
these points, form a new histogram and repeat steps 4 and 5 un until
til the results con-
verge.
6. Smooth the segment boundaries
boundaries to
to eliminate
eliminate isolated
isolated noise-genera
noise-generated
ted "bone"
points.
7. Displa
Display
y the "bone"
"bone" and
and "non-bo
"non-bone"
ne" point
pointss for opera
operator
tor appro
approval
val..
8. Determ
Determine
ine the constan
constantt o
off prop
proport
ortion
ionali
ality
ty (d0) that relates the Q values to actual
BMC (grams). This constant is determined by measuring how much Q shifts
when bone-equivalent material is interposed by the filter drum.
9. Calculate
Calculate the
the total
total bone
bone mineral
mineral values
values by adding up the Q values
values for all "bone"
"bone"
points in each region of interest (e.g., each
ea ch vertebra), and multiplying by d 0.
10. Determine
Determine the bone areas
areas by counting
counting the number
number of "bone" points
points in each region
region
of interest.
11.
11. Calcul
Calculate
ate bone
bone mineral
mineral densi
density
ty as:
BMD = BMC / area
12. Display
Display the calculated
calculated result
resultss and print
print the report.
report.
1.2 Functional Overview

This section provides block diagrams of the Discovery system along with a brief
functional overview of each diagram and block. A detailed functional description along
with interconnection diagrams and interconnection descriptions is provided in Section 2 of
this manual.
1-4
1-4. Discovery System Block Diagram

Figure 1-4.
The Hologic Discovery consists of essentially three conceptual subsystems. These
subsystems are the Operator’s
Operator ’s Console, Motor Control Subsystem, and C-Arm
Subsystem.
The Operator’s Console is the input/output subsystem of the instrument and consists of a
PC running the Discovery system software under Windows XP® and the PCI
Communications Controller Board manufactured by Hologic. The software communicates
with the scanner sending out arm and table motion commands, X-Ray commands, and X-
ray detection commands. The software also checks to see that commands have been
completed and issues an appropriate error message when a command fails.
The Motor Control subsystem of the scanner is controlled by the Distribution Board. All
motor movement commands are routed through the Distribution Board to the individual
Motor Drivers. There is one Motor Driver for
fo r each motor: Arm Y direction (AY),
(AY), Table
Table X
direction (TX), Table

and SL models only). Y direction
The (TY) (A
Distribution and W
Board alsomodels only),the
distributes and
DCA
Arm
rm Rotation
power (AR)(A
throughout
the scanner. Circuit breakers for each Motor Driver can be found on the Distribution
Board.
The C-Arm subsystem controls the generation and detection of X-rays. It processes the
commands received from the Distribution Board and passes them to the X-Ray Controller
or the Detector Assembly. The X-Ray Controller, as its name implies, controls the
generation of the X-Rays by the X-Ray
X -Ray Source or “Tank”. The X-Rays pass through the
patient and are sensed by the Detector Assembly.
1-5
AC
AC from
AC Power
DIN Rail
Strip
(Scanner)
AC
Printer Monitor
Computer
AC
Video
Phone
Modem
Keyboard Jack
Network
Network I/F Card
Jack
Mouse PCI Discovery
Communications Scanner
Controller
1-5. Discovery Operator's Console Block Diagram

Figure 1-5.
The Discovery Operator’s Console consists of a Pentium PC on a convenient,
conve nient, roll-around
computer cart designed specifically for the Discovery PC. AC power from the scanner is
fed to the Operator’s Console via a power strip attached to the PC cart.
The Pentium PC contains the video controller board to drive the monitor and the PCI
Communications Controller Board to interface the PC to the Scanner.
Sca nner. A modem card is
provided for remote communications with other PCs. A Network Interface Card (NIC) is
installed to control communications with the Hologic QDRNet® or a DICOM® network.
The mouse gives the operator easy control
c ontrol over the Windows XP-based Discovery
software and the keyboard is used for data input to the Discovery software. A color inkjet
printer is provided with the PC. An optional laser printer can be substituted for the inkjet
printer.
1-6
JP1 To/From C-Arm Interface
To/From Control Panel Interface

JP4
To/From AR
Motor
Communications JP10 AR Stepper
Controller Motor Driver AR
Encdr
TY
Motor
TY Stepper
JP5
Signal Motor Driver TY
Encdr
Distribution
Board
+/-15V JP6 TX
From DIN Motor
TX Stepper
Rail JP7
Motor Driver TX
and LVPS +24V
JP8 Encdr
AY
AY Stepper Motor
JP11
Motor Driver
AY
Encdr
TZ
Motors
TZ Stepper
Motor Driver TZ
AC
Encdrs
1-6.Discovery Distribution and Motor Control Block Diagram

Figure 1-6.Discovery
The heart of the Discovery Scanner
Sc anner is the Distribution Board. This board interfaces the PC
to the different subsections of the Scanner, distributes control signals to the table and C-
Arm, and distributes DC power throughout the Scanner. The Distribution Board receives
command inputs from the PCI Communications Controller Board in the PC and voltages
from the DIN rail and Low Voltage
Voltage Power Supply. Commands and voltages dealing with
the generation of X-Rays or the acquisition of scan data are transferred to the C-Arm
Interface Board, which controls both functions. The Distribution Board also receives
Table and C-Arm motion commands from the PCI Communications Controller Board in
the PC.
When a motion command is received, the Distribution Board routes the command along
with a board address to the Motor Driver Boards. The addressed Motor Driver Board
converts these digital commands into analog signals that are strong enough to drive the
motors. A Position Encoder attached to the idler pulley
p ulley moved by the motor, senses
changes in the position of the arm or table. This device provides a voltage feedback to the
Motor Driver Board that is translated into a motor position, which in turn, is fed back to
software in the Operator ’s Console PC.
The Discovery Control Panel is located at the head end of the table and communicates
with the Distribution Board via the Control Panel Interface Board. The Control Panel
provides the operator with a means to issue manual
man ual commands to move table and arm
1-7
motors, turn power to the instrument on or off, and an indicator showing when X-rays are
being generated.
The C-Arm Interface Board controls the C-Arm Subsystem. Commands to the subsystem
arrive from the Distribution Board. The commands processed by the C-Arm Interface
Board are sent to the Positioning Laser, the X-Ray Controller (XRC), the Aperture Motor,
the Detector assembly, or the Filter Drum Assembly. The commands sent to the
Positioning Laserwhich
produce X-rays, are simple
poweron/off
level commands. Commands
of pulse to produce, andsent
the to the mode
pulse XRC tell it when
to be used. to
These commands will subsequently control the way the X-Ray Source
S ource (Tank) is driven by
the XRC. Instructions to the Aperture Motor are for selecting the aperture to be used for
the scan. The commands to the Filter Drum Assembly turn the Filter Drum on or off and
synchronize the filter drum with the AC line waveform. The last set of command signals is
sent to the Detector Assembly to synchronize the acquisition of data with the production
of the X-rays from the source (Tank).
Detector Assembly
Laser
Assembly
Detector Board
(Detectors, Muxes,
and A/D Converter)
To/From C-Arm Aperture Motor

Distribution Interface and
Board Board Position Sensor
Filter Drum Motor

and
Position Sensor
X-Ray X-Ray
Source
Controller
(Tank)
From
DIN
Rail
1-7. Discovery C-Arm Block Diagram

Figure 1-7.
The C-Arm Interface Board collects data from most of the circuits mentioned above for
transmission back to the Distribution Board and, finally, the Discovery software. The
Aperture Motor Assembly sends back position information indicating which of the
aperture slits is in position. The Filter Drum Assembly sends back filter and reference
phase information. The XRC sends back information concerning fault conditions, beam
conditions, and an AC Line signal for generating AC Line Interrupts to the software. The
Detector Board sends data collected from scans back
ba ck to the software through the C-Arm
1-8
Interface Board and the Distribution Board. Mathematical algorithms applied to this data
produce the scans seen by the operator and to calculate the BMD, BMC, and area of the
bone matter scanned.
Block Description
Computer Controls an
and cco
ommands al
all Di
Discovery ha
hardware mo
modules.
PCI Communications Controls the flow of commands to and from the Scanner modules via the
Controller Board communications bus.
Distri
Distribut
bution
ion Boar
Board
d Pro
Provid
vides
es the
the interc
interconn
onnect
ection
ionss betwee
between
n the Di
Disco
scover
very
y Operat
Operator'
or'ss Con
Consol
solee and th
thee
Scanner and distributes DC voltages.
Cont
Contro
roll P
Pan
anel
el Prov
Provid
ides
es swit
switch
ches
es fo
forr man
manua
uall
lly
y mov
movin
ing
g the
the C-Ar
C-Arm
m aand
nd Pati
Patien
entt Tab
Table
le.. Als
Also
o
provides Emergency Stop and Instrument On/Off switches.
TX Stepper Motor Controls the motion of the Patient Table
Table in and out motor and monitors table
Driver position information from the encoder
encoder..
TY Stepper Motor Controls the motion of the Patient Table
Table left to right motor and monitors table
Driver position information from the encoder (A and W only).
TZ Stepper Motor Controls the motion of the Patient Table left and right pedestal motor and monitors
Driver table position information from the string encoders (A and SL only).
AR Stepper Motor Controls the rotational motion of the C-Arm and monitors C-arm position
Driver information from the encoder (A and SL only).
AY Stepper Motor Controls the motion of the C-Arm left and right motor and monitors C-Arm
Driver position information from the encoder
encoder..
C-Arm
C-Arm Inte
Interfa
rface
ce Con
Contro
trols
ls the Apertu
Aperture
re and Fil
Filter
ter Drum
Drum moto
motors,
rs, gen
genera
erates
tes timin
timing
g aand
nd con
contro
troll sign
signals
als
for the X-Ray Controller and the Data Acquisition System, monitors the tape
switches, and provides power to the Positioning Laser.
X-
X-Ra
Ray
y Cont
Contro
roll
ller
er Cont
Contro
rols
ls tthe
he oper
operat
atio
ion
n of th
thee X-ra
X-ray
y Sour
Source
ce..
X-
X-Ra
Ray
y Sou
Sourc
rcee Uni
Unitt Ge
Gene
nera
rate
tess tthe
he X-
X-ra
ray
ybbea
eam.
m.
De
Dete
tect
ctor
or Boa
Board
rd Co
Conv
nver
erts
ts the
the X-ra
X-rays
ys iint
nto
o elec
electr
tric
ical
al sig
signa
nals
ls.. In
Inte
tegr
grat
ates
es the
the si
sign
gnal
alss fr
from
om the
the So
Soli
lid
d
State Detectors and converts them to a digital value in the Analog-to-Digital
converter circuitry.
Cont
Contro
roll Pan
Panel
el Prov
Provid
ides
es th
thee ope
opera
rato
torr wit
with
h a mea
means
ns to repo
reposi
siti
tion
on the
the tab
table
le,, C
C-A
-Arm
rm,, and
and to turn
turn o
on
n
the laser.
Positi
Positioni
oning
ng Lase
Laserr Provid
Provides
es a laser
laser ccros
rossha
shair
ir b
beam
eam to assi
assist
st in
in po
posit
sition
ioning
ing the pat
patien
ientt on the Pat
Patien
ientt
Table.
1-9
1.3 Product Specifications

SPECIFICATION MODEL DEFINITION
Scanning Me
Method All Multi-detector aarrray, in
indexing table, an
and motorized C
C--arm
X-ray System All Switched Pulse Dual-Energy X-ray tube, operating at 100 and
140kV,, 5mA avg. at 50% duty cycle, 2.5mA avg. at 25% duty
140kV
cycle (30sec. maximum), Tungsten target
Detector System A 216 multi-channel detector consisting of CdWO4 scintillators
coupled to silicon diodes
SL
SL/C
/C// W 12
128
8 mul
multi
ti-c
-cha
hann
nnel
el dete
detect
ctor
or cons
consis
isti
ting
ng of Cd
CdWO
WO4 scintillators
coupled to silicon diodes
Scanning Sites A Lumbar spine (in AP and lateral projections), proximal femur
(hip) forearm, IVA Spine, and whole body
SL Lumbar spine ((iin AP and lateral projections),
s), p
prroximal femur
(hip), IVA Spine, and forearm
W Lumbar spine (in AP and decubitus lateral projections),
proximal femur (hip), forearm, IVA
IVA spine (AP only) and whole
body
C Lumbar spine (in AP and decubitus lateral projections),
proximal femur (hip), forearm, and IVA spine (AP only)
Scan Region A 1.95m (76.77 in.) x.65m (25.59 in.) maximum
SL 96cm (38 in.) x .65m (25.59 in.) maximum
W 1.97m (77.5 in.) x.65m (25.59 in.) maximum
C .96m (38 in.) x.51m (20 in.) maximum
Scatter Radiation All Less than 10µGy/h (1mrad/h) at 2m (79 in.) from the center of
the X-ray beam for all scans
Leakage Radiation All The Discovery meets the requirements of 21 CFR 1020.30(k)
for leakage from the X-ray source
External Shielding All Contact state regulatory agency.
Requirement
Calibration All Self Calibrating using Hologic Automatic Internal Reference
System. Operator calibration NOT required.
1-10
SPECIFICATION MODEL DEFINITIO

ION
N
System Weight Scanner Console
installed
A & SL 327kg 720lb 34.1kg 75lb
C&W 295kg 650lb
System Weight System
shipping
A & SL 659kg 1450lb
C&W 568kg 1250lb
Operating All 15o – 32o C (59o - 90o F)
Temperature
Humidity All 20 – 80% relative Humidity, non-condensing
Storage All 15o – 32o C (59o - 90o F)
Temperature
Humidity All 20 – 80% relative Humidity, non-condensing
Footprint Length Width Height
m inches m inches m inches
Table extended A&W 3.02 119 1.50 59 1.42 56
Table not extended A&W 2.02 79.5 1.22 48 1.42 56
C & SL 2.02 79.5 1.40 55 1.42 56
Average Heat Load ALL 1000w (3400 BTU/hr)
Patient Table A & SL Adj
Adjust
ustabl
able,
e, 71cm
71cm (28 in
in.)
.) from
from floor
floor when
when sc
scann
anning
ing in A
AP
P mode
mode
Height 86.4cm (34 in.) at maximum elevation
C &W 71cm (28 iin
n.) +/- 2
25
5mm ((1
1 in
in.)
Posi
Positi
tio
oning
ning Las
Laser All
All Dio
Diode la
lasser (<
(<1
1mW)
mW) cr
cro
oss ha
haiir, with
with emer
emerge
genc
ncy
y mechan
chaniical
cal shu
hutt
tter
er
X-Ray Collimation All Dual movable aperture wi
witth 0.5m
.5mm and 1.0mm slits
Leakage Current All Normal <75µ A Single Fault <400µ A
Resolution All 0.5 line pair/mm approximately 1.0mm
1-11
1.3.1 Exam Mode(s) Performance

Exam Type Model Default Duration(s) Scan Site Dose in vivo
Scan @ Default mGy Precision
Length (in.) Length max (%)
AP Spine High All 8.0 163 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.20 1. 0
Def
AP Spine Array All 8.0 82 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.20 1. 0

AP Spine Fast All 8.0 41 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.10 1. 0
AP Spine Turbo All 8.0 21 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.05 1. 0

Express Scan All 8.0 10 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.07 1. 0
Decubitus Lateral C&W 8.0 160 L2, L3, L4 0.40 1. 0
Spine Fast
Lat Spine High A & SL 8.0 240 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.35 1. 0
Def
Lat Spine Array A & SL 8.0 240 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.70 1. 0
Lat Spine Fast A & SL 6.0 120 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.35 1. 0
Hip High Def All 6.0 123 Femur (Total) 0.20 1. 0

Hip Array All 6.0 62 Femur (Total) 0.20 1. 0
Hip Fast All 6.0 31 Femur (Total) 0.10 1. 0
Hip Turbo All 6.0 16 Femur (Total) 0.05 1. 0
Dual Hip All 6.0 2X Scan Mode Left & Right Selecte Selected
Femur d Scan Scan
Mode Mode
Whole Body W 77.0 402 Whole Body 0.015 1. 0
A 77.0 180 Whole Body 0.01 1. 0
Forearm All 6.0 31 Forearm 0.10 1. 0
(Radius &
Ulna) (Total)
IVA SE AP All 16.1 10 Spine T5-L4 0.07 NA
Imaging
IVA SE R/L All 16.1 10 Spine T5-L4 0.07 NA
Lateral
IVA DE R/L All 13.6 511 Spine T5-L4 0.35 NA
Imaging
Small Animal A 2/3 149 Spine & Femur NA NA
Spine and Femur
Small Animal A 12.0 122 Whole Body NA NA
Whole Body
1-12
1.3.2 Duty Cycle:

C, W and SL IVA 12%
All Others 50%
A Whole Body 100%
IVA 12%
All Others 50%
1.3.3 Leakage Technique Factors

The leakage technique factors for all models of Discovery are the same. It is the maximum
continuous current at the maximum peak potential. This is X-ray mode #3. Peak potential
100/140kVp (dual energy), current 10mA peak 25% duty cycle or 2.5mA average.
1.3.4 Minimum Beam Filtration

The minimum filtration permanently in the beam is 3.7mm Al equivalent @80kV.
@80kV.
1.3.5 Measured Half Value

ing Potentials Value Layer (HVL) At Different Operat-
Measure
ured operating potenti
ntial Measu
asured Half Value Layer
Discovery All
80kV 3.7mm Al equivalent
1.3.6 Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current

Power Al
Alll 100V
100VAC 16A
16A 50/6
50/60H
0Hz,
z, Max
Max app
appaarent
rent resi
resist
stan
ance
ce = 0
0.3
.32
2 ohm
ohm
Requirements: 120VAC
120VAC 14A 50
50/60Hz,
/60Hz, Max apparent resistance = 0.32 ohm
230VAC
230VAC 8A 50/60Hz, Max apparent resi
resistance
stance = 1.28 ohm
1.3.7 Technique Factors for Maximum Line Current

Peak Potential 140kVp
Tube Current 10mA peak, 50% duty factor or 5mA average.
1-13
1.3.8 Maximum Deviation

The maximum deviation from the preindication given by labeled technique factor control
settings or indicators are as follows:
Peak Potential: +/- 15%
Current: +/- 40%
Time: +/- 10%
1.3.9 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors

The measurement criteria of the technique factors is as follows:
Peak Potential: The voltage peak is measured with an oscilloscope. Voltage is a squarewave pulse.
Peak is defined as the peak voltage of the 4 millisecond pulse, discounting any initial
overshoot.
Current: Current is measured with an oscilloscope on the last millisecond of the 4 millisecond
pulse.
Time: Time of each pulse is measured with an oscilloscope and defined as the time between
50% rise and fall times of the peak potential pulse. Time of the scan is measured by
counting the number

synchronous with theof
ACAC line pulses from the start to the end. X-ray pulses are
line.
1-14
Section 2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This section provides a detailed functional description along with interconnection diagrams and
descriptions of the Hologic Discovery. Refer to Section 1 for a block diagram and a brief
functional description of each block.
2.1 Computer
The Discovery Scanner is interfaced to a PCI Communications Controller Board/ISA Bus
computer which controls table and C-arm movement, X-ray
X -ray generation, performs all necessary
calculations, and manages both the patient and QC database information.
The computer is a Pentium III-based (or higher) PC that comes equipped with floppy disk drive,
hard disk drive, keyboard, mouse, 17” color monitor, and CDROM R/W for archiving scans and
backups of the system database. For details pertaining to the computer and its associated
components, please refer to the documentation shipped with each unit.
2.2 PCI Communications Controller Board

The PCI Communications Controller Board handles all the communications
co mmunications between the
Computer and the Scanner C-Arm and Table assemblies. The board resides in one of the computer
internal ISA slots and communicates with the computer via the computer's I/O bus. It connects to
the Distribution Board in the Scanner through a 50-conductor ribbon cable. This cab cable
le contains
two independent communications links (one synchronous and one asynchronous) and additional
system control signals. Each signal requires a pair of conductors for differential (RS422) noise
immunity.
The asynchronous link communicates with the Motor Controller
Co ntroller Boards (TX, TY
TY,, AR, and AY),
the TZ Drive Board, the C-Arm Interface Board,
Board , and the Control Panel Controller section of the
Detector Board (or the Control Panel Interface on A and SL models). The synchronous link
communicates with the Data Acquisition System (DAS).
2.2.1 Interface Connections

Figure 2-1 on page 2-3 describes the interconnections between the PCI Communications
Controller Board and the Distribution Board. The table also identifies the connectors and their pin
assignments.
2-1
Table 2-1. PCI Communications Controller Board/Distribution Board

Interconnection Descriptions.
Signal Pair Description PCI1 Pin Dist2 Pin

ATD+ Asynchronous data to the Scanner. JP1-2 JP10-3
ATD- JP1-27 JP10-4
STD+ Synchronous data to the Scanner. JP1-28 JP10-6
STD- JP1-4 JP10-7
STCLK+ Synchronous data clock from PCI Communications JP1-5 JP10-9
STCLK- Controller Board to Distribution Board. Synchronizes JP1-30 JP10-10
data to the Scanner.
STFRM+ Synchronous data frame from PCI Communication JP1-31 JP10-12
STFRM- Command Board to Distribution Board. JP1-7 JP10-13
ARD+ Asynchronous Data from the Scanner. JP1-8 JP10-15
ARD- JJP1-33 JP10-16
SRD+ Synchronous Data from the Scanner. JP1-34 JP10-18
SRD- JP1-10 JP10-19
SRCLK+ Synchronous data clock from PCI Communication JP1-11 JP10-21
SRCLK- Command Board to Distribution Board. Synchronizes JP1-36 JP10-22
data from the Scanner.
SRFRM+ Synchronous data frame from Distribution Board to JP1-37 JP10-24
SRFRM- PCI Communication Command Board. JP1-13 JP10-25
EMERGENCY_IN+ Signals an emergency condition. Generated by the C- JP1-14 JP10-27
EMERGENCY_IN- Arm Interface Board. JP1-39 JP10-28
ZEROX+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system wide JP1-40 JP10-30
ZEROX- synchronization. Generated by the C-Arm Interface JP1-16 JP10-31
Board.
INTEGRATE+ Synchronous signal for Detector Integrate period. JP1-17 JP10-33
INTERGATE- Generated by the C-Arm Interface Board. JP1-42 JP10-34
SYSRESET+ Resets the Scanner controllers. JP1-20 JP10-39
SYSRESET- JP1-45 JP10-40
EMERGENCY+ Removes power from the Scanner motor drivers and JP1-49 JP10-48
EMERGENCY- the X-ray system JP1-25 JP10-49
Note: 1 PCI = PCI Communication Controller Board

2 Dist = Distribution Board
2-2
PCI
Communication DISTRIBUTION
Command BOARD
Board
KP1085_004-0201
2-1. PCI Communication Command Board/Distribution Board

Figure 2-1.
Interconnection Diagram
2.3 Distribution Board

The Distribution Board provides interconnections between the Discovery Operator's
Console (PC) and the Scanner. It passes several signal lines from the Operator's Console
and power lines from the DIN rail directly to the C-Arm Interface module. It also provides
buffering and individual drivers and receivers for various signal lines to and from
individual Scanner modules and the PCI Communication Command Board. The
Distribution Board is located in the Electronics Tray in the base of the Scanner.
One cable connects the Operator's
Ope rator's Console (PC) communications bus to the Distribution
Board. One cable connects
co nnects to the Distribution Board from the DIN rail. This cable brings
DC power to the Distribution Board and connects
conne cts the X-Ray On and Emergency signal
lines to the Power Module.
Up to eight cables connect the Distribution Board to the various Scanner boards
depending on instrument model. Four cables connect
conn ect to the four Motor Controller Boards
(Table
(Table X, Table Y
Y,, Arm R, and
a nd Arm Y). A single cable connects to the TZ Drive Board.
Two cables (one signal and one power) connect to the C-Arm Interface Board. In addition,
one cable connects to the
the scanner Control Panel Interface Board. In the C and W models,
this board
Control is a Interface
Panel separate section ofathe
Board is Detector
separate Board.
board In the
located A and
under the SL versions, the
table.
The Distribution Board has provision for three jumpers that can be installed to override
the EMERGENCY signal lines when troubleshooting.
2.3.1 Power
The Distribution Board receives +24 and +/-15VDC from the Multi-voltage DC Switching
Power Module. The +24VDC is applied through four individual circuit breakers to the
Table X, Table
Table Y,
Y, Arm R, and Arm Y Motor Controller Boards.
Boards. The +24 and +/-15VDC
are passed to the C-Arm Interface Board. The +24 VDC is also reduced to +7 and +5VDC
by regulators to power op-amps and analog switches located on this board. The +7VDC is
passed to the Control Panel Controller Board. The +5VDC powers the digital section of
2-3
the Distribution Board. The +24VDC power supply is not closely regulated and its outputs
may range from +24V to +35V under normal conditions.
Note: +7VDC may measure anywhere from
from +6.25VDC to +7.25VDC. This is true
everywhere +7VDC is shown in this manual.
Limits for +/- 15VDC
Six green LEDs indicate the status of the +28 (on QDR-4500s, +24 on Discovery), +24,
+15, -15, +7 and +5VDC
+5VD C (ON indicates the respective voltage is present). Five red LEDs
indicate the status of the five circuit breakers applying voltage
vo ltage to the motor drivers/
controller.. ON indicates the circuit breaker has been
controller b een tripped by an over-current condition.

Figure 2-2 shows connections to/from the Distribution Board.
OPERATOR’S
CONSOLE
COMPUTER
COMMUNICATIONS
CONTROLLER
BOARD
INSTRUMENT
ELECTRONICS
TRAY
2-2. Distribution Board High Level Interconnection Diagram

Figure 2-2.
2-4
2.4 Motor Controller Board

The Motor Controller Board is a microprocessor controlled power driver circuit for use
with a two-coil bipolar stepper motor. It receives high-level commands through the
Distribution Board from the host computer, and applies
app lies 24-volt pulses to the stepper motor
windings. The Discovery uses four identical Motor Controller Boards to control and drive
the Table X (Table In/Out), Table Y (Table Left/Right), C-Arm Y (C-Arm Left/Right), C-
Arm R (Arm rotation, A/SL only) stepper motors. The motor windings are driven by two
integrated H-bridges. These integrated circuits provide internal level conversion and
power limiting. Their logic level control inputs are driven from a stepper motor control
microcircuit that receives commands from the microprocessor. The control circuit senses
the current in the motor windings and adjusts the duty cycle of the applied voltage in such
a way as to limit the maximum motor current. The maximum value is determined by an 8-
bit control word at a Digital to Analog Converter.
Each Motor Controller Board monitors the position of its respective mechanism using a
voltage received from an associated Position Encoder connected to the mechanism. The
Position Encoder is a precision potentiometer that divides a +/-3V reference source. The
output voltage is fed to a sense amplifier in proportion to the position of the mechanism
mechan ism
driven by the motor. The sense amplifier output is converted to digital value that provides
position feedback to the microprocessor.
microprocessor.
The Motor Controller Boards receive movement commands
co mmands from the Discovery computer
via the communications bus. Each Motor Controller Board contains an ID switch and four
status indicators (LEDs). The ID switch is a 16-position rotary encoded switch (SW1) that
is read during system initialization to determine the Motor Controller Board address for
communicating with the Discovery computer. ID switch settings for the Motor Controller
Boards are as follows:
Table X drive 4
Table Y drive 5
C-Arm Rotation 6
C-Arm Y drive 7
The four red status LEDs provide visual indications of motor drive power on, Stepper
CPU active, motor drive direction, and motor step pulses.
The Motor Controller Board also has provision (JP2) for connecting
connec ting limit switches to
inhibit motor operation when the mechanism goes beyond established mechanical limits.
This feature is not used in the Discovery and, therefore, no cable is connec
connected
ted to JP2.
2.4.1 Power
Power input to the Motor Controller Board is +24VDC. This voltage provides the motor
drive power and is converted down
do wn to +5VDC for use by logic ccircuits
ircuits on the board. The
+5VDC is also converted to -5VDC. Two green LEDs provide a visual indication of the
power present on the Motor Controller Board.
2-5

Figure 2-3 shows the typical interconnections between the Distribution Board, the Motor
Controller Board, the Stepper Motor,
Motor, and the Position Encoder. Figure 2-1 describes the
interconnections between the Distribution Board and the Motor Controller.
Controller. Table 2-3
describes the interconnections between each Motor Controller and its respective stepper
motor and position encoder. The tables also identify the connectors and their pin
assignments.
To/From
Distribution Board ( )
( )
ARD+, ARD- ( )
STEPPER
ATD+, ATD- ( ) MOTOR
SYSRESET+, SYSRESET- MOTOR
+28V CONTROLLER +REF
28V_RET ( ) POSITION
-REF ENCODER
2-3. Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Diagram

Figure 2-3.
Table 2-2.Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description Table X Table Y C-Arm Y Pin(s)
ARD+ Asynchronous Re
Receive Da
Data. JP7 JP5 JP11 11
ARD- 12
ATD+ Asyn
Asynch
chro
ron
nou
ouss Trans
ansmit Data
Data.. JP7 JP5 JP11 14
ATD- 15
SYSRST+ System Reset. Resets the Motor JP7 JP5 JP11 17
SYSRST- Controller Board. 18
28V DC power for the Motor JP7 JP5 JP11 2,3,4,5
28V_RET Controller Board. 1,6,7,8
Table 2-3. Motor Controller Board/Stepper Motor and Position Encoder

Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description Pin
(No label) Motor drive signals (4). JP5-1 - JP5-4
+REF ((+
+3V) Precision p
po
ositive v
vo
oltage to
to p
po
osition p
po
otentiometer. JP3-1
(No label) Position encoder wiper return voltage. JP3-3
-REF (-3V) Precision negative voltage to position potentiometer. JP3-5
2.5 TZ Drive Board (A and SL Only)

The TZ Drive Board is a microprocessor-controlled
microprocessor-controlled power driver circuit for the two AC
pedestal motors, which raise and lower the patient table of the Discovery A and SL. This
2-6
board is located in the Electronics Tray in the rear of the bottom of the Scanner base
assembly.
The TZ Drive Board communicates with the PCI Board, via the Distribution Board, to
drive the pedestal motors under computer control. Manual repositioning of the pedestal
may be required in case of an emergency. In this case, manual control is provided through
the Table switches of the Scanner’
Scanner ’s Operator Control Panel.
The TZ Drive board monitors the position of both pedestals using signals received from an
associated Position Encoder connected to the respective pedestal.
2.5.1 Service Switches

The TZ Drive board contains four service switches used during replacement of a defective
pedestal or Position Encoder
Encode r. Table 2-4 describes these switches and their respective
functions.
Caution: The TZ drive motors
motors are desi
designed
gned to run at a 5% duty cycle. If the motors
motors
overheat, the built-in thermal cutouts may trip and cause
c ause the motors to stop
functioning. If this occurs, you must wait about 20 minutes before
functionality is restored.
The TZ drive motors are designed to run at a 5% duty cycle. If the motors overheat, the
built-in thermal cutouts may trip and cause the motors to stop functioning. If this occurs,
you must wait about 20 minutes before functionality is restored.
Table 2-4.TZ Drive Service Switches
Switch Function
Modee (Normal/
Mod (Normal/Ser
Servic
vice)
e) Determ
Determine
iness whether
whether the
the TZ Drive
Drive is in
in Normal
Normal or Servi
Service
ce
operation.
Di
Dire
recti
ction
on (U
(Up/
p/Dow
Down)
n) When
When the
the TZ
TZ driv
drivee iiss in
in Ser
Servi
vice
ce mode
mode,, dete
determ
rmin
ines
es th
thee
direction of pedestal movement (not active in normal
mode).
Left When the TZ drive is in Service mode, moves the left
pedestal in the direction specified by the Direction switch
(not active in normal mode).
Right When the TZ drive is in Service mode, moves the right
pedestal in the direction specified by the Direction switch
(not active in normal mode).
Reset Resets the board after manual operation. The TZ Drive
board must be reset after any manual operation.
2.5.2 Power
Power input to the TZ Drive Board is +24VDC from the Distribution Board and 240VAC
240VAC
from the DIN Rail. The +24VDC powers circuitry located on this board and is reduced to
2-7
+5VDC. The +5VDC is converted to -5VDC and +/-3VDC. The +/-5VDC powers logic
circuitry on this board, while the +/- 3VDC provides the reference voltage for the position
sensors. Two
Two green LEDs provide visual indication of the +24 and +5VDC status (ON
indicates the respective voltage is present).
The 240VAC
240VAC power is connected
c onnected through control
co ntrol relays to the pedestal
pe destal motors.

Figure 2-4 shows the interconnections between the Distribution Board, the TZ Drive
Board, the Pedestal Motors, and the Pedestal
Pede stal Position Encoders. Table 2-5 describes the
interconnections between the Distribution Board and the TZ Drive Board. Table 2-6
describes the line voltage (240VAC,
(240VAC, line to line) between the DIN Rail Assembly and the
TZ Drive Board. Table 2-7 describes the interconnections between the TZ Drive Board
and the two pedestal motors and their respective position encoders. The tables also
identify the interconnection connector and pin assignments.
To/From Distribution Board

Board
ARD+, ARD- 120V(A)_UP_LEFT

ATD+, ATD- 120V(A)_DWN_LEFT LEFT
120V(B)_LEFT
SYSRESET+, GND_PED PEDESTAL
MOTOR
EMERGENCY+,
MAN_UP*, MAN_UP_RET
MAN_DOWN*, M AN_DOWN_R
AN_DOWN_RET
ET
+24V +3.0VREF
LEFT
(Position Signal)
PEDESTAL
-3.0VREF POSITION
To/From TZ ENCODER
DIN Rail DRIVE 120V(A)_UP_RIGHT
Assembly BOARD 120V(A)_DWN_RIGHT RIGHT
120V(B)_RIGHT PEDESTAL
120V(A)_RIGHT GND_PED MOTOR
120V(B)_RIGHT
GND_PED
120V(A)_LEFT +3.0VREF RIGHT
(Position Signal)
120V(B)_LEFT -3.0VREF PEDESTAL
POSITION
GND_PED
ENCODER
2-4. Distribution Board/TZ Drive Board Interconnection Diagram

Figure 2-4.
Table 2-4 shows the interconnections between the Distribution
D istribution Board, the TZ Drive
Board, the Pedestal Motors, and the Pedestal Position Encoder, Table 2-5 describes the
interconnections between the Distribution Board and the TZ Drive Board. Table 2-6
describes the line voltage
vo ltage (240VAC
(240VAC line to line) between the DIN Rail Assembly and the
TZ Drive Board. Table 2-7 describes the interconnection between the TZ Drive BoardBoa rd and
the two pedestal motors and their respective
respec tive position encoders. The tables also identify the
interconnection connectors and pin assignments.
2-8
Table 2-5. Distribution Board/TZ Drive Board Interconnection Descriptions

Signal Description Pin(s)
ARD+ Asynchronous Receive Data. JP1-11
ARD- JP1-12
ATD+ Asynchronous Transmit Data. JP1-14
ATD- JP1-15
SYSRST+ System Reset. Resets the TZ Drive board. JP1-17
SYSRST- JP1-18
EMERGENCY+ Enables manual operation of the pedestals in the case JP1-20
EMERGENCY- of an emergency (under control of the Control
C ontrol Panel JP1-21
Table switch on the Patient Table).
MAN_UP* Ra
Rais
ises
es the
the Pat
Patie
ient
nt Tab
Table
le iin
n the
the case
case o
off an
an em
emer
erge
genc
ncy
y. JP
JP1-
1-23
23
MAN_UP_RET JP1-24
MAN_DWN* Lower
Lowerss the
the Patie
Patient
nt Tabl
ablee in th
thee case
case o
off an eme
emerg
rgenc
ency
y. JP1-26
JP1-26
MAN_DWN_RET JP1-27
+24V DC power for the Motor Controller board. JP1-5, JP1-6
+6.5V Not used. JP1-2, JP1-3
Table 2-6. DIN Rail Assembly/TZ Drive Board Interface Descriptions

120V(A)_LEFT AC voltage (120) to drive the Left Pedestal motor. JP6-4
120V(B)_LEFT AC voltage (120) to drive the Left Pedestal motor. JP6-5

120V(A)_RIGHT AC voltage (120) to drive the Right Pedestal motor. JP6-1
120V(B)_RIGHT AC voltage (120) to drive the Right Pedestal motor. JP6-2
GND_PED Ground line to the Left/Right Pedestal motor. JP6-3/JP6-
6
Table 2-7. TZ Drive Board/Pedestal Motors and Position Encoders


120V(
V(A
A)_UP_LEFT AC vol
voltage to the Left Pedestal motor to move the left JP5-1
end of the Patient Table up.
120
20V(
V(A)
A)_D
_DWN
WN_
_LE
LEF
FT AC vo
volt
ltag
agee to
to tthe
he Lef
eftt P
Peede
dest
stal
al motor
otor to move
move the lef
leftt JP5-2
end of the Patient Table down.
120V(B)_LEFT AC line to the Left Pedestal motor. JP5-3
GND_PED Ground line to the Left Pedestal motor. JP5-4
120V(
V(A
A)_UP_RIGHT AC vvooltage to
to tth
he Ri
Right
ght P
Peedestal m
mo
otor to m
mo
ove th
the JP4-1
right end of the Patient Table up.
120V
120V(A
(A)_
)_DW
DWN_
N_RI
RIGH
GHT
T AC volt
voltag
agee to th
thee Righ
Rightt Pede
Pedest
stal
al mo
moto
torr to mo
move
ve the
the JP4-2
right end of the Patient Table down.
120V(B)_RIGHT AC line to the Right Pedestal motor. JP4-3
GND_PED Ground line to the Right Pedestal motor. JP4-4
2-9

+3.0VREF Precision positive voltage to Left/Right Pedestal JP3-1/JP2-1
position encoder potentiometer.
potentiometer.
(Position Signal) Left/Right pedestal position encoder wiper return JP3-3/JP2-3
voltage.
-3.0VREF Precision negative voltage to Left/Right Pedestal JP3-4/JP2-4
position encoder potentiometer.
potentiometer.
2.6 Control Panel Controller Board

The Control Panel Controller Board on the Discovery is a separate board under the table.
Its function is to interface the Scanner Operator Control Panel
Pane l to the computer allowing
the software to determine the state of the Operator Control
Con trol Panel switches, to define the
state of the various Operator Control Panel LEDs, anda nd to control motor movement. The
board is located under the table at the head end of the scanner.
The Control Panel Controller communicates with the Operator's Console computer
c omputer using
the asynchronous communications signals ARD and
an d ATD
ATD of the communications buss and
the system control signals SYSRESET, XRAY_LIGHT, and EMERGENCY.
2.6.1 Power
The Control Panel Controller Board receives
rece ives +7VDC from the Distribution Board. The +7
is reduced to +5VDC to power the circuitry on this board and is applied to the Operator
Control Panel to power the LEDs. A green LED, on this board, provides a visual
indication of the +5VDC power (ON indicates the voltage
v oltage is present).

Figure 2-5 shows the interconnections between the Distribution Board, Control Panel
Controller Board, and the Operator Control Panel.
Table 2-8 describes the interconnections between the Distribution Board and the Control
Panel Controller.
Controller. Table 2-10 describes the interconnections between the Control Panel
Controller and the Operator Control Panel. The tables also identify the connectors and
their pin assignments.
2-10
To/From
Distribution Board
ARD+, ARD- L0_PWR* - L7_PWR*
ATD+, ATD- TZ_PWR*
SYSRESET+, SYSRESET- XRAY_LIGHT_PWR*
EMERGENCY+, EMERGENCY- SW0 - SW2
XRAY_LIGHT+, XRAY_LIGHT- SR0 - SR2

CONTROL
MAN_TZ_UP MAN_TZ_UP OPERATOR
PANEL
MAN_TZ_UP_RET MAN_TZ_UP_RET CONTROL
CONTROLLER
MAN_TZ_DOWN MAN_TZ_DOWN PANEL
MAN_TZ_DOWN_RET MAN_TZ_DOWN_RET
EMERBENCY_PANEL EMERGENCY_PANEL
HW_EMERGENCY_RET HW_EMERGENCY_RET
+7V +5V
To/From
TILT_A
C-Arm
TILT_B
Tilt Switch
(A/SL)
2-5. Control Panel Controller Interconnection Diagram

Figure 2-5.
Table 2-8. Distribution Board/Control Panel Controller Interconnection
Interconnec tion Descriptions
ARD+ Asynchronous Receive Data from the PCI JP2-4
ARD- Communication Command Board via the JP2-5
Distribution Board.
ATD+ Asynchronous Transmit Data to the PCI JP2-7
ATD- Communication Command Board via the JP2-8
Distribution Board
SYSRESET+ System Reset from the PCI Communication JP2-10
SYSRESET- Command Board via the Distribution Board. JP2-11
Resets the Control Panel
Pane l Controller.
Controller.
EMERGENCY+ Emergency TZ drive indicator from the PCI JP2-13
EMERGENCY- Communication Command Board via the JP2-14
Distribution Board.
XRAY_LIGHT+ X-Ray Light from the X-Ray Controller via JP2-16
XRAY_LIGHT- the C-Arm Interface and Distribution Boards. JP2-17
EMERGENCY_CPANEL State of the STOP switch and of the collision sensor. JP2-19
HW_EMERGENCY_RET (Part of the safety daisy chain.) JP2-20
+7V DC power for the Control Panel Controller JP2-2

Board
2-11
Table 2-9. Control Panel Controller/Control Panel Interconnection Descriptions

Signal Description CPC
1
CP
2
Pin Pin
L0_PWR* Turns on the ENABLE switch LED. JP6-11 JP1-11
L1_PWR* Turns on the HOME switch LED. JP6-12 JP1-12
L2_PWR* Turns on the LOAD switch LED. JP6-13 JP1-13
L3_PWR* Turns on the TABLE switch IN/OUT LED. JP6-14 JP1-14
L4_PWR* Not used. JP6-15 JP1-15
L5_PWR* Turns on the C-ARM switch RIGHT/LEFT JP6-16 JP1-16
LED.
L6_PWR* Not used. JP6-17 JP1-17
L7_PWR* Turns on the Laser LED. JP6-18 JP1-18
XRAY_LIGHT_PWR* Turns on the X_RAY LED JP6-19 JP1-19
SW0 Control signal to determine the state of the JP6-4 JP1-4
C-ARM and LASER switches.
SW1 Control signal to determine the state of the JP6-5 JP1-5
TABLE IN/OUT switches.
SW2 Control HOME

LOAD, signal toand
detENABLE
ermine theswitches.
state of the JP6-6 JP1-6
SR0 Returns the state of the C-ARM switch LEFT JP6-1 JP1-1
position when SW0 is active. Signals the
state of the TABLE switch IN position when
SW1 is active. Signals the state of the LOAD
switch when SW2 is active.
SR1 Returns the state of the C-ARM switch JP6-2 JP1-2
RIGHT position when SW0 is active. Signals
the state of the TABLE switch OUT position
when SW1 is active. Signals the state of the
HOME switch when SW2 is active.
SR2 Returns the state of the LASER and JP6-3 JP1-3
ENABLE switches when SW2 is active.
EMERGENCY_CPANEL Returns the state of the STOP switch. (Part of
o f JP6-23 JP1-23
HW_EMERGENCY_RET the safety daisy chain.) JP6-24 JP1-24
+5V Provides power for the Control Panel LEDs. JP6-21 JP1-21
JP6-22 JP1-22
Note: 1 CPC = Control Panel Controller

2 CP = Control Panel
2.7 C-Arm Interface Board

The C-Arm Interface Board distributes DC power and signals to the Data Acquisition
System (DAS) and provides control electronics for the devices located in the C-Arm
assembly.. It passes several signal and power lines from the Distribution Board directly to
assembly
2-12
the DAS. It also provides buffering for various signal lines. The C-Arm Interface Board is
located near the rear of the lower C-Arm’s
C-Arm’s horizontal shelf.
Note: On the Discovery A model, the Data
Data Acquisition System
System (DAS) consis
consists
ts of the
the
Analog to Digital Converter, Integrator/Multiplexor, and Solid State Detector
Boards. On the Discovery SL, C, and W models, a single-board, 128-Channel
Detector Assembly is used.
The C-Arm Interface provides circuitry to:
• Control
Control and
and monitor
monitor operation
operation of of the
the X-ray
X-ray Control
Controller
ler Board.
Board. Four LEDs (two red,
one green, and one
o ne yellow) on this board, provide a visual indication of the status
of the X-Ray Controller and the X-ray control circuitry of this board.
• Genera
Generatete timin
timingg referen
references
ces to
to the DAS and and PCI Commu
Communicnicati
ation
on Comman
Command d Board.
Board.
• Cont
Contro
roll powe
powerr to the
the Pos
Posititio
ioni
ning
ng Las
Laser
er..
• Move the Aperture
Aperture stepper motor and monitomonitorr its
its mechanically
mechanically linked position-
position-
sensing device.
• Move
Move the steppe
stepperr motor
motor of thethe Referen
Reference ce Drum
Drum device
device and monit
monitor
or the
the encoded
encoded
signals returned from each drum of the device. Two green LEDs, on this board,
provide a visual indication of the Reference Drum operation.
• Gene
Generarate
te +7V
+7VDCDC forfor the
the DAS
DAS sys
syste
tem
m
2.7.1 Continuity Daisy Chain

The C-Arm Interface Board is part of two linked chains of boards. Removing any
a ny of these
boards conveys an alarm message to the host computer indicating that the electrical
integrity of the system has been compromised. This message can be decoded by the host
computer to detect the extent of the damage.
2.7.2 Power
The C-Arm Interface Board receives +24 and +/-15VDC from the Distribution Board. The
+24VDC powers the Aperture and Reference Drum stepper motor driver circuitrycircuitry.. The +/-
15V is passed through this board to the DAS. The +24VDC is also reduced to +5 and
+7VDC. The +5VDC powers the digital
d igital section of this board and the laser while the
+7VDC is applied to the DAS.
Three green LEDs, on this board, provide a visual indication of the +24 and +5VDC
power (ON indicates the respective voltage is present). The third LED monitors the
+28VDC used on the QDR-4500 models.
mode ls. On the Discovery, this voltage is actually
+24VDC.

Figure 2-6 shows the interconnections between the Distribution Board and the C-Arm
Interface Board. Table 2-10 describes the interface signals and identifies the connec
connectors
tors
and their pin assignments.
2-13
CONTINUITY 1
ATD_CARM+, ATD_CARM-
STD+, STD-
STCLK+, STCLK-
STFRM+, STFRM-
ARD_CARM+, ARD_CARM-
SRD+, SRD-
SRCLK+, SRCLK-
SRFRM+, SRFRM-
EMERGENCY_CARM, EMERGENCY_CPANEL
EMERGENCY_CPANEL
LINESYNC+, LINESYNC-
INTEGRATE+, INTEGRATE-
C-ARM
DISTRIBUTION SYSRST_CARM+, SYSRST_CARM-
INTERFACE
BOARD EMERGENCY+, EMERGENCY-
BOARD
XRAY_LIGHT+, XRAY_LIGHT-
+15V
15V_RET
-15V
24V
24V_RET
28V
28V_RET
CONTINUITY 2
2-6. Distribution Board/C-Arm Interface Board

Figure 2-6.
Table 2-10. Distribution Board/C-Arm Interface Board Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description 1 2
Dist C-ARM
Pin Pin
ARD_CARM+ Asynch
Asynchron
ronous
ous d
data
ata tto
o the C-Ar
C-Arm
m Interf
Interface
ace B
Boar
oard.
d. JP1-3
JP1-3 JP1-3
ARD_CARM- JP1-4 JP1-4
STD+ Synchronous data through the C-Arm Interface JP1-6 JP1-6
STD- Board to the DAS. JP1-7 JP1-7
STCLK+ Synchronizes data through the C-Arm Interface JP1-9 JP1-9
STCLK- Board to the DAS. JP1-10 JP1-10
STFRM+ Synchronous channel data frame from PCI Board JP1-12 JP1-12
STFRM- through the Distribution Board to the DAS. JP1-13 JP1-13
ATD_CARM+ Asynchronous Data from the from the C-Arm JP1-15 JP1-15
ATD_CARM- Interface Board. JP1-16 JP1-16
SRD+ Synchronous Data through the C-Arm Interface JP1-18 JP1-18
SRD- Board from the DAS. JP1-19 JP1-19
2-14
Signal Description 1 2
Dist C-ARM
Pin Pin
SRCLK+ Synchronizes data through the C-Arm Interface JP1-21 JP1-21
SRCLK- Board from the DAS. JP1-22 JP1-22
SRFRM+ Synchronous channel data frame through JP1-24 JP1-24
SRFRM- Distribution Board to PCI Communication JP1-25 JP1-25
Command Board from the DAS.
XR_ZEROX_CC+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system wide JP1-30 JP1-30
XR_ZEROX_CC- synchronization. Generated by the C-Arm JP1-31 JP1-31
Interface Board.
INTEGR_CC+ Synchronous signal for Detector Integrate period. JP1-33 JP1-33
INTERG_CC- Generated by the C-Arm Interface Board. JP1-34 JP1-34
SYSRST_CARM+ Resets the C-Arm Interface Board. JP1-39 JP1-39
SYSRST_CARM- JP1-40 JP1-40
EMERGENCY_CARM+ Removes power from the Scanner motor drivers JP1-42 JP1-42
HW_EMGNCY_RET- and the X-ray system JP1-43 JP1-43
XRAY_LIGHT+ Applies power to the AUX X-RAY
X-RAY light outlet on JP1-48 JP1-48
XRAR_LIGHT- the Power Console. JP1-49 JP1-49
CONTINUITY 1 Emergency shutdown daisy chain. JP1-1 JP1-1

CONTINUITY 2 JP1-5 JP1-5
+15V Powers the Data Acquisition System. JP4-1 JP9-1
-15V JP4-3 JP9-3
15V_RET JP4-2 JP9-2
24V Generates +5VDC to power the digital section of JP4-4 JP9-4
24V_RET the C-Arm Interface Board, and +7VDC for JP4-5 JP9-5
power to the Data Acquisition System.
28V Powers the stepper motors and fan. JP4-6 JP9-6
28V_RET JP4-7 JP9-7
Note: 1 Dist = Distribution Board

2 C-Arm= C-Arm Interface Board
Figure 2-7 shows the boards and assemblies that connect
connec t to the C-Arm Interface Board.
2-15
LASER
ASSEMBLY
Data Acquisition System
ANALOG TO
INTEGRATOR SILICON
DIGITAL
MULTIPLEXOR DETECTORS
CONVERTER
TO/FROM
DISTRIBUTION APERTURE
C-ARM MOTOR AND
INTERFACE
SENSOR
DRUM
MOTOR AND
ENCODER PICKUP
X_RAY
X-RAY
CONTROLLER SOURCE
UNIT
2-7. C-Arm Interface Board High Level Interconnection Diagram

Figure 2-7.
2.8 X-Ray Controller Assembly (P/N 010-1273)

This assembly provides pulsed power to the primary winding of o f the high voltage
transformer in the X-Ray Source Unit and AC power to the primary winding of the
filament transformer.
transformer. It consists of a single printed circuit board and several large
components contained in a chassis mounted at the front of the lower C-arm, just in front of
the Tank Assembly.
Assembly. The XRC receives split 240VAC
240VAC power from the DIN Rail Power
Distribution Module. It also receives command and timing data from the C-Arm
Controller Board and it provides a line frequency timing signal and housekeeping and
diagnostic data to the C-Arm Interface Board.
2.8.1 Interface
Figure 2-8 shows the interface connections between the C-Arm Interface Board and the X-
Ray Controller Assembly.
Assembly. Table 2-11 describes the interface signals and identifies the
connectors and their pin assignments. Note that the AC input power comes directly from
the DIN Rail Power Module and connects
c onnects to the X-Ray Controller Assembly.
2-16
XR_RLY_ON+, XR_RLY_ON-
XR_FREQ+, XR_FREQ-
HIGH VO LT
LTAGE
AGE
XR_BEAMON+, XR_BEAMON-
TRANSFORMER
XR_ISET+, XR_ISET- PRIMARY
XR_KV1+, XR_KV1-
C-ARM XR_KV0+, XR_KV0-
INTERFACE
ACLINE+, ACLINE- X-RAY X-RAY
BOARD
LIGHTON+, LIGHTON- SOURCE
IBEAM+, IBEAM- CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY UNIT
KVP+, KVP-
XRFAULT+, XRFAULT- X_RAY TU BE
X_RAY
FILAMENT
TRANSFORMER
From DIN Rail 240 VAC PRIMARY
Power Module
2-8. C-Arm Interface Board/X-Ray Controller Assembly

Figure 2-8.
Table 2-11. C-Arm Interface Board/X-Ray Controller Assembly Interconnection Description
Signal Description C-Arm I/O XRC
Pins Logic Pins
Pins
XR_RLY_ON+ Allows the energy storage capacitor to JP12-1 JP7-1 JP3-1
XR_RLY_ON- be “trickle charged” before applying JP12-2 JP7-2 JP3-20
full power to avoid large turn-on current
surges that could cause the circuit
breaker to trip.
XR_FREQ+ States whether the line frequency is 50 JP12-3 JP7-3 JP3-2
XR_FREQ- or 60Hz. JP12-4 JP7-4 JP3-21
XR_BEAMON+ Controls the ON/OFF status of the X- JP12-5 JP7-5 JP3-3
XR_BEAMON- Ray beam. JP12-6 JP7-6 JP3-22
XR_ISET+ Selects the X-Ray beam current (3 or JP12-7 JP7-7 JP3-4
XR_ISET- 10mA). JP12-8 JP7-8 JP3-23
XR_kV1+ Selects the X-Ray beam energy (80, JP12-9 JP7-9 JP3-5
XR_kV1- 100, 120 or 140kVp). JP12-10 JP7-10 JP3-24
XR_kV0+ JP12-11 JP7-11 JP3-6
XR_kV0- JP12-12 JP7-12 JP3-25
ACLINE+ State
Statess the
the phase
phase of
of the powe
powerr frequ
frequenc
ency
y. JP12-1
JP12-19
9 JP7-19 JP3-10
ACLINE- JP12-20 JP7-20 JP3-29
LIGHTON+ States whether the X-Ray beam is ON/ JP12-21 JP7-21 JP3-11
LIGHTON- OFF. This signal controls the X-Ray JP12-22 JP7-22 JP3-30
ON lights of the C-Arm Control Panel,
the table Control Panel, and the
Operator's Console Power Module. It
also controls a remote X-ray ON light
through the Power Module when one is
connected.
2-17
Signal Description C-Arm I/O XRC

Pins Logic Pins
Pins
IBEAM+ Value of current pulses at the X-ray JP12-23 JP7-23 JP3-12
IBEAM- source. This is a frequency modulated JP12-24 JP7-24 JP3-31
diagnostic signal whose frequency is
proportional to the quantity being
monitored.
kVp+ Value of voltage pulses at the X-ray JP12-25 JP7-25 JP3-13
kVp- source. This is a frequency modulated JP12-26 JP7-26 JP3-32
diagnostic signal whose frequency is
proportional to the quantity being
monitored.
XRFAULT+ States whether or not any fault JP12-27 JP7-27 JP3-14
XRFAULT- condition exists in the X-Ray Controller JP12-28 JP7-28 JP3-33
Assembly.
2.8.2 X-Ray Controller Board

The X-ray Controller Board consists of five sections: Power, Timing Generator, Pulse
Generator, Filament Control, and H-Bridge.
The Power section converts the split 240 VAC input to the controller into the DC voltages
necessary for the board. The voltages produced in the Power section are: +5VDC (VDD –
used for analog circuitry), +5VDC (VCC – used for digital circuitry), and +/- 15 VDC.
The LED, D25, indicates the presence of voltage on the board.
The Timing Generator section produces the timing signals required by the control circuits.
The timing is based on a half
h alf cycle of the AC waveform and is, therefore, reset at each
zero crossing. An 8 MHz clock circuit provides pulses to a counter. This counter in turn
provides its output count to an EPROM as its address inputs. The pulse trains produced by
the EPROM are clocked into a register to clean up the signals that are then distributed to
various sections of the board. The ACHIGHLOW signal produced by b y the timing circuits is
sent to the C-Arm Interface Board where it is used to synchronize X-ray generation with
the Filter Drum position.
The Pulse Generator regulates and shapes the pulses delivered to the X-ray Tank. Sense
lines from the tank set the current threshold for the regulator. A reference voltage is
selected and fed to one of four circuits that control the high voltage peak potential. The
circuits adjust the reference voltage through four potentiometers,
poten tiometers, R55, R54, R39, and R40
that is used to establish the 80, 100, 120, and 140 KVp. The outputs of these circuits are
sent to a pulse width modulator circuit to produce
produc e the control pulses to the H-Bridge.
These pulses are optically coupled to the FETs
FETs in the H-Bridge.
The H-Bridge produces the actual pulses fed to the primary of the HV transformer in the
X-ray tank. AC is brought to the circuit, rectified, and filtered. The H-Bridge operates as
both an inverter and
a nd a pulse width modulator.
modulator. The H-Bridge usesu ses two pairs of FETs. Each
pair conducts 256 times for a total pulse
pu lse width of 4.096 milliseconds. Each of the FETs
FETs is
individually biased with the biasing network acting as a bleeder for the large storage
2-18
capacitors. The current load in the H-bridge is sensed and adjusted. The output v
voltage
oltage
from the H-Bridge is up to 200 volts peak.
The Filament circuit is a regulator. It receives current feedback from the tank indicating
the tube current. 10 volts
vo lts at the feedback input is equivalent to 1
100 milliamps of current in
the tube. The 10 volts are reduced to 5 and then fed to an A/D circuit to be converted to a
digital value for use by the control circuits. The value into the A/D is sampled towards the
end
to anofEPROM.
the pulseIfwhere it is stable.
the current
c urrent Afterthe
is correct, conversion, theEPROM
output of the digital value is fed
will be as anAnything
0 volts. address
other than 0 volts (“+” = high current, “-“= low current) will be added and accumulated in
two stages forming an error integrator. This digital error number is converted back to an
analog value and then used as the threshold of a comparator. The output of the comparator,
through additional circuitry,
circuitry, adjusts the duty cycle of the modulated filament voltage.
Refer to Table 2-11 for pin assignments.
2.9 X-Ray Source Unit

The X-Ray Source (commonly referred to as the Tank assembly) consists of the X-Ray
tube, the X-Ray tube filament transformer, the high voltage transformer, the high voltage
rectifier
tube andcircuit, andcurrent.
the beam the sensing circuits that monitor the high voltage applied to the X-ray
Table 2-12 describes the interconnections between the XX-Ray
-Ray Controller Assembly and
the X-Ray Source unit. The table also identifies the X-Ray Controller Assembly board
connector and pin assignments for each interconnection signal.
Table 2-12. X-Ray Controller Assembly/X-Ray Source Unit Interface
Signal Description XRC Board Controller Pin Tank
Terminal
HV_XFMR_PRI+ High Voltage Transformer H-Br
H-Briidg
dgee (J
(JP1)
P1) JP1-
1-1,
1, JP1
P1-2
-2 TB1-3
HV_XFMR_PRI- Primary JP1-3, JP1-4 TB1-4
FIL_XFMR_A Fila
Filame
ment
nt Tra
Trans
nsfo
form
rmer
er Pri
Prima
mary
ry I/
I/O
O & Logi
Logicc JP2-7 TB1-6*
FIL_XFMR_B (JP6) JP2-8 TB1-9
IF+ Beam Current Sense "+" I/O & Logic JP2-4 TB1-10
(JP6)
IF- Beam Current Sense "-" I/O & Logic JP2-5 TB1-7
(Chassis) (JP6)
TP1 Anode pulse monitor I/O & Logic JP2-2 TB1-12
(JP6)
TP2 Cathode pulse monitor I/O & Logic JP2-1 TB1-11
(JP6)
* A thermal overload protector is installed in series

series with the
the filament transformer
transformer
primary winding, between TB1-6 and TB1-8.
2-19
2.10 Data Acquisition System (C, W, and SL)

The Discovery Data Acquisition System (DAS) consists of a single board that tha t has 128
solid state (diode) detectors, the integration circuitry along with the analog-to-digital
conversion circuitry,
circuitry, and multiplexing circuitry to select the outputs in a sequential
fashion. The solid-state detectors are photodiodes with a cadmium
ca dmium tungstate (CdWO4)
crystal attached. X-rays striking the cadmium tungstate crystals are converted
c onverted into photons
of visible light. The diodes sense this light and convert the light into a current, which is
amplified in a current to voltage converter. The converter output is applied to an integrator
through analog switches. The analog switches all operate in parallel and are turned on
during the X-ray pulse. These switches are turned off during the integrator hold time to
prevent the introduction of integration noise into the data.
da ta. The turning on and off of these
switches is controlled by the INTEGRATE signal under control of the software. The
signal from the detectors is then integrated with the final voltage obtained
o btained held in a
sample/hold circuit. This voltage is sampled, in photodiode order, by the multiplexor
circuitry under control of the software. The output voltage is then sent to the analog-to-
digital conversion circuitry where it is changed to a digital value usable by the software.
The Detector Assembly is located in the upper
uppe r end of the C-arm directly above the X-ray
source. There is a lead radiation shield between the detector board and the cover to stop
any X-rays that may get through the detectors.
2.10.1 Solid State Detector

The Solid State Detector converts X-rays into signals that are applied to the Integrator/
Multiplexor section of the Detector Assembly board. Each Detector
De tector Assembly contains
128 high-resolution detectors. Each detector is 2mm wide at the detector. This equates to
slightly less than 1mm resolution in an AP spine.
2.10.2 Integrator/Multiplexor Subsection

The Integrator/Multiplexor subsection of the Detector Assembly receives up 128 signals
in parallel from the Solid State Detector Boards. This subsection integrates and stores
those signals and then applies the stored signals to the Analog to Digital subsection of the
Detector Assembly.
Assembly.
Switched signals charge integrating capacitors in this subsection during a given charging
c harging
time. After the charging time, the switched signals are turned off and the charges are held
he ld
on the capacitors. Each integrator is sampled, in photodiode order, by a multiplexor and
the output sent to the Analog to Digital subsection. At the end of sampling, all the
integrating capacitors are discharged in parallel by shorting them out with analog
a nalog
switches.
add itional input into which a test signal (TESTLVL) can be
Each integrator has an additional
applied when there are no X-rays present. This test signal is used to verify the operation of
the integrators and multiplexors by the SQVERIFY diagnostic program.
2-20
2.10.3 Analog To Digital Board

The Analog to Digital (ADC) subsection of the Detector
Detec tor Assembly converts analog
signals received from the Integrator/Multiplexor subsection to a digital format.
Analog signals from the Integrator/Multiplexor subsection are applied to differential
amplifiers on the ADC subsection. Outputs from the differential amplifiers are combined
in a final multiplexor consisting of four analog switches. The multiplexed signals pass
through a programmable gain amplifier and summing amplifier before being applied to an
A/D converter. A one-volt fixed DC offset is inserted at the summing amplifier to insure
that no channels ever go negative. The A/D converter converts the analog signal into 16
bit parallel data for processing by a Digital Signal Processor.
The ADC subsection uses a Motorola 56000 Digital Signal processor to generate all the
control signals necessary for the Detector Assembly.
Assembly. This processor also provides a high-
speed serial data link to the computer.
2.10.4 Power
The 128-Channel Detector Assembly receives +/-15V and +5V from the C-Arm Interface
Board. The +/-15V is passed through this board to the Detector subsection. It is also
regulated to +/- 12V by series regulators to power operational
o perational amplifiers and analog
switches located on this board. The +/- 15V is also used to generate +/- 5V to power the
analog-to-digital converter circuit. The +7V is reduced to +5V to power the digital section
of this board.

Figure 2-9 shows the interconnections between the 128-Channel Detector Assembly and
the C-Arm Interface Board. Table 2-13 describes the interface signals and identifies the
connectors and their pin assignments.
STD+, STD-
STCLK+, STCLK-
STFRM+, STFRM-
SRD+, SRD-
SRCLK+, SRCLK-
SRFRM+, SRFRM-
SYSRST_DAS+, SYSRST_DAS-
C-ARM INTERFACE INTEGRATE+, INTEGRATE- 128-Channel
BOARD XR_ZEROX_DAS+, XR_ZEROX_DAS- Detector
Assembly
+15V
15V_RET
-15V
+7V
2-21
2-9. C-Arm Interface Board/128-Channel Detector Assembly

Figure 2-9.
Table 2-13. C-Arm Interface Board/128-Channel Detector Assembly
Signal Description C-Arm1 P
Piin DA2 Pin
STD+
STD- Synchronous data to the
Converter Analog/Digital
board. JP10-3
JP10-4 P1-12
P1-13
STCLK+ Synchronizes data to the Analog/Digital JP10-6 P1-15
STCLK- Converter board. JP10-7 P1-16
STFRM+ Synchronizes DSP Communications. JP10-9 P1-18
STFRM- JP10-10 P1-19
SRD+ Synchronous Data from the Analog/Digital JP10-12 P1-3
SRD- board. JP10-13 P1-4
SRCLK+ Synchronizes data from the Analog/Digital JP10-15 P1-6
SRCLK- Converter board. JP10-16 P1-7
SRFRM+ Synchronizes DS
DSP Co
Communications. JP10-18 P1-9
SRFRM- JP10-19 P1-10
SYSRST_DAS+ Re
Rese
sets
ts the An
Anaalo
log/
g/Di
Digi
gittal Co
Con
nve
vert
rter
er bo
boaard. JP10
JP10-2
-21
1 P1-21
SYSRST_DAS- JP10-22 P1-22
INTEGRATE+ Data integration signal. Generated by the C- JP10-24 P1-24
INTEGRATE- Arm Interface Board. JP10-25 P1-25
XR_ZEROX_DAS+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system JP10-27 P1-27
XR_ZEROX_DAS- wide synchronization. Generated by the C-Arm JP10-28 P1-28
Interface Board.
+15V JP10-32 P1-32
JP10-33 P1-33
-15V Powers the Data Acquisition System. JP10-36 P1-36

JP10-37 P1-37
15V_RET JP10-30 P1-30

JP10-31 P1-31
JP10-34 P1-34
JP10-35 P1-35
+7V
JP10-38 P1-38
JP10-39 P1-39
CONT
CONTIINU
NUIT
ITY
Y Em
Emeergency
ency sh
shu
utdo
down
wn dai
aisy
sy ch
chai
ain
n (g
(gro
rou
und
nded
ed on JP10-1 P1-1
ADC board)
Notes:
Notes: 1.C-Arm
1.C-Arm = C-Arm
C-Arm Interf
Interface
ace Board
Board
2.DA=128-Channel Detector Assembly
2-22
2.11 Data Acquisition System (A Model only)

The Discovery A Data Acquisition System (DAS) consists of three Solid State Detector
printed circuit boards, an Integrator/Multiplexor board, and an Analog to Digital
Converter (ADC) board. The Solid State Detector boards and the Integrator/Multiplexor
board are physically located within the upper end of the C-arm. The detector boards mount
under the Integrator/Multiplexor

The Integrator/Multiplexor boardboard and connect
is contained to the Integrator/Multiplexor
in an electrically board.
shielded enclosure. There
is also a lead radiation shield between the detector and the integrator/multiplexor boards to
stop any X-rays that might get through the detectors. The ADC board is loca located
ted within the
rear downward slope of the C-arm.
2.11.1 Solid State Detector

The Solid State Detector boards convert X-rays into signals that are applied to the
Integrator/Multiplexor board. X-rays striking detector crystals are converted into visible
light. Solid State photodiodes sense this light and convert the light into current, which is
amplified in a current to voltage converter. Output from the amplifier is applied to the
Integrator through analog switches. The analog switches all operate
ope rate in parallel and are
turned on during the X-ray pulse. These switches are turned off during the integrator hold
time to prevent integrating noise into the data. The turning on and ooff
ff of these switches is
controlled by the INTEGRATE signal supplied from the Integrator/Multiplexor board.
Each solid-state detector board has a capacity
c apacity of 72 high-resolution detectors. This is
equal to slightly less than 1mm resolution in an AP spine. The detector
de tector array contains 216
2mm detectors.
2.11.2
2.11.2 Power
Pow er
The Solid State Detector board receives +/-15V from the Integrator/Multiplexor board.
Voltage regulators, located on this board, convert this voltage to +/-12V to power the
amplifiers and switches.

Figure 2-10 shows the interconnections between the Integrator/Multiplexor board and the
Solid State Detector boards. Table 2-14 describes the interface signals and identifies the
interconnection connector and pin assignments.
CHANNEL0 - CHANNEL215
SILICON
INTEGRATOR/MULTIPLEXOR DETECTOR
INTEGA - INTEGF
BOARD BOARDS
+15V
15V_RET
-15V
2-23
2-10. Integrator/Multiplexor Board/Solid State Detector Boards

Figure 2-10.
Table 2-14. Integrator/Multiplexor Board/Solid State Detector Boards
Signal Description I/M Pins SD PINS

CHANNEL0 - See Note 1 See Note 2
CHANNEL215
INTEGA JP2-6, JP2-44 JP1-44, 6
INTEGB JP1-6, JP1-44 JP2-44, 6
INTEGC JP4-6, JP4-44
INTEGD JP3-6, JP3-44
INTEGE JP6-6, JP6-44
INTEGF JP5-6, JP5-44
+15V Powers the amplifiers and switches of the Solid JP1-JP6-47, JP1/2-47,
State Detector boards. JP1-JP6-48 JP1/2-48
15V_RET JP1-JP6-3, JP1/2-3,

JP1-JP6-4, JP1/2-4,
JP1-JP6-5, JP1/2-5,
JP1-JP6-43, JP1/2-43,
JP1-JP6-45, JP1/2-45,
JP1-JP6-46, P1/2-46,
JP1-JP6-49, JP1/2-49,
JP1-JP6-50 JP1/2-50
-15V JP1-JP6-1, JP1/2-1, JP1/

JP1-JP6-2 2-2
Notes:1.Refer to schematic drawing 140-0048-SD for connector and pin assignments (cannot scope these
signals).
2.Refer to schematic drawing 140-0050-SD for connector and pin assignments (cannot scope these
signals).
3.Note that the CHANNEL hardware numbers are reversed from the software numbers. e.g.
Hardware
CHANNEL0 = software CHANNEL215.
2.12 Integrator/Multiplexor Board

The Integrator/Multiplexor receives 216 signals in parallel from the Solid State Detector
boards. The board integrates and stores those signals, and then applies the stored signals in
four groups of 64 signals in parallel to the Analog to Digital board.
Switched signals from the Solid State Detector board charge integrating capacitors on this
board during a given charging time. After the charging
ch arging time, the switched signals are
turned off and the charges are held on the capacitors. Each integrator is sampled by the
multiplexor and sent to the Analog to Digital
D igital board. At the end of sampling, all the
integrating capacitors are discharged in parallel by shorting them out with analog
a nalog
switches.
2-24
add itional input into which a test signal (TESTLVL) can be

Each integrator has an additional
applied when there are no X-rays present. This test signal is used to verify the operation of
the integrators and multiplexors when running the diagnostic program SQVERIFY.
SQVERIFY.
2.12.1 Power
The Integrator/Multiplexor board receives +/-15V and +5V from the Analog to Digital
board. The +/-15V is passed through this board to the Solid State Detector boards. Voltage
Voltage
regulators, located on this board, convert this voltage to +/-12V to power circuitry
contained on this board. Analog and digital returns are kept separate.

Figure 2-11 shows the interconnections between the Analog/Digital Converter board and
the Integrator/Multiplexor board. Table 2-15 describes the interface signals and identifies
the interconnection connector and pin assignments.
MA1, MA2
MB1, MB2
MC1, MC2
MD1, MD2
MUX0 - MUX3
MGN1, MGN2
GPL1, GPL2
LTCH1, LTCH2
INTEG
DISC
ANALOG/DIGITAL INTEGRATOR/MULTIPLEXOR
TSTEN
CO NV E RT O R BO ARD
BO ARD
BB0
BB1
BB2
BB3
+15V
15V_RTN
-15V
+5 V
G ND
2-11.. Analog Digital Converter Board/Integrator Multiplexor Board

Figure 2-11
2-25
Table 2-15. Analog Digital Converter Board/Integrator Multiplexor Board

Signal Signal Description ADC Pins I/M PINS

(see Note 1)
MA1, MA2 IN0, IN1 Selects integrator JP4-1, JP4-3 JP7-1, JP7-3
MB1, MB2 IN6, IN7 channels to be JP4-13, JP4-15 JP7-13, JP7-15
MC1, MC2 IN2, IN3 returned to the JP4-5, JP4-7 JP7-5, JP7-7
MD1, MD2 IN4, IN5 Analog/Digital JP4-9, JP4-11 JP7-9, JP7-11
Converter.
MUX0- MUX3 IN8 IN9 JP4-17, JP4-19, JP7-17, JP7-19,
IN10, IN11 JP4-21, JP4-23 JP7-21, JP7-23
GPL1, GPL2 IN14, IN15 JP4-29, JP4-31 JP7-29, JP7-31
MGN1, MGN2 IN12, IN13 Controls integrator/ JP4-25, JP
JP4-27 JP7-25, JP
JP7-27
multiplexor gains.
LTCH1, LTCH2 IN16 Latches control JP4-33 JP7-33
signals on Integrator/ JP4-37 JP7-37
Multiplexor.
INTEG IN18 Controls signal JP4-35 JP7-35
integration.
DISC IN19 Discharges the JP4-39 JP7-39

integrating
capacitors.
TSTEN IN20 Test signal used to JP4-41 JP7-41
verify the operation
of the integrators and
multiplexor when no
X-rays are present.
BB0 Integrator signals to JP2-2 JP11-2
BB1 the Analog/Digital JP2-6 JP11-6
BB2 Converter. JP2-10 JP11-10
BB3 JP2-14 JP11-14
+15V Powers the amplifiers JP1-5 JP10-5
15V_RET and switches of the JP1-4 JP10-4
-15V Integrator/ JP1-3 JP10-3
Multiplexor board
and powers the Solid
State Detector
boards.
+ 5V Powers the digital JP1-2 JP10-2
circuitry of the
Integrator/
Multiplexor board.
GND JP1-1 JP10-1
Note 1. Some signal names are labeled differently on different

different schematic drawings.
2-26
2.13 Analog To Digital Board (A Model Only)

The Analog to Digital (ADC) board converts analog signals received from the Integrator/
Multiplexor board to a digital format. Analog signals from the Integrator/Multiplexor
board are applied to differential amplifiers on the ADC board in four groups of 64
channels. Outputs from the differential amplifiers are combined in a final multiplexor
consisting
gain of four
amplifier andanalog
summingswitches. Thebefore
amplifier multiplexed signals to
being applied pass
a nthrough
an a programmable
A/D converter. A one-
volt fixed DC offset is inserted at the summing amplifier to insure that no channels ever go
negative. The A/D converter converts the analog signal into 16-bit parallel data for
processing by a Digital Signal Processor.
The ADC board uses a Motorola 56000 Digital Signal processor to generate all the control
signals necessary for the detector array assembly. The same software can now be used
with all Discovery systems. This processor also provides a high-speed serial data link to
the computer.
Note: Jumper JP5, on the ADC board, is used to select between high- and low-resolution
so that the board can be used on both QDR-4500 and Discovery models. When the jumper
is in the board is configured for high-resolution
high-resolution,, when the jumper is out the board is
configured for low-resolution
low-resolution.. This jumper must always be present on Discovery A/SL
models.
2.13.1 Power
The ADC board receives +/-15V and + 7V from the C-arm Interface board. The +/-15V is
passed through this board to the Integrator/multiplexor board. It is also reduced to +/-12V
by series regulators to power op-amplifiers and analog switches located on this board. The
+/-15V also generates +/-5V to power the analog-to-digital
ana log-to-digital converter circuit. The +7V is
reduced to +5V to power the digital section of this board. The +5V is also passed on to the
Integrator/Multiplexor board.

Figure 2-12 shows the interconnections between the Ana
Analog/Digital
log/Digital Converter board and
the Integrator/Multiplexor board. Table 2-16 describes the interface signals and identifies
the interconnection connector and pin assignments.
2-27
STD+, STD-
STCLK+, STCLK-
STFRM+, STFRM-
SRD+, SRD-
SRCLK+, SRCLK-
SRFRM+, SRFRM-
SYSRST_DAS+, SYSRST_DAS-
INTEGRATE+, INTEGRATE- ANALOG/DIGITAL
C-ARM INTERFACE
BOARD XR_ZEROX_DAS+, XR_ZEROX_DAS- CONVERTOR
BOARD
+15V
15V_RET
-15V
+7V
2-12. C-Arm Interface Board/Analog/Digital Converter Board

Figure 2-12.
Table 2-16. C-Arm Interface Board/Analog/Digital Converter Board
Signal Description C-Arm1 Pin ADC2 Pin
STD+ Synchronous data to the Analog/Digital JP10-3 P1-12

STD- Converter board. JP10-4 P1-13
STCLK+ Synchronizes data to the Analog/Digital JP10-6 P1-15
STCLK- Converter board. JP10-7 P1-16
STFRM+ Synchronizes DSP Communications. JP10-9 P1-18
STFRM- JP10-10 P1-19
SRD+ Synchronous Data from the Analog/Digital JP10-12 P1-3
SRD- board. JP10-13 P1-4
SRCLK+ Synchronizes data from the Analog/Digital JP10-15 P1-6
SRCLK- Converter board. JP10-16 P1-7
SRFRM+ Synchronizes DS
DSP Co
Communications. JP10-18 P1-9
SRFRM- JP10-19 P1-10
SYSRST_DAS+ Re
Rese
sets
ts the An
Anaalo
log/
g/Di
Digi
gittal Co
Con
nve
vert
rter
er bo
boaard. JP10
JP10-2
-21
1 P1-21
SYSRST_DAS- JP10-22 P1-22
INTEGRATE+ Data integration signal. Generated by the C- JP10-24 P1-24
INTEGRATE- Arm Interface board. JP10-25 P1-25
XR_ZEROX_DAS+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system JP10-27 P1-27
XR_ZEROX_DAS- wide synchronization. Generated by the C-Arm JP10-28 P1-28
Interface board.
2-28
Signal Description C-Arm1 Pin ADC2 Pin
+15V JP10-32 P1-32

JP10-33 P1-33
-15V Powers the Data Acquisition System. JP10-36 P1-36

JP10-37 P1-37
15V_RET JP10-30 P1-30

JP10-31 P1-31
JP10-34 P1-34
JP10-35 P1-35
+7V
JP10-38 P1-38
JP10-39 P1-39
CONT
CONTIINU
NUIT
ITY
Y Em
Emeergency
ency sh
shu
utdo
down
wn dai
aisy
sy ch
chai
ain
n (g
(gro
rou
und
nded
ed on JP10-1 P1-1
ADC board)
Notes:: 1.C-Arm = C-Arm

Notes C-Arm Interface
Interface board
board
2.ADC=Analog/Digital
2.ADC=Analog/Digi tal Converter board.
2.14 Torroid Power Module and DIN Rail

The Torroid Power Module provides the AC voltage required by the Discovery Operator's
Console computer system and the Scanner. The module is located behind the pedestal at
the foot end of the table and consists of a Main Power circuit breaker, a Power On
indicator, and a torroid AC line input isolation transformer.
transformer. The Main Power circuit
breaker and the Power On indicator are located on the rear of the Pedestal enclosure. The
isolation transformer is located inside the Pedestal enclosure.
AC power from the Torroid Power Module is sent to the Scanner on a four-wire cable
providing split 240 volts to the DIN Rail. (Refer to Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 for a
drawing of the C/W or A/SL versions of the DIN Rail). From the DIN Rail, unfiltered AC
is fed to the line filter and, from there, distributed to various sections of the Scanner.
Unfiltered AC is also fed to an AC outlet
ou tlet connector at the rear of the Electronics Tray.
This outlet provides AC power to the Operator ’s Console power strip. A second AC outlet
provides unfiltered AC only while x-rays are being produced. This outlet is used in the
factory to give a visual indication of x-ray production during testing.
2-29
2 29

2 30
Section 3
INSTALLATION
3.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

3.1.1 Required Tools
When installing the Discovery, a tool kit that includes the following items is required:
• Assort
Assortmen
mentt of bothboth flat
flat-bl
-blade
aded d and Phil
Phillip
lipss screw
screwdri
driver
verss
• Assort
Assortmen
mentt of needle-
needle-nosnosee and diagona
diagonall cutti
cutting
ng plier
plierss
• Socket
Socket drive
driversrs (full
(full set
set inclu
includin
ding g 1/4",
1/4", 3/8",
3/8", 7/16",
7/16", 1/2"
1/2" and
and 3/4")
3/4")
• Open-end
Open-end wrenches
wrenches (full set including
including 3/8",
3/8", 7/16", 1/2", 9/16", 5/8" and 3/4")
3/4") and
and an
adjustable wrench
• Hex driver
driver (Allen
(Allen wrench)
wrench) set set including
including sizes 1/16",
1/16", 5/64",
5/64", 3/32",
3/32", 7/64",
7/64", 1/8",
1/8", 9/64",
9/64", 5/32"
5/32"
3/16", 7/32" and 1/4"
• 24 Inc
Inchh Digi
Digitatall Leve
Levell ((09
099-9-02
026969))
• Osci
Oscill
llos
oscop
copee and
and digdigit
ital
al mult
multimimet
eter
er
• Survey
Survey meter
meter (V (Vict
ictore
oreenen mode
modell 450P
450P oror equiv
equivale
alent)
nt)
• Meas
Measur urin
ing
g tape,
tape, appr
approxox.. 3.7 met
meters
ers (1
(12
2 feet
feet))
• Beam
Beam alialign
gnme
ment nt too
tooll (TLS
(TLS-0 -000
008080))
• X-
X-ra
ray
y ttes
estt p
pat
atte
tern
rn (0
(099
99-0-071
715)
5)
• St
Step
ep Wed
Wedge ge Pene
Penetr trom
omet eter
er (0
(099
99-0-0716
716))
• Aper
Apertuture
re Al
Aligignm
nmentent Pin
Pin (09
(099-
9-01
01111)
• Aper
Apertuture
re Al
Aligignm
nmentent Bloc
Block k (09
(099-9-01
0145
45))
• X-
X-Ray
Ray Leaka
Leakage ge Tes
Testt Too
Tooll ((09
099-
9-05
0566)
66)
3.1.2 Required Documentation

The following documents are required:
• The Radiat
Radiation
ion Measurem
Measurement
ent Report
Report (CSD-0
(CSD-0042-
042-F07)
F07)
• Discov
Discovery
ery Technica
echnicall Manu
Manual
al (thi
(thiss manua
manuall 080-1
080-1085)
085)
• FDA Form 2579
31
3.1.3 Room and Doorway Size

Use the following table to prepare for the move. Also, Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-4 for
more details.
Model Minimum Room Size Minimum Doorway Width
SL & C 2.44m (8.0ft) x 2.44m (8.0ft) 0.77m (30.0in.)
A&W 2.44m (8.0ft) x 3.05m (10.0ft) 0.77m (30.0in.)
3-1. System Dimensions for Discovery-A

Figure 3-1.
32
3-2. System Dimensions for Discovery-C

Figure 3-2.
3-3
3-3. System Dimensions for Discovery-SL

Figure 3-3.
3-4
3-4. System Dimensions for Discovery-W

Figure 3-4.
The Operator's Console may be up to 45ft (13.72m) away from the Scan Scanner,
ner, but since
leakage and scatter radiation levels are extremely low, it can be safely located in the same
room with the Discovery itself.
3-5
3.1.4 Arrange For Help

Moving the unit to its final location requires at least two able-bodied
ab le-bodied people to direct the
machine, hold doors, and lift heavy parts. The following table gives some representative
weights.
DISC
DISCOV
OVER
ERY
Y-A DISC
DISCOV
OVE
ERY-C DI
DISC
SCOV
OVER
ERY
Y-SL DISC
DISCOV
OVER
ERY
Y-W
Equipment 365 kg 295 kg 365 kg 295 kg

Weight 800 lb 650 lb 800 lb 650 lb
Max. Patient 204 kg 204 kg 204 kg 204 kg
Weight* 450 lb 450 lb 450 lb 450 lb
Total 524 kg 455 kg 524 kg 455 kg
Weight 1100 lb 950 lb 1100 lb 950 lb
Area 1. 9 m x 1.1 m 1. 9 m x 1.1 m 1. 9 m x 1.1 m 1. 9 m x 1.1 m
6.3 ft x 3.5 ft 6.3 ft x 3.5 ft 6.3 ft x 3.5 ft 6.3 ft x 3.5 ft
Floor 244 kg/m2 215 kg/m2 244 kg/m2 220 kg/m2
Loading
49.9 lb/ft2 43.9 lb/ft2 49.9 lb/ft2 45 lb/ft2
*Max. Patient Weight for systems built prior to February 2006 is 350 lb (159Kg)
3.2 Uncrate and Move to Destination

3.2.1 Inspect For Shipping Damage
Inspect the exteriors of all crates and boxes for shipping damage. Bring any damage
discovered to the attention of the customer's Shipping/Receiving department before
proceeding.
3-5. Crated Unit (Discovery A and SL)

Figure 3-5.
3-6
3-6. Crated Unit (Discovery C, Ci, W and Wi)

Figure 3-6.
3.2.2 Uncrate Unit

Remove the unit from the crate as
a s described below:
1. Cut the
the strappi
strapping
ng that
that holds
holds the
the packaging
packaging together
together..
2. Remove
Remove the
the cardboa
cardboard
rd cap by
by liftin
lifting
g it up and
and off.
off.
3. Remove thethe cardboard
cardboard sleeve
sleeve by lifting
lifting it strai
straight
ght up and off.
off. Be careful
careful not to
to
scratch the unit.
4. Remove the wooden
wooden table
table shelf
shelf and
and the boxes packed with
with the
the unit.
unit.
Note: There is a metal cross brace attached to the wooden table shelf. Remove
and save this cross brace as it is used later in the installation.
5. Verify that the serial numbers on both crates and the scanner all match.
3.2.2.1 Inspect For Hidden Shipping Damage

Open all crates and boxes, and check for signs of hidden ddamage.
amage. Check the ShockW
Shoc kWatch
atch
and Tip-N’-Tell
Tip-N’-Tell indicators for evidence of improper handling during
du ring shipment. Bring any
damage discovered to the attention
a ttention of the customer's Shipping/Receiving department.
3-7
3.2.3 Take Inventory

The Discovery system is shipped in two crates. Using the following checklist, take
inventory of the contents of all crates and boxes, and confirm that all of the expected items
have been received. Unused power cables and circuit breakers are to be returned to
Hologic. Report any discrepancies to the Hologic Sales Department.
Note: with
Twothe
System Backup
scanner disks
and the areshipped
other shippedin with
the each
cratesystem.
with theOne
PC.will
Markbe the
included
one
shipped with the scanner and note
no te that if the Serial Numbers on the babackup
ckup disks
do not agree, the disk shipped with the scanner is the correct disk.
Installation Inventory Check List
(Quantities are one (1) each unless otherwise specified)
[ ] Main Discovery Assembly [ ] Voltage Selection Kit (100/120/230)
[ ] Printer Paper [ ] C-Arm Assembly
[ ] Discovery User's Guide [ ] Tabletop Pad
[ ] Computer, Mouse, and Keyboard [ ] Hip Positioner
[ ] Laser or Business Inkjet Printer [ ] Knee (Block) Elevation Pad
[ ] Spine Phantom [ ] Foot Restraint
[ ] VGA or Flat Panel Monitor [ ] CDROM R/W
[ ] Upper C-Arm Assembly [ ] 3.5" Floppy Disks
[ ] Discovery Console [ ] Miscellaneous Hardware Box
[ ] Communication Cables [ ] System Backup Disks (2)
[ ] Pedestal Covers (Left) [ ] C-Arm Cap and Shoulder Covers
3.2.4 Measure Path To Final Destination

Contact the department receiving the unit and request that a representative show you the
room where the unit is to be installed. As you make your way from the loading dock to the
room, measure all doorways and openings including any elevators on which you must
travel. Look for other obstacles (thresholds, steps, sharp corners, etc.) which could cause a
problem during transport. The Discovery fits through any doorway at least 30 inches
(76.2cm) wide and 81inches (206cm) high, and hallways 45 inches (114cm) wide. All
measurements are inside dimensions.
3.2.4.1 Short Doorway

If a Discovery must be moved through a doorway that is not at least 81" (206 ccm)
m) high, the
tabletop can be removed. This allows the unit to fit through a doorway 79" (201 cm) high
(inside dimension). See the instructions for removing the tabletop below.
3-8
3.2.4.2 Narrow Hallway

If a Discovery unit must be moved through a hallway that is not at least 45" (114cm) wide,
the C-arm can be removed. This allows the unit to fit through a hallway 2 29"
9" (74cm) wide
(inside dimension). See the instructions for removing the C-arm bbelow
elow..
3.2.5 Remove Tabletop (If Necessary)

Note: It is not necessary to remove the tabletop if the doorway that the unit must go
through is at least 81" (206 cm) high (top-to-bottom inside dimension). Removing
the tabletop allows the unit to fit through a doorway 79" (201 cm) high.
The tabletop can be removed
remove d before taking the unit off the pallet. Follow the procedure
below to remove the tabletop:
1. Remove the
the table
table pad and remove
remove the
the right-side
right-side table
table rail
rail end cover
cover (2 Phillips
Phillips
screws located on the right end). This cover slides straight out the side.
2. Remove the
the head end pedestal
pedestal covers.
covers. You
You will
will need to move the
the table to
to its
extreme forward position to access the center screws on each panel.
3. Remove the
the two screws
screws (Phill
(Phillips)
ips) that secure
secure the tabletop
tabletop in place
place (located
(located on top
top
of the table near the rear center) and slide the table to the left, far enough to
access the Table X-bearing blocks.
4. Ref
Refer
errring
ing to Figure 3-7,
3-7, remove the right-side, front endcap (3 Phillips screws).
5. Remove the
the back Phillips
Phillips screw
screw from
from the right-s
right-side
ide cover (of the table
table X-drive
X-drive
assembly) and slide the cover out from the front.
6. Unplug
Unplug the
the cable
cable to the
the Motor
Motor Cont
Control
roller
ler boar
board.
d.
7
7.. Refer to Figure 3-7.
3-7. Disconnect the stainless steel cable guard (2 screws) and
remove the Table X-drive attachment bracket (4 bolts and 2 nuts).
8. Remove the
the left rail
rail stop
stop (1 counter
counter sunk screw
screw located
located next to
to the left-side
left-side,, front
endcap) to allow the tabletop to be rolled off from the front.
9. Remove thethe 8 Allen

Allen screws
screws (6mm)
(6mm) holding
holding the
the table
table X-drive
X-drive bearing
bearing blocks.
blocks.
10. Remove the tabletop by carefully sliding
sliding it off the front of the unit (requires two
people). Be careful not to slide the bearing blocks off the rail.
11.. Refer
11 Refer to
to Figure 3-7.
3-7. Install the right angle bracket (found in the miscellaneous
hardware kit) to hold the bearing blocks and X-drive bracket in place while the
scanner is moved. If this bracket is not available, tape the bearing blocks, and X-
drive bracket in place.
3-9
X Drive Attachment Bracket

Bearing Block
Stainless Steel
Cable Guard
Bearing Block
Right Angle Bracket
Front Endcap
3-7. Table X Drive

Figure 3-7.
3.2.6 Remove Discovery A or SL Lower C-Arm Assembly (If

Necessary)
Note: It is not necessary to remove the C-arm if the hallway that the unit must go through
is at least 45" (114cm) wide (side-to-side inside dimension). Removing the C-arm
allows the unit to fit through a hallway 29"
2 9" (74cm) wide.
The C-arm Carriage Assembly can be removed before taking the unit off the pallet.
Follow the procedure below to remove the C-arm:
1. Remove the 2 carriage-
carriage-to-bas
to-basee shipping
shipping brackets
brackets (see Figure 3-8
3-8).
).
2. Remove the
the table
table locking
locking bracket
bracket located
located on the left side
side of the
the scanner
scanner (see
(see
Figure 3-9).
3-9).
3. Move the
the table
table forward,
forward, remove
remove the C-Arm
C-Arm Interf
Interface
ace board
board cover,
cover, and remove
remove
the tank cover. Then move the table back.
4. Remove the X-Ray
X-Ray Controll
Controller
er Assembl
Assembly y (4 Phill
Phillips
ips screws)
screws).. See “X-Ray Con-
troller Assembly” on page 5-18 for detailed removal information.
5. Remove the
the Tank
Tank Assembly
Assembly (leave Filter
Filter Drum Assem
Assembly
bly attached)
attached).. See “Tank
Assembly” on page 5-19 for detailed removal information.
6. Disconnect
Disconnect the
the cables and Nylatrac
Nylatrac mountin
mounting g hardware,
hardware, and tape
tape Nylatrac
Nylatrac and
and
cables in the bottom of the scanner so that they are secure.
3-10
C-Arm Shipping Brackets
3-8. Shipping Bracket Locations (A and SL)

Figure 3-8.
7. Disconnect
Disconnect the
the ribbon
ribbon cable
cable from
from the Arm R Motor Controller
Controller board.
8. Remove the Arm

Arm Y bearing
bearing blocks
blocks at
at the
the rear of the
the arm.
arm.
9. Remove the bracket
bracket that
that connects
connects the C-arm
C-arm to
to the Arm Y belt.
10. Lift the
the C-arm carriage
carriage up and out of the
the scanner unit.
unit.
11. Tape, or tie wrap, the bearing blocks to prevent them from ssliding
liding off the
the end of
the rail.
Table Locking Bracket
3-9. Table
Figure 3-9. Table Locking “L” Bracket Location
3-11
3.2.7 Prepare the Tabletop for Moving (A, W,Wi)

WARNING:
ARNING: Do no
nott tilt
tilt the unit
unit to
to the vert
vertica
icall positi
position
on until
until tthe
he T
Tabl
ablee End B
Brac
racket
ket iiss pro
proper
perly
ly
installed (step 4 below).
Before the Discovery can be tilted to vertical, you must slide the table to the left and clamp
it so it clears the floor when the unit is tilted
tilted to vertical. To accomplish this, do the
following:
1. Remo
Remove
ve the
the ttabl
ablet
etop
op pad.
pad.
2. Remove thethe three Phillip
Phillipss screws
screws holding
holding the tabletop.
tabletop. Two
Two of the screws
screws are
are at
the left corners and one at the right back corner looking down on the tabletop.
3. Slide the
the tabletop
tabletop to the right
right until
until it clears the table
table base panel.
panel.
4.. Refe
4 Referr
rrin
ing
g to Figure 3-10,
3-10, adjust the Table End Stop as pictured.
3-10. Table End Stop (Models A, W, and Wi

Figure 3-10.
3.2.8 Move Unit To Destination

Follow the procedure below to move the unit:
1. Remove
Remove the four
four sship
hippin
ping
g bracke
brackets
ts (Figure 3-11)
3-11) as follows: loosen the screws
that hold the auxiliary caster bars (located under each bracket), remove the lag
bolts and remove the bracket. Then, re-tighten the screws that hold the auxiliary
caster bar to the frame.
Bracket
3-11.. Shipping Bracket

Figure 3-11
3-12
Important: The screws that hold the auxiliary caster bars must be re-tightened
(Figure 3-12)
3-12) to prevent the unit from dropping when moved.
3-12. Re-tighten Caster Bar Screws

Figure 3-12.
2. Locate the
the two off-load
off-load ramps
ramps supplied
supplied with
with the unit.
unit. Ramps are
are attached
attached to the
shipping skid base (Figure
(Figure 3-13).
3-13).
Ramps
3-13. Off-load Ramps (as packed)

Figure 3-13.
3. Install
Install the two
two off-load
off-load ramps.
ramps. Ramps
Ramps may be installe
installed
d at the end of tthe
he skid
(Figure 3-14),
3-14), or the side of the skid (Figure 3-15).
3-15).
3-13
3-14. Ramps Installed at End of Skid

Figure 3-14.
3-15. Ramps Installed at Side of Skid

Figure 3-15.
4. Move
Move the unit
unit down
down the
the ramp
ramp and away
away from
from the
the skid.
skid.
5. If hallways
hallways to
to the destinat
destination
ion room
room are wide
wide enough to move
move the unit
unit in the hori-
zontal position, move the unit and everything that shipped with it to the de
destina-
stina-
tion room. Continue the install by following the procedure
proce dure starting at Step 2 of
Setting Up Unit on Page 16 of this addendum.
If the unit must be placed in the vertical position continue with the procedure
below.
3-14
3.2.8.1 Stand Unit on End (if necessary)

1. Attach
Attach the caster
caster bars
bars and cross
cross brace
brace located
located in the
the separate
separate shipping
shipping box
box
(Figure 3-16).
3-16).
WARNING
ARNING:: Cross brace must be instal
installed
led befor
beforee tipping
tipping the unit on iits
ts en
end.
d.
3-16. Caster Bars Installed

Figure 3-16.
2. With two people,
people, tip the unit
unit on end,
end, Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 (cardboard, or
equivalent, can be used to protect the floor).
3-17. Tipping Unit on End

Figure 3-17.
3-15
3-18. Unit in Vertical Position

Figure 3-18.
3. Remove
Remove the auxilia
auxiliary
ry caster
caster bars.
bars.
4. Move the unit and
and everything
everything that
that shipped
shipped with
with it to the destinati
destination
on room.
3.2.9 Set Up the Unit

Follow the procedure below to set up the unit:
1. Caref
Careful
ully
ly til
tiltt th
thee unit
unit dow
down.
n.
WARNING:
ARNING: The uni
unitt will
will ffeel
eel heavie
heavierr when
when p
putt
utting
ing it down
down than
than it felt
felt wh
when
en tipp
tipping
ing it u
up.
p. Thi
Thiss is
because the pivot point is different. For safety purposes it is recommended that two
people are used to tilt the unit down.
2. Remove the
the caster bars
bars and cross
cross brace.
brace. Position
Position the unit
unit in its
its final location
location in
the room.
3. Leve
Levell the un
unit
it..
4. Remove
Remove the
the 2 carriag
carriage-t
e-to-b
o-base
ase shipp
shipping
ing bracke
brackets
ts (Figure
(Figure 3-19).
3-19).
5. Discovery A, W & Wi - Remove the table end stop (Figure
(Figure 3-10).
3-10).
6. Remove the
the table
table locking
locking bracket
bracket located
located on the
the left rear side
side of the scanner
(Figure 3-9).
3-9).
3-16
3-19. Carriage to Base Brackets

Figure 3-19.
3.2.9.1 Install Discovery C-Arm (C, Ci, W and Wi)

Follow the procedure below to install a Discovery C-arm assembly:
1. Carefully
Carefully place
place the C-arm
C-arm on the bottom bolts.
bolts. Tilt
Tilt the arm
arm back slight
slightly
ly and slip
the cables through the openings and then tilt the arm forward until the front bolts
are in place.
2. Put 7/16
7/16"" nuts
nuts and wash
washers
ers on
on all 4 bolts
bolts and
and tight
tighten.
en.
3. Inst
Instal
alll tthe
he ca
cabl
bles
es..
4. Instal
Installl the Contr
Control
ol Panel
Panel and T-be
T-beam
am end caps.
caps.
5. Using a digital
digital level insure
insure that the
the scanner
scanner is level
level (front
(front to back and
and left to
to
right).
3.2.9.2 Install Discovery Upper C-Arm (A and SL)

Follow the procedure below to install a Discovery
D iscovery A or Discovery SL upper C-arm
assembly:
WARNI
ARNING
NG:: Do not
not re
remo
move
ve C-ar
C-arm
m ship
shippi
ping
ng br
brac
acke
kets
ts (Figure
( Figure 3-20
3-20)) until done.
1
1.. Refer to Figure 3-20.
3-20. Reposition the belt tensioning mechanism. The belt ten-
sioning mechanism is turned around to facilitate shipping and moving the assem-
bly (the shipping bracket is not used after the mechanism is repositioned).
2. Remove
Remove the
the back C-arm
C-arm cover
cover (2
(2 Phillip
Phillipss screws
screws).
).
3. Remove the
the two 1/2"
1/2" bolts that lock
lock the upper
upper C-arm in
in place (left
(left in place
place during
shipment).
4. Remove the
the screws
screws for the
the C-arm shoulder
shoulder cover (left
(left in place
place during
during shipment).
shipment).
5. Remove the
the two C-arm
C-arm retaini
retaining
ng brackets
brackets (to
(to allo
allow
w upper C-arm
C-arm to
to be set in
in
place).
6. Remove
Remove the
the cover
cover from
from the
the upper
upper C-arm.
C-arm.
7. Install
Install the upper
upper C-arm
C-arm onto
onto the lower
lower C-arm
C-arm (tilt
(tilt the front
front of the upper
upper C-arm up
to slide it in place).
8. Instal
Installl the
the retai
retainin
ning
g bracke
brackets.
ts.
3-17
Shipping
Bracket
Shi in Location Installed Location

3-20. Repositioning the Belt Tensioning
Figure 3-20. Tensioning Mechanism
9. In
Inst
stal
alll the
the two
two 1/2
1/2"" bolt
bolts.
s.
10. Remove the
the C-arm top
top cover.
cover.
11. Install the counter-weights
counter-weights (shipped in carton with casters) into the upper C-arm.
12. Connect the two cables from the upper C-arm to the lower C-arm.
C-arm.
13. Install the 1/2" x 13" trim plate that mounts (on the front) between the upper and
lower C-arm (make sure trim plate is aligned to front of C-Arm).
14. Remove the four C-arm
C-arm shipping
shipping brackets
brackets (see Figure 3-20).
3-20). Save these brack-
ets, they are needed if the tank is ever removed.
15. Level the
the scanner left
left to right.
right.
16. Level the system front to back: be sure the scanner
scanner table top is level 0° ±0.0°
front to rear at both the head and foot ends. Failure to level A and SL models
will result in TZ, and other,
other, positioning tolerance errors
er rors when attempting to
acquire whole body, lateral, or IVA scans.
3.3 Install the System

3.3.1 Install Cables
Follow the procedure below to cable the system:
1. Locate the
the box shipped
shipped with the
the system
system containing
containing the
the Voltage
Voltage Selecti
Selection
on Kit that
that
includes the AC Input cable, Main Circuit Breaker, jumpers wires, and mounting
hardware.
2. Confirm
Confirm that you have the
the proper
proper kit for
for the site’
site’ss AC voltage
voltage (100/120
(100/120//
230VAC).
3-18
3. Measure
Measure the voltage
voltage between
between ground
ground and neutral
neutral at the wall
wall outlet
outlet that
that will
will be
used for the system. If it is more than TBD mV call Hologic Technical Support
before continuing.
4. Remove foot
foot end cover
cover on the
the Electroni
Electronics
cs Tray
Tray (on the
the left side facing
facing the
the
machine) and the cover of the Torroid Assembly
Assembly..
5. Remove the
the AC input cable from
from the kit,
kit, install
install the strain
strain relief,
relief, and
and route the
the
cable though bottom of the Torroid Assembly.
6. Screw the
the strain
strain relief
relief into
into the bushing
bushing at the
the bottom
bottom of the Torroi
Torroid
d Assembly
Assembly and
fix the cable to the exposed stud using the cable clamp and NyLock nut provided
in the kit.
100 VAC OPTION

TB1 TB2
CB1 T1
Black Brown Brown Black-120 VAC Brown
1 (Brass) 2 Whire L L Blue Blue 7 7 Red-110 VAC
Green N N Grn/Yel 6 6 Brown-100 VAC
G G 5 5 TB3
4 4
Brown
3 Input Power 3 3 4 4 Blue 240 VAC
2 2 Blue-0 VAC Red 3 3 Blue AC Line Filter
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1 1 Wht/Blk-120 VAC Orange 2 2 Black
Transformer Power 1 1
Wht/Brn-100 VAC Filter Input
Wht/Blu-0 VAC Yellow
Grn/Yel
TRANSFORMER
Circuit Breaker = 310-0018 (20 Amp, 2 Pole)

Power Cable = 180-0626
120 VAC OPTION

TB1 TB2
CB1 T1
1 (Brass) 2 W hire L L Blue Blue 7 7 Red-110 VAC
G G 5 5 TB3
4 4 Brown
2 2 3 3
Blue-0 VAC Red Blue AC Line Filter
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1 1 2 2
Wht/Blk-120 VAC Orange Black
Grn/Yel
TRANSFORMER
Circuit Breaker = 310-0053 (15 Amp, 2 Pole)

3-19
230 VAC OPTION

TB1 TB2
CB1 T1
1 (Brass) 2 W hire L L Blue Blue 7 7 Red-110 VAC
G G 5 5 TB3
4 4 Brown
2 2 Blue-0 VAC Red 3 3 Blue AC Line Filter
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1 1 Wht/Blk-120 VAC Orange 2 2 Black
Grn/Yel
TRANSFORMER
Circuit Breaker = 310-0006 (7.5 Amp, 2 Pole)

7. Attach the ground

ground wire
wire to
to the grounding
grounding lug using the hardware
hardware provided.
provided. Attach
the neutral and phase wires to TB1.
8. Install
Install the circuit
circuit
roid Assembly breaker
breaker
using from
from the
the screws voltage
voltageinkit
provided kithe
t into
kitthe
the hole in the
the rear of the
the Tor-
Tor-
9. Attach the
the two wires
wires (brown
(brown and blue)
blue) from TB1
TB1 to the Line
Line terminals
terminals (top
(top ter-
ter-
minals) on the circuit breaker.
10. Attach the two wires (brown
(brown and blue) from TB2 to the Load terminals (bottom
(bottom
terminals) on the circuit breaker.
11. Use the jumpers provided to
to configure the terminal block as shown in the tables
below.
Wire From To
Blue Circuit Breaker - Load Pin 1 – TB2
C z Brown Circuit Breaker – Load Pin 7 – TB2
A H
V 0
6 Blue Jumper Pin 1 – TB2 Pin 4 – TB2
0 /
2 0
1 5 Brown Jumper Pin 3 – TB2 Pin 7 – TB2
Wire From To
C z Blue Circuit Breaker - Load Pin 1 – TB2
A H
V 0 Brown Circuit Breaker – Load Pin 6 – TB2
0 6
/
3 0
2 5 Brown Jumper Pin 3 – TB2 Pin 4 – TB2
3-20
Wire From To
Blue Circuit Breaker - Load Pin 1 – TB2
C z Brown Circuit Breaker – Load Pin 5 – TB2
A H
V 0 Blue Jumper Pin 1 – TB2 Pin 4 – TB2
0 6
/
0 0
1 5
Brown Jumper Pin 2 – TB2 Pin 5 – TB2
3-21. Isolation Transformer Input Taps

Figure 3-21.
12. Confirm that the secondary
secondary side taps are set up as shown in the diagram in
Figure 3-21
3-21.
Assembly . These
Cove
Coverr. diagrams can also be found on tthe
he inside of the T
Torroid
orroid
Note: The terminology “Header 7” used on Figure 3-21,

3-21, and on the inside of the
Torroid Assembly Cover, comes from the schematic for the aassembly
ssembly (it is
a 7-pin terminal block “header”). The tables above refer to the same
terminal block as TB2 (the designation on the assembly drawing).
13. Replace the cover of the Torroid
Torroid Assembly.
Assembly.
14. Route the Operator Console
Console AC Supply Cable through the cable clamp block on
the rear of the Scanner.
15. Attach the Console Power Cord to the top power receptacle. The bottom power
receptacle is used in the manufacturing process to power a light when X-rays are
on. The bottom receptacle can be used to power an external x-ray on annunciator
lamp at the customer site (if required by local regulations).
16. Route the Operator Console
Console Communications Cable
Cable through the cable clamp
block on the rear of the Scanner.
3-21
3-22. DISCOVERY-C and W DIN Rail AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram

Figure 3-22.
3-23. Discovery-A and SL DIN Rail AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram

Figure 3-23.
3-22
17. Attach the Communications Cable to JP10 on the Distribution

Distribution Board and the
ground strap to the grounding stud.
18. Attach the other end of the Communications
Communications Cable to
to the PCI Communications
Communications
Controller Board connector at the rear of the PC.
19. Plug the Operator Console AC Supply
Supply Cable to the Power S
Strip
trip male connector.
connector.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
There are a number of safety precautions that MUST be observed when servicing the
Discovery systems.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Voltage levels that can ca n injure or be fatal are present through the
Discovery systems. The line voltage (100, 120, 230 volts) is supplied to the Torroid
Torroid
Assembly and the scanner.
scanner. The X-ray source unit contains 140kV as well as other AC
and DC voltages. The pedestal motors use 230 volts regardless of the line voltage. UsUsee
caution when checking, calibrating, and troubleshooting. Always trip the main breaker
when replacing components.
X-RADIATION: Service personnel are required to wear a dosimeter.
dosimeter. Do not leave the
system unattended in X-RAY SURVEY (SURVEY mode).
ESD PRECAUTIONS:
must take precautions whenTo handling
prevent damage due to Remove
components. ESD (Electrostatic
any chargeDischarge), you
from your body
by wearing an approved and properly grounded wristwrist strap. Keep PCBs in their ESD
protective bag until you are ready to install them. Treat defective PCBs as new to
prevent any additional damage.
3.3.2 Check Power Line Voltage

Hologic specifies that the Discovery be powered from a dedicated power line.
Power Requirements for all 100VAC 16A 50
100VAC 50/60Hz,
Discovery models: 120VAC
120VAC 14A 50
50/60Hz,
230VAC
230VAC 8A 50/60Hz, Max apparent resi
resistance
stance = 1.28 ohm
3.3.2.1 Measure Line Voltage

Before plugging in the Discovery, measure the voltage (neutral to phase) with an AC
voltmeter at the outlet from which the unit will draw power. The measured voltage must
be within ± 10% of the voltage shown on the power label (located where the power cord
attaches to the Torroid Power Module). The Discovery Torroid Assembly is a step up/step
down isolation transformer, which can be re-strapped to accommodate other input
voltages. See Figure 3-21 for the most common configurations of the isolation
transformer.
There are two standards for conductor color-coding. The North American standard
specifies the BLACK conductor as LINE and the WHITE as NEUTRAL, while the
International standard defines the BROWN conductor as LINE and the BLUE as
NEUTRAL.
Note: Be sure to change the label if you re-strap the transformer.
3-23
Note: Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement Report (see example on
page 3-70).
3-70).
3.3.2.2 Measure Isolation Transformer Secondary

Second ary Voltage
After plugging in the instrument and switching on the main breaker and instrument power
on the Control Panel, measure the voltage at the power strip located at the re
rear
ar of the
Operator’s Console with a digital voltmeter set to measure AC volts.
Note: The voltage
voltag e should be between
betwee n 110 VAC
VAC and 130 VAC.
VAC. If the voltage is out of this
range, recheck the voltage
vo ltage at the wall outlet, and the strapping of the isolation
transformer as shown in Figure 3-21.
3-21.
3.3.3 Install Computer

Follow the procedure below to install the computer:
1. Set up the computer
computer cart using
using the enclosed
enclosed instruct
instructions.
ions. Place
Place the computer
computer,,
keyboard, monitor, and printer on the cart.
2. Instal
Installl comput
computer
er syst
system
em and
and power
power cable
cables.
s.
3. Turn
Turn on the computer
computer and
and confirm
confirm that all options
options shipped
shipped with the
the instrument
instrument or
or
listed on the sales order have been installed.
3.3.4 Start QDR Software in Service Mode

Follow the procedure below to cable the system:
1. Log on to Windo ws XP as Field Service using the last 6 digits of the RTX Run-
indows
time serial number as the password. (If this is the first time the computer is being
powered on, the password will be password.)
2. Exit
Exit the Dis
Discove
covery
ry softw
software
are by clic
clicking the Exit button and selecting the Exit
king
QDR without shut down? option and then clicking the OK button.
3. Click the Start button on the desktop and then select Search For Files or Fold-
3.
ers...
4. In the
the Searc
Search
h Result
Resultss window
window,, select
select All files and folders, type service in the
All or part of the file name: edit box, and then click on the Search button.
3-24
5. The
The soft
softwa
ware
re now
now sear
searche for SERVICE. A list in the right panel will show you
chess for
the files found. In the list, click the “service” item shown in C:\QDR\Utilities
and drag it to the desktop. Close the Search window and then double-click the
Service icon on the desktop. The software will now be restarted in service mode.
3.3.5 Check Table Alignment

To check the table alignment,
a lignment, perform the following procedure:
1. Usin
Using
g a measu
measuri
ring
ng tap
tape,
e, and
and refe
referr
rrin
ing
g to Figure 3-24,
3-24, check the following:
• Distance
Distance from
from the edge
edge of the
the table to the back
back of both
both T-rail
T-railss (“A”
dimension).
• Distan
Distance
ce betwee
betweenn the T-ra
T-rails
ils (fro
(front
nt and rear
rear).
).
• Gap from
from the
the edge of
of the table bracket
bracket (left
(left side)
side) to the rail.
rail.
2. Reco
Record
rd all
all the
the mea
measu
sure
reme
ment
nts.
s.
3. Facing the
the front of the Discove
Discovery
ry,, gently
gently push the
the foot end
end (left
(left side)
side) of the
the table.
table.
The table should move away
aw ay from, and then back, to its original position.
4. Check the “A”
“A” dimensio
dimensionn and the bracket
bracket-to-g
-to-guide
uide rail gap again.
again. Compar
Comparee them
to their original values.
5. If all the measurem
measurements
ents are within
within specificati
specification,
on, th
thee table
table is properly
properly aligned.
aligned. If
If
the measurements are not within specification, go to the Aligning Table section
below.
3.3.5.1 Table
Table Alignment Procedure
After you have taken the measurements in the Checking Table Alignment section, use the
procedures below to align the table. Note that if both the “A” dimension and the bracket-
to-guide rail gap are out of specification, you should recheck the measurements after
performing the first adjustment.
3.3.5.2
To changeTable
Tthe
able“A”Edge to T-Rail
dimension, do the(“A” Dimension) Adjus
following: Adjustment
tment
1. Remove
Remove the
the outer
outer and inner
inner covers
covers from
from the righ
rightt pedest
pedestal.
al.
2. Loosen the four
four bolts
bolts fastening
fastening the top of
of the pedesta
pedestall and the
the four bolts fastening
fastening
the bottom of the pedestal (see Figure 3-25).
3-25).
3. Adjust
Adjust the
the table
table so the
the “A” dimen
dimensio
sion
n is within
within the
the specifi
specificat
cation.
ion.
4. Tight
Tighten
en the
the bolts
bolts and
and check
check the
the table
table ali
alignm
gnment
ent agai
again.
n.
If the alignment is within the specification, replace the pedestal covers. If you still note a
change in the “A” dimension, continue with the following steps.
3-25
+/- .06”
63.125”
FRONT & REAR
+/- .25”
“A” “A”
.25” +/- .09”
3-24. Table Alignment

Figure 3-24.
(Not drawn to scale)
Studs and
T-Rail Adjustment Nuts

Upper Bracket
Pedestal Lower Bracket
Base Adjustment Bolts
3-25. Pedestal (covers removed)

Figure 3-25.
5. Make sure the upper
upper and lower
lower brackets
brackets are
are securely
securely fastened
fastened to
to the
the upper and
lower frames.
Note: Even if the brackets are secured to the frames, they may not be securely
fastened to the pedestal. If not, remove the table to access the screws that
3-26
secure the brackets to the pedestal.

pe destal. Refer to Remove Tabletop on page 3-9
for table removal procedures.
If the screws are loose, apply a small amount of Loctite to the threads and tighten
the screws.
The upper and lower brackets
brac kets are attached to the pedestal with four, 6mm flat-
head
to Allen
make screws.
sure While
that these the table
screws is off,asitwell.
are tight is a good idea to remove the pedestal
To change the “A”

“A ” dimension, do the following:
6. Mount the pedestal
pedestal to the
the lower
lower frame.
frame. Do not
not tighten
tighten the
the bolts
bolts until
until the
the align-
align-
ment has been completed.
7. Install
Install the
the table
table and check
check its
its alignment
alignment.. Make the necessary
necessary adjustment
adjustments,
s, then
then
tighten the upper and lower bolts.
8. Instal
Installl the
the pedesta
pedestall covers
covers that
that were
were removed
removed in Step
Step 1.
1.
3.3.5.3 Front to Back

Bac k T-Rail and Table
Table Edge/Rail Gap Adjustment
To adjust the front-to-back T-Rail dimensions and table edge-to-rail gap, perform the
following procedure:
1. Remove
Remove the
the outer
outer and inne
innerr covers
covers from
from the
the left
left pedes
pedestal
tal..
2. Loosen the four
four bolts
bolts fastening
fastening the top of
of the pedesta
pedestall and the
the four bolts fastening
fastening
the bottom of the pedestal.
Note: Before adjusting the distance between the rails, make sure the upper and
lower brackets are securely fastened to the pedestal. Refer to Steps 3 -5 of
the previous (Aligning Table) section and then go to the next step.
3. Adjust
Adjust the dista
distance
nce between
between the T-rail
T-railss and the
the table
table edge-to-ra
edge-to-rail
il gap and tighten
tighten
the bolts.
4. Instal
Installl the
the pedesta
pedestall covers
covers that
that were
were removed
removed in Step
Step 1.
1.
3.3.6 Perform C-Arm Parallelism Adjustment (A and SL sys-

sys -
tems only)
1. Using a digital
digital level
level and with the Tank
Tank cover
cover removed,
removed, measure
measure the angle across
the tank and from back to front on the Tank. Record the angles.
2. Remove the upper
upper C-Arm covers and repeat
repeat the measure
measurements
ments on the
the upper
upper C-
Arm assembly. Again record the angles.
3. If the
the angles
angles measured
measured on the tank
tank vary
vary by more than 0.0 degrees
degrees from those
found on the C-Arm, do the following.
4. Rotate
Rotate the C-Arm
C-Arm until the center
center of gravity
gravity for the upper
upper C-Arm
C-Arm is
is over the
lower C-Arm (approximately 60 degrees rotated).
5. Loose
Loosenn eight
eight 1/4"
1/4" bol
bolts
ts (4
(4 on each
each side)
side)..
3-27
6. Move the
the C-arm
C-arm until
until it is parallel
parallel to the tank using
using the
the digital
digital level
level to
to measure
measure
the angles.
3.4 Calibrate and Test the System
3.4.1 Check
WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
Tube
X-rays
ays aare
kVatedPeak
re gener
generated during
Potential
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
Proper operation of the Discovery requires that the X-ray tube generate X-ray pulses of
80kVp, 100kVp, 120kVp, and 140kVp, all ± 10%. The peak potential check must be
performed at installation time and whenever the X-ray source or X-ray controller is
repaired or replaced. Because it would be very dangerous to directly monitor the kVp
potentials, there is a 10,000
1 0,000 to 1 voltage divider circuit inside the High Voltage
Voltage Power
Supply/Source (HVPS/S). By monitoring this divided voltage, one can determine the peak
potentials being impressed on the X-ray Tube. The monitoring can be done on the terminal
strip on top of the X-ray Source.
WARNING:
ARNING: Alt
Althou
houghgh th
thee test
test vol
voltag
tagee is low
low, there
there are
are ele
elevat
vated
ed vo
volta
ltages
ges n
near
ear aand
nd ar
aroun
ound
d the ttest
est
points.
1. Remove
Remove the
the tank
tank cover
cover (2(2 Philli
Phillips
ps screw
screws)
s)..
Set up the scope as
a s follows:
Channel 1:2V/div (0.2V/div if using x10 probes)
Time base:5.0ms/div
Trigger on line (positive slope)
Set Vertical Mode to Add
Invert Channel 2.
Connect Channel 1 to TB1-PIN 12 (on the tank)
2. Ground both channels

channels and
and move the
the trace to the bottom
bottom of the screen.
screen. Remove
Remove
the grounds and go to DC coupling.
3. Instrument
Instrument power
power,, computer
computer power,
power, and the X-ray
X-ray enable key should
should all
all be on.
4. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
selecting Utilities|Service Utilities|X-Ray
ting
Survey (see “X-Ray Survey” on page 9-1 for information on the utility).
5. Change X-Ray Mode to 4 and Aperture to 7. (Note: On Ci and Wi systems,
5. systems, the
Aperture parameter is set to a default value of -1 by the system software. Do not
change this value on Ci and Wi systems.)
6 . Click X-Rays (F2) to turn X-Rays on.
6.
7. Observe
Observe the oscillo
oscilloscope.
scope. You should
should see a trace
trace similar
similar to Figure 3-17,
3-17, approxi-
mately 4ms pulses with a peak amplitude of 8V (ignore the overshoot, measure
after it settles out). This corresponds to 80kVp inside the tank.
3-28
8 . Click X-Rays (F2) to turn X-Rays off.

8.
he X-ray Mode to 3.
9. Change tth
AW-00336_001-0318
3-17. Peak Potential Mode 4

Figure 3-17.
10. Click X-Rays (F2) to turn X-Rays on.
Click
11. Observe the oscilloscope. You
You should see a trace similar
3-18, alternat-
ing pulses, approximately 4ms in duration, with a peak
pe ak amplitude of 14V and
10V respectively (corresponding to 140kVp and 100kVp inside the tank).
AW-00336_001-0319
3-18. Peak Potential Mode 3

Figure 3-18.
If the scope trace seen is not as shown in either Figure 3-17 or Figure 3-18,
3-18, the system
may have insufficient AC power, a faulty X-ray Controller, or defective Tank.
Note: Enter this information into Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement
Report (see example on page 3-70).
3-70).
3-29
3.4.2 Check Tube Current

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
Follow the procedure below to check

chec k X-ray tube current. Monitoring tube current is done
on the barrier strip on top of the X-ray source.
WARNING:
ARNING: Alt
Althou
houghgh th
thee test
test vol
voltag
tagee is low
low, there
there are
are ele
elevat
vated
ed vo
volta
ltages
ges n
near
ear aand
nd ar
aroun
ound
d the ttest
est
points.
1. If the
the tank cover is
is not off,
off, remove
remove it (2 Phillips
Phillips screws).
screws).
2. Set up the
the scope
scope as fol
follo
lows
ws::
Time base:5.0ms/div
Trigger on Line (positive slope)
Set Vertical Mode to Add
Invert Channel 2.
3. Ground both channels
channels and
and move the
the trace to the bottom
bottom of the screen.
screen. Remove
Remove
the grounds and go to DC Coupling.
4. Instrument
Instrument power
power,, computer
computer power,
power, and the X-ray
X-ray enable key should
should all
all be on.
5. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
6. Change X-ray Mode to1 and Aperture to 7. (Note: On Ci and Wi systems, the
6.
Aperture parameter is set to a default value of -1 by the system software. Do not
change this value on Ci and Wi systems.)
7.
8. Observe
Observe the oscillo
oscilloscope.
scope. You should
should see a trace
trace similar
3-19, approxi-
mately 4ms pulses with a peak amplitude of 3V (ignore the overshoot and mea-
sure current on the back, after
a fter it settles out). This corresponds to 3ma ± 35% tube
current.
9 . Click X-Rays (F2) to turn X-Rays off..
9.
Note: Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement Report (see
example on page 3-70).
3-70).
Changee X-ray Mode to 3.
10.. Chang
10
3-30
AW-00336_001-0320
3-19. Tube Current Mode 1

Figure 3-19.
11.. Clic
11 k X-Rays (F2) to turn X-Rays on.
Click
12. Observe the oscilloscope. You
You should see a trace similar
3-20, approxi-
mately 4ms pulses with a peak amplitude of 10V (ignore the overshoot and mea-
sure current on the back, after it settles out). This corresponds to 10mA ± 35%
tube current.
If the scope trace seen is not as shown in either Figure 3-19 or Figure 3-20,
3-20, the system
may have insufficient AC power, a faulty X-ray Controller, or a defective Tank.
AW-00336_001-0321
3-20. Tube Current Mode 3

Figure 3-20.
page 3-70).
3-70).
3-31
3.4.3 Adjust Belt Tension

3.4.3.1 Check Belt T
Tension
ension
Check for proper tension on the AR, TX and TY motor drive b
belts.
elts. Perform the tension
adjustment for any belt that is loose.
3.4.3.2 Adjust Arm R Belt Tension

Tension
1. Loosen
Loosen the
the belt tensio
tension
n block
block (two
(two 1/4"
1/4" bolts)
bolts)..
2. Adjust the tension
tension nut so that
that the spring
spring is
is compressed
compressed to 7/8"
7/8" from
from the inside
inside of
one washer to the inside of the other washer.
3. Tight
Tighten
en the
the tens
tension
ion block
block bolt
bolts.
s.
3.4.3.3 Adjust Table X Belt Tension

1. At the encoder
encoder end
end of the belt, loosen
loosen the
the tension
tension spring
spring and
and tensioning
tensioning nut.
2. Tighten
Tighten the tensio
tension
n nut so that
that the spring
spring is compres
compressed
sed to 7/8 inch.
inch. The bracket
bracket
cutout can be used as a measuring guide (the inside of the washer should be flush
with the bracket cut).
3. Tighten
Tighten the
the two mounting
mounting bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
3.4.3.4 Adjust Table Y Belt Tension

1. At the encoder
encoder end
loosen the
the 2 bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
2. Instal
Installl the tens
tension
ion spri
spring
ng and tens
tension
ioning
ing nut.
nut.
3. Tighten
Tighten the tensio
tension
n nut so that
that the spring
spring is compres
compressed
sed to 7/8 inch.
inch. The bracket
bracket
4. Tighten
Tighten the
the two mounting
mounting bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
3.4.3.5 Adjust C-Arm Y Belt T

Tension
ension
1. Move
Move the
the C-Arm
C-Arm to the
the cente
centerr of the table.
table.
CAUTIO
CAUTION:
N: Do not
not move
move the C-ar
C-arm
m or the
the ta
table
ble more
more tthan
han 1
1"/s
"/seco
econd
nd wi
with
th th
thee pow
power
er of
off.
f.
2. Turn
Turn off the
the Discovery
Discovery computer
computer power
power and main
main circuit
circuit breaker on
on the rear of
of
the foot end pedestal.
3. Remove
Remove the
the Elect
Electron
ronics
ics Tray covers
covers..
4. Loosen the two
two mounting
mounting bolts holding
holding the belt tension
tension block.
5. Adjust the tension
tension nut
nut so that
that the spring
spring is
is compressed
compressed to 7/8 inch.
inch.
6. Tighten
Tighten the two
two mountin
mounting
g bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
3-32
3.4.4 Calibrate Motors

The SQDRIVER program provides a CALIBRATE command for each of the motors (AY,
AR, TY, TX, and TZ) to calibrate the encoder readback and determine the limits of
motion. These values are loaded into the SQDRIVER.INI file.
Note: Calibrate motors in the following order: TZ, AY
AY, TY,
TY, TX, and AR.
Use the following table to determine which calibration procedures you need
nee d to perform on
a given Discovery model.
Perform the calibration procedures if
indicated (*) in order from left to
right.
Model TZ AY TY TX AR
A * * * * *
SL * * N/A * *
W N/A * * * N/A
Wi N/A * * * N/A
C N/A * N/A * N/A

Ci N/A * N/A * N.A
Each motor (except TZ) requires the corresponding protocol calibration file in the
PROTOCOL sub-directory (e.g., for MOTOR$AY
MOTOR$AY, the calibration protocol is
MOTOR_AY.PRO).
To perform the calibration
ca libration procedure:
1. From
From the Dis
Discove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
screen, select Utilities|Service Utili-
select
ties|SQDRIVER (you must be in Service Mode).
2. At the CARM$$$$> prompt, type MOTOR$XX<Enter>, where XX equals TZ,
2.
AY, TY, TX, or AR depending on which motor you are calibrating.
3.4.4.1 MOTOR$TZ (Discovery A and SL only)

1. Select
Select the
the TZ moto
motorr device
device driv
driver
er by typing: MOTOR$TZ<Enter>.
typing:
2. At the MOTOR$TZ> prompt, type: CALIBRATE<Enter> .
2.
The program sends the calibration command to the TZ microprocessor and waits
twenty seconds for table motion to complete. During
D uring this time, the TZ micropro-
cessor moves the table pedestals to their top mechanical
mec hanical limit and then back
down to their lower mechanical limit. You
You are then asked the following:
Mark the current height of the table and press the <Enter> key to move
the table to the topmost position. Then measure the distance that the table
moved in centimeters.
3. Measure
Measure the distance
distance moved
moved using
using the bottom
bottom edge
edge of the
the top pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and
the floor. The system displays:
3-33
Total Distance Moved By Pedestal [20.0 cm]?

4. Type xx.x<Enter> where xx.x = the distance you measured. It should be
4.
20.0 cm (7 inch). If the distance is not 20.0 cm, type the actual measurement. The
distance measurement affects system results.
5. Press <Enter>. The system then displays the following:
5.
Are Sure Total

Total Distance Moved By Pedestal Is xx.x cm. [Y/N]?
The xx.x equals the measurement you typed in above. If you type N, the system
redisplays the second message and you should retype the distance you measured.
If you typed Y, the system displays the following:
Update Driver INI-File [Y/N] ?
6. Type Y<Enter>.
6.
The SQDRIVER program then reads the calibration parameters from the TZ
microprocessor and prompts:
set_table_calibration=368,3227,382,3237
calibrate_position=10,1000,1000,713,50000,382,382,3237
pos_limit_position=200210
neg_limit_position=0
For information about calibration parameters, see “Calibration Parameters TZ”

on page 3-34.
3-34.
7. If the position
position limits
limits are within
within specifi
specification
cations, Type Y<Enter> to accept the cal-
s, Type
ibration values.
n ot within specifications, Type N<Enter> and adjust
If the position limits are not
the Linear Rotary String (Encoder). See Adjustment on page 5-15 for details.
8. Calibrate
Calibrate the
the TZ motor
motor lower left and
and lower right encoder posit
positions
ions to
to a range of
250 - 300 and a difference of no more than + 5 between the two enc
encoders.
oders. Setting
the TZ encoders to a number outside this range may introduce other errors.
Unlike the encoders for the table and arm motions, the encoders for TZ are not
adjustable in real time. You
You must make a trial adjustment and then rerun the cali-
bration to update the values on the display screen.
The measured distance traveled for motor TZ must be very accurate as well. The
distance traveled should be 20.0 cm
c m +0.1 cm. Always use this specification
whenever performing TZ motor calibrations.
Report any systems that do not conform to the TZ specifications to Techni-
cal Support.
3.4.4.1.1 Calibration Parameters TZ

The four values for set_table_calibration are, respectively, the left pedestal lower and
a nd
upper encoder limits and the right pedestal lower and upper en
encoder
coder limits. The two lower
3-34
limits should be close to each other, as should the two upper

up per limits. The eight
calibrate_position fields are:
1) 10 (Tolerance). The ± position tolerance, in encoder ticks, for absolute
a bsolute moves.
Although the TZ microprocessor does its own absolute moves,
move s, not the AT
AT device
driver, this field is used by state machine programs to determine whether the TZ
position is within tolerance and should be ten (10).
2,3) 1000,1000 (NumberOfSteps,StepDistance). The number of motors steps
corresponding to the step distance in microns. These two fields are only used for
stepping motors, not for the DC table motors, and should always be 1000,1000.
4,5) 819,50000 (NumberOfTicks,T
(NumberOfTicks,TickDistance).
ickDistance). The number of encoder ticks
corresponding to the tick distance in microns. The table encoder calibration is fixed
and should always be 819 encoder counts per 50,000 microns.
6) 500 (EncoderOffset). The value subtracted from the encoder readback
read back to set the
origin of motion. The origin of TZ motion is the lower right pedestal, so this field
should be the same as the third field in the set_table_calibration line (above).
7,8) 500,3494 (NegLimit,PosLimit). The encoder readings for the negative (downward)
and positive (upward) mechanical stops. In normal operation, the TZ
microprocessor
fields should be uses the right
the same pedestal
as the readings
last two forthe
fields in closed loop control so these
set_table_calibration linetwo
(above).
The pos_limit_position and the neg_limit_position are the limits of motion, in microns,
in the positive and negative direction
The PosLimitOffset and NegLimitOff
Notte: The
No NegLimitOffsetset entries in the [TzMotor] section of the
SQDRIVER.INI file determine the motion limits relative to the mechanical stops. If
these entries are not present, or are zero, the motion limits are set to the mechanical
limits, as in the above example.
3.4.4.2 MOTOR$AY
1. Select
Select the
the AY
AY motor
motor device
device driv
driver
er by typing: MOTOR$AY<Enter>
typing:
2. At the MOTOR$AY> prompt in SQDRIVER, type: CALIBRATE<Enter>
2.
The program prompts:
Press <Enter> when the AY motor reaches the LEFT mechanical limit.
Press <ESC> to stop calibration.
3. The program
program moves the AY AY motor to
to the left.
left. When AY
AY hits the
the left mechanic
mechanical
al
stop the first time press <Esc>.
4. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 3750±
3750±5.
5. Adjust
Adjust if necessa
necessary
ry..
If out of range, loosen the coupling
c oupling setscrew and manually rotate the encoder
until the readback is 3750±5 (i.e., in the range 3745-3755) and then tighten the
coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
3-35
5. Repeat the
the calibration
calibration procedure
procedure above
above but now,
now, when AY
AY hits the
the left mechani-
mechani-
cal stop, press <Enter>.
The program then starts AY
AY moving to the right and prompts:
Press <Enter> when the AY motor reaches the RIGHT mechanical
limit.Press <ESC> to stop calibration.
6. When
When AY
AY hits
hits the right
right mechan
mechanica
icall stop, press <Enter>.
stop, press
The program then switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs
Distance calibration grid. It steps the AY
AY motor to the left in one inch
increments until the motor hits the left mechanical stop, and then steps
the AY
AY motor to the right in one inch
in ch increments until the motor hits the
right mechanical stop. The program plots the encoder data during the
scan (in raw encoder units,
un its, 0-4095).
Note: Press <Esc> anytime during the scan to abort
a bort the calibration procedure.
When the calibration scan completes, the program computes the linear fit for
both the positive and negative motion. The linear fit parameters are displayed at
the top left and top right of the plot in the form Y = Intercept + Slope * X. The
two slopes (e.g., 86.6 and 86.5) should be within 0.3 of eeach
ach other.
The program displays the positive and negative limits as horizontal dashed lines.
3-36
Note: The PosLimitOffset and NegLimitOf

NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [AyMotor] section
of the SQDRIVER.INI file determine the motion limits relative to the
mechanical stops. If these entries are not present, or are zero, the motion
limits are set to the mechanical limits).
The program then changes the plot title to PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE .
7. Press the <Enter> key and the program prompts.

motor_direction=1
For information about calibration parameters, see “Calibration Parameters AY”

on page 3-37.
3-37.
8. Type Y<Enter> to accept the calibration values or N<Enter> to reject them.
8.
3.4.4.2.1 Calibration Parameters AY

The motor_direction field determines whether the positive step direction is the reverse of
the direction of increasing encoder values ('0' if the direction is not reversed, '1' if it is).
This value is set from the corresponding parameter in the MOTOR_AY
MOTOR_AY.PRO file and is a
constant for each motor (i.e., the direction of increasing
increa sing encoder values must agree with
the system coordinates and the positive step direction is set by the wiring harness for the
stepper motor).
The eight calibrate_position fields are:
1) 1 (Tolerance). The ± position tolerance, in encoder ticks, for absolute moves. The
calibration program sets this field to the value found in the corresponding
calibrate_position field in the MOTOR_AY.PRO file.
corresponding to the step distance in microns. The ratio of these two numbers
determines the step size (41187/2288 ≅ 18 microns). The calibration program sets
these fields to the values found in the corresponding calibrate_position fields in
the MOTOR_AY
MOTOR_AY.PRO file. Since Sinc e these values are a property of the mechanical
mec hanical
design of the system, they should never change.
4,5) 209,61339 (NumberOfTicks
,TickDistance). The number of encoder
enc oder ticks
corresponding to the tick distance in microns. Again, it is the ratio of these two
numbers (61339/209 ≅ 293 microns) that determines the encoder calibration.
These numbers will generally change from calibration to calibration (although the
ratio should remain approximately the same).
6) 363 (EncoderOffset).
origin of motion. The The value
origin Asubtracted
of AYY motion isfrom the encoder
the extreme rightreadback to set
mechanical the so
stop,
this value should be the same as
a s the first field below.
below.
3-37
7,8) 363,3719 (NegLimit,PosLimit). The encoder readings for the negative (right) and
positive (left) mechanical stops.
in the positive and negative direction.
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [AyMotor] section of the
SQDRIVER.INI
If filenot
these entries are determine
present, the motion
or are zero,limits relative
the motion to the
limits aremechanical
set to the stops.
mechanical limits, as in the above example).
Note: The last calibration scan data is
is saved in the file
file MOTOR_AY
MOTOR_AY.DAT
.DAT. You
You can
reanalyze the data–e.g., after editing SQDRIVER.INI by typing the command
CALIBRATE @MOTOR_AY.DAT at the MOTOR$AY> prompt in SQDRIVER.
3.4.4.3 MOTOR$TY (A, W and Wi models only)

1. Select
Select the
the TY motor
motor devic
devicee driver
driver by typing:: MOTOR$TY<Enter>
by typing
2. At the MOTOR$TY> prompt in SQDRIVER, type: CALIBRATE<Enter >
2.
The program starts TY moving to the left and prompts:
Press <Enter> when the TY motor reaches the LEFT mechanical
mec hanical limit.
3. The program
program moves
moves the TY
TY motor
motor to the
the left.
left. When TY
TY hits the left
left mechanical
mechanical
4. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 3750±
3750±5.
5. Adjust
Adjust if necessa
necessary
ry..
coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
5. Repeat the
the calibration
procedure above
above but now,
now, when TY hits
hits the left
left mechani-
mechani-
The program then starts TY moving to the right and prompts:
Press <Enter> when the TY motor reaches the RIGHT mechanical limit.
When TY hits the right mechanical stop, press <Enter>. The program then
switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs Distance calibration grid. It
steps the TY motor to the left in one inch increments until the motor hits the left
mechanical stop, and then steps the TY motor to the right in one inch increments
until the motor hits the right mechanical stop. The program plots the encoder
data during the scan (in raw encoder units, 0-4095).
3-38
Note: Press <Esc> anytime during the scan to abort the calibration procedure.
two slopes (e.g., 86.5 and 85.6)
85 .6) should be within 0.3 of ea
each
ch other.
each
ch other.
Note: The
The PosLimitOffset and NegLimitOff
NegLimitOffsetset entries in the [TyMotor] section of
the SQDRIVER.INI file determine the motion limits relative to the
limits are set to the mechanical limits.
The program then changes the plot title to PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
3-39

6.
motor_direction=0
Note:The last calibration scan data is saved in the file MOTOR_TY.DAT. You
can reanalyze the data–e.g., after editing SQDRIVER.INI –by typing the
command CALIBRATE @MOTOR_T @MOTOR_TY Y.DAT at the MOTOR$TY>
prompt in SQDRIVER.
3.4.4.4 MOTOR$TX
1. Select
Select the
the TX motor
motor devic
devicee driver
driver by typing:: MOTOR$TX<Enter>
by typing
2. At the
the MOTOR$
MOTOR$TX>
TX> promp
promptt in SQDRI
SQDRIVER type: CALIBRATE<Enter>
VER,, type:

The program moves the TY (W only) and AY

AY motors to their center positions
and prompts:
Use the Table
Table IN / OUT switch to move the C-Arm to 0 degrees.
Press <Enter> when the C-Arm is positioned.
This message displays on all systems. On only A and SL systems, you must use a
digital level to set the C-arm to 0º +0º. On other systems, ignore the message.
3.
3. Press <Enter> and the program prompts:
Press <Enter> when the TX motor reaches the OUTER mechanical limit.
4. The program
program moves
moves the table to
to the front.
front. When
When TX hits
hits the
the outer mechanical
mechanical
stop for the first time press <Esc>.
5. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 1000±
1000±5.
5. Adjust
Adjust if necessa
necessary
ry..
coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
6. Repeat the
the calibratio
calibration
n procedure
procedure above but
but now,
now, when TX hits
hits the
the outer
outer mechan-
ical stop, press <Enter>.
3-40
The program switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs Distance cal-
ibration grid. It steps the TX motor in by 1" increments
incre ments until the inner mechani-
cal stop is hit. The program plots the encoder
encode r data during the scan (in raw
encoder units, 0-4095).
Press <Esc> at anytime during the scan to terminate the calibration procedure.
When the calibration completes, the program computes

comp utes the linear fit for both the
positive and negative motion. The line for parameters are displayed at the top left
and top right of the plot in the form Y = Intercept + Slope * X. The two slopes
(87.0 and 86.9 in the example below) should be within 0.3 o off each other.
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [TxMotor] section
7. The prog
program
ram then
then changes
changes the plot
plot title to PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE .
title to
Press the <Enter> key and the program prompts:
motor_direction=1
3-41
The motor_direction, calibrate_position, pos_limit_position and

neg_limit_position fields have the same interpretation as discussed under
MOTOR$AY.
Note: The last calibration scan data is saved in the file MOT
MOTOR_TX.DA
OR_TX.DAT
T. You
You
can reanalyze
command the data–e.g.,
CALIBRATE after editing SQDRIVER.INI
@MOTOR_TX.DAT –by typing the
at the MOTOR$TX>
prompt in SQDRIVER.
3.4.4.5 MOTOR$AR (Discovery A and SL)

1. Confirm
Confirm that the
the table
table is level front-
front-to-bac
to-back.
k. Do this by removing
removing the table
table pad.
Place the digital level on the table at the foot end and read the value on the level.
It must be 0º degrees ±0.0º degrees. Move the level to the head of the table. Con-
firm that the level is still at 0.0º degrees. Adjust the leveling feet as necessary to
obtain this result. Failure to perform this step will result in positioning toler-
ance errors on whole body, lateral, and IVA IVA scans.
2. Select
Select the
the AR motor
motor devic
devicee driver
driver by typing:: MOTOR$AR<Enter>
by typing
3. At the MOTOR$AR> prompt, type: CALIBRATE<Enter>
3.
The program moves the TY and AY AY motors to their center positions, then moves
the TZ motor to its topmost position and prompts:
Use the Table
4. Remove
Remove the C-arm
C-arm Tank cover
cover.
5. Place the
the digital
digital level on the top of the tank assembly (not on the top of the C-
tank assembly
arm)) and use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm
arm
until it is 0º ±0.0º
6.. Remo
6 Remove
ve the
the leve
levell.
7. Press <Enter>.
7.
3-42
The program moves the TZ table to its top most position and moves the TX table
inwards until it almost touches the C-arm. It rotates the C-arm by 2 degrees to
obtain an initial estimate of the encoder calibration and then prompts:
Press <Enter> when the AR motor reaches the AP mechanical
mec hanical limit.
The program rotates the C-arm counter clockwise (i.e., the tank assembly
a ssembly moves
away from the front of the machine). When the C-arm hits the AP mechanical
limit the first time, press <ESC>.
8. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 250±5
250±5.. Adjust
Adjust if necessar
necessary
y.
coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
9. Before
Before repeating
repeating the
the calibration
calibration procedur
procedure,
e, rotate
rotate the C-arm
C-arm back
back to approxi-
approxi-
mately 0º by:
Typing the command: MOVE_REL 1470<Enter>.
10. Repeat the calibration procedure above but now,

now, when A
AY
Y hits the left mechani-
Press <ESC> to stop calibration. Press <Enter> when the AR motor

reaches the AP mechanical limit.
Wait until the rotation completes and then repeat

repe at the calibration procedure above
but now, when the C-arm hits the AP mechanical stop,
Presss <Enter>.
11. Pres

and moves the C-arm back to the approximate 0° position. The program then
prompts:
Use the Table
Place a level on top of the X-ray tank assembly (not the top of the C-arm) and
use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm until it is
0º ±0.1º. Remove the level, wait until the rotation completes, and then repeat the
calibration procedure above but now, when the C-arm hits the AP mechanical
stop,
3-43
Presss <Enter>.
12.. Pres
12
prompts:
Use the Table
0º ±0.1º. Remove the level and then
Presss <ENTER>.
13. Pres

and moves the C-arm and the X-table together until the C-arm is at approxi-
mately 83°. It then changes the prompt to:
Press <Enter> when the AR motor reaches the lateral mechanical limit.
and begins rotating the C-arm clockwise (i.e., the tank assembly moves toward
the front of the machine). When the C-arm hits the LA
LATERAL
TERAL mechanical limit,
Presss <ENTER>.
14. Pres

prompts:
Use the Table
15. Place the digital level on top of the X-ray tank assembly
assembly and use the Table
Table IN/
OUT switch on the operator panel
pa nel to move the C-arm until it is at 83 °±0.1º (do
not make this measurement with the cosmetic covering
cove ring on the tank assembly).
16. Remove the

the level and then
then press
press <Enter>.
3-44

and moves the C-arm and the X-table back to their initial 0 ° positions.
The program then switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs. Angle
calibration
reaches thegrid. It steps the
83° position andAR motor
then stepsclockwise in 1 ° counter
the AR motor increments until the
clockwise inmotor
1°
increments until the motor return to approximately 0 °. The program plots the
encoder data during the scan (in raw encoder units, 0-4095).
Note:Press <ESC> anytime during the scan to abort the calibration procedure.
When the calibration scan completes, the program computes the linear fits to the
positive and negative rotation. The linear fit parameters are displayed at the top
left and top right of the plot in the form Y = Intercept + Slope
S lope * X. The two slope
values should be within 0.1 of eacheac h other.
The program displays the positive and negative limits as horizontal dashed lines
Note: The PosLimitOffset and NegLimitOff
NegLimitOffset
set entries in the [ArMotor] section of
the SQDRIVER.INI file determine the motion limits relative to the mechanical
stops. If these entries are not present, or are zero, the motion limits are set to the
mechanical limits.
The program then changes the plot title to:

PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
3-45

17. Press
motor_direction=0
neg_limit_position=-1395
For information about calibration parameters, see “Calibration Parameters” on

page 3-46.
3-46.
ype Y<Enter> to accept the calibration values or N<Enter> to reject them.
18.. Type
18
19. Exit SQDRIVER
SQDRIVER by typing exit
exit and clicking Retu
Return.
rn.
3.4.4.5.1 Calibration Parameters

This value is set from the corresponding parameter in the MOTOR_AR.PRO file and is a
stepper motor).
calibrate_position field in the MOTOR_AR.PRO file.
corresponding to the step distance in minutes of rotation. The ratio of these two
numbers determines the step size. The calibration program calculates these fields
based on the measurements of the 0° and 83° positions.
enc oder ticks
corresponding to the tick distance in minutes of rotation.
ro tation. Again, it is the ratio of
these two numbers that determines the encoder calibration. These numbers will
generally change from calibration to calibration (although the ratio should remain
approximately the same).
6) 1035 (EncoderOffset). The value subtracted from the encoder readback to set the
origin of motion. The origin of AR motion is the 0° position, so this value is the
encoder reading at 0°.
7,8) 265,3831 (NegLimit,PosLimit). The encoder readings for the negative (counter
clockwise, or AP) and positive (clockwise, or LATERAL)
LATERAL) mechanical stops.
The pos_limit_position and the neg_limit_position are the limits of motion, in minutes
of rotation, in the clockwise and the counter clockwise direction
3-46

NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [ArMotor] section of the
Note: The last
last calibr
calibration
ation scan data
data is
is saved file MOTOR_AR.DAT. You can re
saved in the file
analyze the data–e.g., after editing SQDRIVER.INI –by typing the command
CALIBRATE @MOTOR_AR.DAT<Enter> at the MOTOR$AR> prompt in
SQDRIVER.
3.4.5 X-Ray Beam Alignment

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
It is crucial that the X-ray beam be precisely

p recisely aligned with the detector array because
improper alignment will directly affect the repeatability (coefficient of variation, or CV)
of the Discovery. Therefore, this alignment must be verified at the time of installation or
whenever any work is performed that may affect it.
To check beam alignment:
Insert the alignment fixture (see the following three figures) into the detector opening.
Alignment Pins
Holding Clamps
3-21. X-Ray Alignment Fixture (TLS-00080)

Figure 3-21.
3-47
Detector Opening C-Arm
A C
Alignment Pin
Holding Clamp
Fixture
B, D
View from Front
Step A. Insert the left side of the Alignment Fixture into the left side of the
Detector Opening so that the vertical edges of the four Alignment
Pins are secure.
Step B. Compress the Holding Clamps.
Step C. Raise the right side of the Alignment Fixture into the Detector
Opening.
Step D. Release the Holding Clamps.
Note: If the Alignment Fixture is inserted with the Alignment Pins on the
right, the procedure works equally well.
3-22. Inserting The X-Ray Alignment Fixture

Figure 3-22.
3-23. The Alignment Fixture Properly Installed

Figure 3-23.
To perform beam
b eam alignment:
1. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
2.. Set Aperture to 10 (set Aperture to -1 for Ci and Wi models), Hi gain to 2, Lo
2
gain to 1 and X-ray Mode to 3.
3-48
3. Place the
the Aperture
Aperture Alignment
Alignment Pin through
through the
the hole in
in the Aperture
Aperture Plate.
Plate. It
It
should drop straight through and into the alignment hole in the Filter Drum
Assembly base plate and be perpendicular
perp endicular to the Aperture Plate. If it is not per-
form steps 4 through 7. Otherwise, proceed to step 8.
4.. Hit the <Esc> key to return to the Discovery Main screen.
4
5. From
From the Dis
Discove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu scre
screen,
en, selec
selectt Utilities|Service Utili-
ties|SQDRIVER.
6. At the CARM$$$$> prompt, type move_aper_rel +100 (to move the Aper-
6.
ture Plate right) or move_aper_rel –100 (to the move Aperture Plate left) until
the Alignment Pin is both vertical and perpendicular to the Aperture Plate. (Place
the block on the base plate next to the pin and compare the pin to the vertical sur-
face of the block to see if the pin is perpendicular).
7. Type exit <Enter> to return to the Discovery Main Screen.
7.
8. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
9. Do no
nott cha
chang he Aperture setting, the Hi gain setting (set to 2), the Lo gain
ngee tthe
setting (set to 1) or the X-ray mode setting (set to 3).
For Display, click Graph/
10.. For
10
11.
11. Cl
Click X-ray (F2) to turn on x-rays.
ick
3-49
The correct display should show a flat graph with an amplitude of aapproximately
pproximately 5.5 volts
with the alignment fixture installed (approximately 6.5 volts with alignment fixture
removed. volts. If thebeam alignment is not correct, perform
pe rform the following procedure.
Figure 3-24
12. Set the machine in
in the Center Table
Table position.
3-50
Adjusting
Screws and
Jam Nuts
Filter Drum Base

Assembly (filter drum
assembly removed)
FRONT
3-25. Filter Drum Adjustments

Figure 3-25. Adj ustments - Top
Top View
13. At the Filter Drum assembly,
assembly, loosen the jam nuts and insert Allen wrenches (3/
(3/
32") in both Filter Drum Allen alignment screws. (Figure
( Figure 3-25 above shows the
locations of alignment screws and jam nuts.) Ensure that the Filter Drum is run-
ning.
14. Start
Start the X-Ray Survey
Survey Utility selecting Utilities|Service Utilities|X-Ray
Utility by selecting
15.. Set Aperture to 10 (set Aperture to -1 for Ci and Wi models), Hi gain to 2, Lo
15
gain to 1 and X-ray mode to 3
For Display, click Graph.
16.. For
16
For Segment, click Air.

17. For
17.
18.. Cl
18 Click X-ray (F2) to turn on x-rays.
ick
The next 5 steps adjust the beam
bea m side to side.
WARNIN
ARNING:
G: The
The X-r
X-ray
ayss aare
re on
on.. Keep
Keep bo
body
dy pa
part
rtss o
out
ut of the
the beam
beam..
1.. Move the front Filter Drum alignment screw until the X-ray signal reaches max-
1
imum voltage.
Note: The last direction
direction turned should
should be clockwise
clockwise to eliminate
eliminate backlash when
the jam nuts are tightened. The plot should show peak amplitude.
2.. Move the rear Filter Drum alignment screw until the X-ray signal reaches maxi-
2
mum voltage.
should be clockwise
3-51
3. Finger tighten
tighten the jam
jam nuts on both Filter
Filter Drum alignm
alignment
ent screws,
screws, then
then gently
gently
snug them with a small wrench (use ofo f excessive force will change the bea
beamm
alignment). After the jam nuts are snug, re-check the graph for proper beam
alignment.
Note: The X-rays
X-rays should still
still show
show peak amplitude.
amplitude.
4. Turn
Turn off
off the X-rays
X-rays using
using the
the <F2> key.
5. Remove
Remove the
the alignme
alignment
nt test
test fixtu
fixture
re from
from the C-arm
C-arm..
X -Alignment Nut (4x)
3-26. Array Assembly - Top View, Partial

Figure 3-26.
3-52
The next six steps adjust the beam front to back.

1. At the Array
Array assembly
assembly,, loosen the
the four X-alignm
X-alignment
ent nuts located
located at the corners
corners of
the assembly (see Figure 3-26 above).
2. Turn
urn on the
the X-ra
X-rays
ys wit
with the <F1> key.
h the
3. For a Discovery A only, adjust the array assembly so that detectors 0 and 215 are
3.
equal.
4. For Discovery C, Ci, W, Wi, and SL models, adjust the array assembly so that
4.
detectors 44 and 171 are equal. You will have to exit this routine, remove the
alignment pin, run the Aperture Calibration procedure (Note: aperture calibration
cannot be run on Ci and Wi models), and then return to X-Ray Survey. When you
enter X-Ray Survey do not change this Aperture setting (set to 7; -1 on Ci and
Wi models), the Hi gain setting (set to 2), the Lo gain setting (set to 1) or the X-
ray mode setting (set to 3).
5. For Display, click Graph.
5.
6. Click X-ray (F2) to turn x-rays on.
6.
7. Follow
Follow the procedure
procedure inin step 3 while checking
checking detectors
detectors number
number 44 and
and 171 to
check for the fall off of x-rays.
8. Tighten
Tighten the
the four X-ray Detector
Detector Assembl
Assembly
y alignment
alignment nuts.
9. Click X-ray (F2) to turn x-rays off.
9.
10. Remove the
the block and pin (Discovery
(Discovery A Only).
Only).
11.
11. Cl
Click Close to exit X-Ray Survey.
ick
12. Reboot the PC to return to the Discovery software.
3.4.6 Calibrate Aperture (Cannot be run on Ci and Wi mod-

els)
It is crucial that the X-ray beam be precisely aligned with the detector, as improper
alignment directly affects the repeatability (coefficient of variation, or CV) of the
Discovery.
Note: If the table cannot be moved from
from the Control Panel, it may be necessary to go to
the Utilities|Emergency Motion menu selection in the Discovery Software.
This procedure locates the exact positions of each aperture (slit) in motor steps and saves
those values in the HARDWARE.INI
HARDWARE.INI file. X-rays are produced
p roduced during this procedure.
1. Cent
Center
er the
the tab
table
le usi
using the Center Table button on the Control Panel.
ng the
2. Remove
Remove all object
objectss ffrom
rom the table.
table.
3. From
From the
the Disco
Discover
very
y Main
Main screen, select Utilities|Service
screen, select
Utilities|SQDRIVER.
3-53
4. At the CARM$$$$> prompt, type CALIBRATE<Enter> (be patient, this

4.
procedure takes several minutes to start).
3.4.7 Check Laser Positioning Offset

Center the table and arm using Center Table button on the Control Panel or the Utilities|
Cen ter Table
AP Reposition feature in the software.
1. Turn
Turn on the laser
laser and set
set the point
point of a sharp
sharp metal
metal object
object to the
the right
right of, and at a
45º angle to, the crosshair.
2. At the
the Discov
Discovery
ery Main
Main Menu
Menu scree
screen,
n, click the Perform Exam button, create a
click the
test patient biography, and select AP Lumbar as the scan type.
3. Uncheck
Uncheck the
the Use
Use Defaul
Defaultt Scan
Scan Mode
Mode check
check box and click Next.
and click
4. Star
artt the
the sca
can.
n.
5. After scan starts
starts and you can
can see the object
object,, click the Reposition Scan button.
click the
6. Using the
the mouse,
mouse, move the
the image so that the tip of the object is
is horizontal
horizontally
ly in
the center and touching the bottom edge of the scan area.
7.
7. Click the Restart Scan button and let the arm
a rm reposition.
8. At the Start Scan screen, click the Cancel button.
8.
9. Turn
Turn on the laser
laser.. Locate the
the 3 laser adjustmen
adjustmentt screws
screws (small
(small Phillips)
Phillips) under
under the
C-arm. Adjust these screws to tilt the assembly until the laser crosshair is on the
tip of the pointed object.
10. Run another
another scan to check your
your adjustments.
adjustments.
3.5 A/D Gain Control Adjustment

An A/D gain adjustment potentiometer ensures that all systems have the same input to the
A/D converter regardless of slight variations in X-ray flux. The location of the
potentiometer depends on the system configuration:
• On system
systemss with
with a separate
separate A/D Converter
Converter board,
board, the adjust
adjustment
ment is the
the only
only potenti-
potenti-
ometer on the A/D Converter board.
• On system
systemss without
without a separate
Converter board,
board, the adjust
adjustment
ment is the
the only
only poten-
poten-
tiometer on the X-Ray Detector assembly.
Caution:Any adjustment of this potentiometer affects the QC highs and lows. You must
run detector flattening after adjusting the A/D gain. DO NOT ADJUST THE A/
D GAIN UNLESS ABSOLUTELY
ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY AS DEFINED BY “Check
and Verify
Verify the A/D Gain” on page 3-54.3-54.
3.5.1 Check and Verify the A/D Gain

1. Instal
Installl all syst
system
em covers
covers that
that are
are normal
normally
ly in the
the X-ray
X-ray beam
beam..
2. In
Inst
stal
alll the
the tab
table
le pad
pad ont
onto
o the
the tabl
table.
e.
3-54
3. Start
Start the QDR/AP
QDR/APEX
EX soft
softwar
waree in Servic
Servicee mode.
mode.
4. On the
the QDR
QDR/A
/APEX
PEX main
main scr
screen
een,, select Utilities|Service Utilities|X-Ray
select
Survey.
5. Set Pulse to 1, press <ALT><P>.
6. Set
a. Hi Gains to 2.
b. Lo Gains to 1.
c. X-ray Mo to 3.
Mode to
d. o 7.
Aperture tto
5. Press <Enter>.
6. Displa
Display
y the X-Ra
X-Ray
y Survey
Survey bar graph,
graph, press
press <Ctr
<Ctrl><
l><Pag
Pagee Down>.
Down>.
7. Obse
Observ
rvee Hi Air
Air, pre
press
ss <Alt
<Alt><
><S>
S>..
8. Turn
urn on
on X-ra
X-rays
ys,, p
pre
ress
ss <F1>
<F1>..
9. Verify that the average
average X-ray
X-ray signal
signal level is 6.25V
6.25V and that all
all detectors
detectors are
within the 4.5V to 8.5V range. If these conditions are met, the procedure is com-
plete. Do not adjust the A/D gain.
If these conditions are not met, continue to “Adjust the A/D Gain” on page 3-55
3-55..
3.5.2 Adjust the A/D Gain

Caution:Do not adjust the A/D gain unless absolutely
a bsolutely necessary as defined by “Check
and Verify
Verify the A/D Gain” on page 3-54.
1. Adjust
Adjust the A/D gain
gain potentiom
potentiometer
eter to achieve
achieve an average
average X-ray
X-ray signal of
of 6.25V.
6.25V.
2. Check that
that all detectors
detectors are
are within
within a range of
of 4.5V to
to 8.5V.
8.5V.
3. Perform
Perform the
the Detector
Detector Flattening
Flattening procedure
procedure describ
described
ed in
in “Perform Detector Flat-
tening ” on page 3-55.
3-55.
3.5.3 Perform Detector Flattening

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
This procedure flattens the X-ray beam for each scan mode and finds the metal edge of the
table.
Note: All covers,
covers, table
table mat, etc.,
etc., normally
normally in the
the X-ray path,
path, MUST be
be on the Scanner
Scanner
before running Beam Flattening.
1. Restart
Restart the Discover
Discovery
y software
software in service
service mode (if
(if not already). Press the Center
already). Press
Table button and turn on the laser.
2. If you are
are using an Anthropomo
Anthropomorphic
rphic Spine
Spine Phantom
Phantom (resem
(resembles
bles vertebra
vertebrall bod-
ies, Part Number 030-1967), place the phantom on end (vertical) with the spinal
3-55
processes pointing towards the head end of the table. The laser crosshair should
be 1.5 inch in from the left end and centered. (Some phantoms will have a target
hole, if not, use a ruler).
If you are using a DXA
DX A Quality Control Phantom (aluminum representation of
vertebral bodies that does
d oes not resemble real bone, Part Number ASY-01564),
ASY-01564),
place the phantom on end with the flattening target facing up. Orient the pha
phantom
ntom
so the metal edge is to the right (head end) and tissue to the left (foot end) as
viewed from the front of the table. Align the phantom flattening target to the laser
crosshair.
3. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
selecting Utilities/Service Utilities/X-Ray
ting
4.. Set Pulse to 1, High gain to 2, Low gain to 1, X-ray Mode to 3 and Aperture to
4
7.
5.
6.
7. Check that
that phantom
phantom covers
covers the whole
whole beam. This
This is critical.
critical. If
If phantom
phantom does not
cover the whole beam, move it until it does. Keep the phantom as straight as pos-
sible.
8. Turn
urn off
off X-r
X-ray
ayss wit
with the <F2> key and press <Esc> to exit X-Ray Survey.
h the Surv ey.
Reboot the PC, logon as a s Field Service, and restart the software in Service Mode
to return to Discovery Main Menu screen.
9.. Select Utilities|Service Utilities|Detector Flattening. Click the Continue
9
button. This procedure can takes about 10 minutes on a C or W model and 55
minutes on an A or SL.
10. When flattening is complete, run
run a QC scan and cancel adding it to the QC plot.
11. Use the Scan File Plot utility to check X-ray beam flatness of the QC scan
scan per-
formed in Step 10.
3.5.4 Perform Lateral Alignment Test (A and SL)

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
Note: This procedure applies to A and SL systems only.

only. Use this procedure to verify
lateral alignment.
This procedure verifies lateral alignment.
1. On the control
control panel press
press Center
Center to move the
the table
table and C-Arm
C-Arm to the
the center
position.
2. On the control
control panel press
press Laser
Laser on the
the control
control panel
panel to turn
turn the laser
laser light
light on.
3. Place the spine
spine phantom
phantom on the table
table top with
with its laser target
target towards
towards the left
left (foot
end) and the vertebrae to the right (head end).
3-56
4. Align the
the phantom
phantom so that the
the laser crossh
crosshair
air is on the
the phantom
phantom laster
laster target.
target.
Using the laser as a guide, adjust the phantom to be parallel to the table edges
(just like when performing a QC scan).
5. On the APEX/
APEX/QDR
QDR main
main scree
screen,
n, select
select Perfo
Perform
rm Exam.
Exam.
6. Create
Create a ttest
est patien
patientt biogr
biography
aphy..
7. Select
Select OK
OK at pati
patient
ent Conf
Confirm
irmati
ation
on Screen
Screen..
8. On the Select
Select Scan Type
Type screen
screen select AP/Late
AP/Lateral
ral Pair.
Pair. Uncheck Use
Use Default
Default
Scan Mode and click Next.
9. Select
Select Arra
Array
y and
and clic
click
k Next
Next..
10. On the Select Lateral Scan Mode screen
screen select Array and click Next.
11. Verify the alignment of the
the spine phantom to the laser.
laser.
12. Change Scan Length to 6.0 inches and click Start
Start Scan to perform tthe
he AP scan.
13. When scan has finished,
finished, select Spine as the analysis method, and click Next.
14. Analyze the scan, and click Start
Start Position. At the bottom of screen verify that
that the
centerline angle is + 2 degrees. If OK, go to the next step. If not OK, restart the
procedure (go back to Step 1), being careful to align
a lign the phantom properly to the
laser.
15. If you are using an Anthropomorphic Spine Phantom (resembles
(resembles vertebral bod-
ies, Part Number 030-1967), skip this step.
If you are using a DXA
DX A Quality Control Phantom (aluminum representations of
vertebral bodies, Part Number ASY-01564),
ASY-01564), place 2 sheets of paper along the left
and right edges of the phantom as shown in Figure 3-27.
Figure 3-27.
3-57
Next, rotate the phantom “bone” segments towards the front of the scanner as
shown in Figure 3-28. Be careful to keep the phantom left and right edges paral-
lel to the sheets of paper.
Figure 3-28.
16. Click close, and then hold the Enable Lateral switch on the control panel to
to move
the system to the lateral position.
17. Click Start
Start Scan to perform
perform the lateral
lateral scan.
18. When the scan has finished, press
press and hold the Enable Lateral sswitch
witch to return
the system to AP position.
19. Analyze the lateral scan (refer
(refer to User Guide for instructions if necessary).
necessary). When
done, click Close.
20. At the Exit Analysis screen select Report. Print a report of the procedure just per-
formed, and include the report in the paperwork being returned to Hologic.
3.5.5 Check HVPS/S (Tank) For Radiation Leakage

For regulatory and safety reasons, the High Voltage Power Supply/Source (HVPS/S) must
be checked for radiation leakage
le akage at the time of installation or wheneve
wheneverr the HVPS/S is
repaired or replaced.
3-58
3.5.5.1 Principles
Radiation leakage from the HVPS/S results from a defect in the lead liner of the tank or its
cover. If there is a hole in the lead liner, the resulting leakage will produce a pencil
pe ncil beam
of X-rays. If there is a crack in the lead liner, the resulting leakage will produce a fan
beam. In either case, the initial survey must be taken close to and almost touching the tank
with the survey meter probe. If a leak is found, the meter indicates a spike in the reading.
If this occurs, you must then move the probe one-meter
one -meter (approx. 40”) along the beam from
that spot to determine if the leakage is within acceptable levels.
The Victoreen 450P has a response time of:
Range Time
0-4mR/h 3.3 seconds
0-40mR/h 4.5 seconds
3.5.5.2 Performing the Leakage T

Test
est Procedure
1. Remove the
the tank cover
cover and set the
the X-ray
X-ray leakage
leakage test shield
shield (099-0566)
(099-0566) over
over the
aperture slot.
3-29. Leakage Test Shield (099-0566)

Figure 3-29.
2. Start
Start the Utilit
Utility
y by selecting Utilities|Service Utilities|X-Ray Survey (see “X-
selecting
Ray Survey” on page 9-1 for information on the utility).
3. Change X-Ray Mode to 3 and Aperture to 7 to lock in the changes.
3.
3-59
3.5.5.3 Initial Leakage Survey

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
1. Turn
Turn on X-r
X-rays
ays by pres
pressin
sing the <F1> key.
g the
2. Slowly
Slowly move the the meter probe (V
(Victoreen
ictoreen Model
Model 450P oror equivalent)
equivalent) about all
all
accessible surfaces (see table above for meter response times) to detect any leaks.
3. If a leak
leak is detected
detected (a
(a spike in
in the reading)
reading),, measure
measure a point
point at a one
one meter
meter
(approx. 40”) distance from the leak and insure that the reading is 10µGy/h
(1.0mrad/h) or less.
3.5.5.4 Final Leakage Survey

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
1. Position
Position the
the survey
survey meter one meter
meter (approx.
(approx. 40”)
40”) from the tank
tank and move
move it all
around the outside of the instrument.
2. The
The rrea
eadi
ding
ng must
must be 10µGy/h (1.0mrad/h) or less. Record the highest reading in
the service report.
3. Press the <F2> key to turn off X-rays, remove the tool, and
3. a nd replace the tank
cover.
page 3-70).
3-70).
3.5.6 Calibrate For Area, BMD And BMC

Calibration for Area, BMD, and BMC is accomplished in 3 stages:
a. Array
Array Scan
Scan Thick
Thicknes
nesss Meas
Measure uremen
mentt & Calibr
Calibrati
ation
on
b. Calibr
Calibrati
ation
on of
of Area
Area and BMC for Array
Array Scan
Scan Modes
Modes
c. Addi
Adding
ng Arr
Array
ay AP
AP scan
scanss tto
o tthe
he QC
QC data
databas
basee
Follow the procedure, in order, and exactly as shown, for each stage of the calibration.
ca libration.
Note: If the Discover
Discoveryy being instal
installed
led is to
to replace an existi
existing
ng QDR pencil
pencil beam or
hybrid pencil/fan beam system, then a cross-calibration must first be performed to
ensure that any longitudinal studies begun on the QDR being removed can safely
be continued on the new Discovery. Perform the cross-calibration before de-
installing the existing QDR. (Refer to QDR 1000-4500 Upgrade Procedure, 080-
0767 for complete instructions.)
Note: If this customer
customer site
site includes
includes two or more
more fan beam systems
systems or if
if this Discover
Discovery
y is
replacing an older fan beam
bea m system (model QDR 4500 or Delphi), perform the
cross calibration procedure contained in Technical Bulletin TB-00123 before de-
installing the older system.To ensure stability,
stability, the instrument must be completely
powered up for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to running any of the following
3-60
tests. Also, because the tabletop pad will have a slight affect on the test results, all
scans must be performed with it in place.
WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re produ
produced
ced d
duri
uring
ng most
most of the
these
se tests
tests.. Keep h
hand
ands,
s, head
head an
and
d oth
other
er bo
body
dy parts
parts
out of the X-ray beam path. The tester should also be wearing an approved radiation
dosimetry badge.
3.5.7 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (C and W)

1. Pres
Presss tthe
he Cent
Center
er Table
able but
butto
ton.
n.
2. Turn
urn on the las
aser
er..
3. With
With the
the laser on, place
place the phantom
phantom so that
that the
the laser
laser dot is on the centerli
centerline
ne of
the phantom, 1/2" from the left end,
end , shining on the phantom target. The sides of
the phantom should be aligned parallel to the table, using a ruler if nec
necessary
essary..
4. Be sure
sure the
the spine
spine phantom
phantom has been entered
entered in the
the patient
patient databas
databasee in the
the form
form of
#nnnn"" (where nnnn is the number of the phantom) so that the
"Spine Phantom #nnnn
QC plot program can
c an identify it properly.
5. From
From the
the Disc
Discove
overy
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen
screen,, sselect Perform Exam, select the Spine
elect
Phantom, and click the OK button at Patient Information dialog box.
6. Select AP Lumbar Spine, uncheck default scan check box, and click the
Next> button.
7. Select Array, click the Next> button, set the scan length to 6 inches, and start
the scan.
8. Anal
Analyz
yzee the
the sc
scan
an an
and
d cli
click the Close button to exit the Analysis screen.
ck the
9. Start the
Start the Field
Field Servi
Service
ce Calibr
Calibrati
ation
on progra
program
m by selecting Utilities|Service Utili-
selecting
ties|Field Service Calibration from the Discovery Main Menu screen.
10. Select the Spine
Spine Highs/Lows
Highs/Lows for Array
Array Spine phantom option
option to automaticall
automatically
y
calculate the new thickness indicators for array spine.
11. Select the
the Spine Phantom
Phantom scanned in
in step 6 from the list
list of Analyzed
Analyzed Scans and
click the Next button. Click the Continue button on the Successfully Calcu-
lated message box.
12. Click on the Temp
Temp Write
Write button
button and click
click the Continue
Continue button on the
the Success-
fully Wrote message box. Exit Field Service Calibration.
3.5.8 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (A and SL)

1. From the QDR
QDR For Windows
Windows perform
perform exam button,
button, select
select the spine phantom
phantom to
be used for checking the array scan modes. This should be the one shipped with
the machine.
Note: form
Be sure the spine
of "Spine phantom
Phantom has been
#nnn" entered
(where nnn isinthe
thenumber
patientof
database in the
the phantom)
so that the QC plot program can identify it properly.
properly.
3-61
2. Center the table,

table, place
place the
the phantom
table and set up a exam using the AP/AP/
Lateral setup, uncheck the use default scan mode box, click next, select Array
scan mode for the AP component and Fast Array for the Lateral component. The
sides of the phantom should be aligned parallel to the table, using a ruler if neces-
sary.
3. Press and hold
hold Enable
Enable until
until the
the arm and table
table move into position.
position. Recheck
Recheck phan-
tom alignment with laser, and click continue.
Note: Do not move the arm or table, otherwise the test will have to be start
started
ed
over.
4. Change the scan
scan length
length to 6 inches, and click
click start
start scan to
to begin
begin the
the AP compo-
nent.
5. When scan
scan has finished,
finished, select
select Spine as the
the analysis method, and click Next.
analysis method,
6. Analyze
Analyze the scan, and
and click
click start
start positi
position.
on. Check
Check at bottom
bottom of screen
screen that
that the
the cen-
terline angle is + or - 2 Degrees.
Degree s.
7. Click
Click close,
close, and
and then
then hold
hold the enabl
enablee button
button to late
lateral
ral posi
positio
tion.
n.
8. Click
Click Star
Startt Scan
Scan to perf
perform
orm Latera
Laterall compo
component
nent..
9. Press
Press and
and hold
hold the
the Enable
Enable swit
switch
ch to retur
return
n to AP
AP positi
position.
on.
10. Analyze
Analyze scan (refer
(refer to user guide
guide for Lateral
Lateral analysis)
analysis) and close
close the screen.
screen.
11. Click exit
exit to close the
the Exit Analys
Analysis
is screen.
screen.
12. Restart
Restart QDR for Windows
Windows software
software in service
service mode (if not already).
already). From
From the
QDR Main window, select Utilities, Service Utilities, Field Service Calibration.
13. Select Highs/Lows
Array Spine
Spine Phantom
Phantom
14. Select the AP scan
scan just
just performed
performed and
and click next
15. Click continue
continue on the Calculat
Calculated
ed highs and lows
lows page.
16. Select Highs/Lows
Array Lateral
Lateral Phantom.
Phantom.
17. Click continue
continue on the Calculat
Calculated
ed highs and lows
lows page.
18. Click Temp
Temp Write
Write to write
write temporary results
results and click continue
continue to exit the write
dialog box.
3.5.9 Calibration of Area and BMC, for Array Scan Modes

After the machine has been calibrated for thickness measurement in the array mode, it
must be calibrated for the array AREA and BMC measurements.
1. Restart
Restart the Discovery
Discovery softwar
softwaree in servic
servicee mode (if not
not already).
already). Center the table.
table.
From the Discovery Main Menu screen, select Utilities|Service Utilities|AP
Reposition. Return to the menu and select Utilities|Service Utilities|Auto
Scan.
2. Sele
Select
ct the
the Spi
Spine
ne Phan
Phanto
tom.
m.
3-62
3. Click OK at Patient Confirmation dialog box.

4. Select
Select AP Lum
Lumbabarr Scan
Scan Typ
Type,
e, input 20 for number of scans, uncheck Use
input
Default, and click the Next button.
5. Sele
Select
ct Ar
Arra
ray
y and
and clic
click the Next button.
k the
6. Analyze
Analyze the
the first
first scan
scan manua
manually
lly.. Not
Notee the scan
scan #. Cli
Click the Close button to exit
ck the
analysis.
7. From
From the
the Discove
Discovery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen, select Utilities|Service Utili-
screen, select
ties|Auto Analyze.
8. Click
Click on unana
unanalyz
lyzed
ed Scans
Scans and
and select
select the 19
19 scans,
scans, click on Compare radio but-
click
ton and then click the next button.
9. Now,
Now, selec
selectt the
the scan
scan analy
analyzed
zed in
in step
step 6 and
and clic
click the next button.
k the
10. The 19 scans
scans will
will now be compared
compared with
with the analyzed
analyzed scan.
scan.
11. From the
the Discovery
Discovery Main Menu
screen, select
ties|Field Service Calibration.
12.
12. Clic
Click the ACF/BCF button. Select the 20 scans, click next, and then click Con-
k the
tinue at the Successfully Calculated dialog box.
13. At the Field
Field Service
Service Calibratio
Calibration
n dialog box, the Write button to write the
box, click the
values to ARRC.TXT file. Click the Continue button to return to the Discovery
Main Menu screen.
14. Print ARRC.TXT
ARRC.TXT file
file by using
using these steps:
steps:
• Press the <Ctrl><Esc> keys to bring up the WindowsXP Taskbar.
Taskbar.
• Select Find
• Select Files or Folders
• Type ARCC.TXT in the Named: edit box.
• Click Find Now or simply hit the <Enter> key.
• Right
Right click
click on
on the first
first ARRC
ARRC.TXT
.TXT entr
entry
y in the
the list
list present
presented
ed to you
you and
select Print from the menu. (You want the ARRC.TXT entry in the
QDR\DATA directory NOT the QDR\DATA\LRTEMP directory.)
15. Verify ACF=ACFL=A
ACF=ACFL=ACFT
CFT and BCF=BCFL=BCFT
BCF=BCFL=BCFT in ARRC.TXT.
ARRC.TXT.
3.5.10 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC

Database
Once the unit has been calibrated, AP scans must be re-analyzed and added to the QC
database.
1. From
From the
the Discove
Discovery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
screen, select
select Utilities|Service Utili-
ties|Auto Analyze.
3-63
2. Select
Select Anal
Analyze
yzed
d sc
scans
ans,, click RECALYZE, and select the 20 scans
click sca ns just acquired
and click the Next button.
3. The scans
scans will
will now be recalc
recalcula
ulated
ted to the
the new cali
calibrat
bration
ion..
4. Highli
Highlight
ght the
the scans
scans from
from the
the Exclu
Excluded
ded list
list and clic
clickk the Include Scans button
and then the Finish button. (Selection is easier if you click Scan Date bar above
the list. This will order the scans by date and
a nd time).From the Discovery Main
Menu screen, select QC|QC Data Management|Select Scans .
5. Select the QC|QC Data Management|Plot option from the Discovery Main
Menu Screen to generate an AREA, BMC, and BMD plot for each array mode.
Verify that the QC plots include the factory scans and the scans just performed.
6. Ensure
Ensure that
that all
all scans
scans fall
fall between
between the
the two,
two, dotted
dotted limit
limit lines
lines..
7. Print the BMD, BMC, Area HiAir and LoAir
LoAir plots.
plots. Include
Include the printed
printed plots
plots
with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.
Note: For more detail
detailss on performing
performing the
the QC setup and producing
producing QC plots,
plots, refer
refer to the
the
Discovery User's Guide.
3.5.11 Install Software Options

Install, configure, and test all software options purchased by the customer as defined by
the Sales Order except for the HL7 option (installation of HL7 is a customer
responsibility). This includes but is not limited to DICOM and a local copy of Physician's
Viewer on the Discovery system.
3.5.12 Test Scan Modes

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
Perform at least one scan in each

ea ch of the scan modes to verify that machine is fully
functionalduring
problems in all modes of operation.
each scan mode. Verify
Verify that there are no elec
electrical
trical or mechanical
[ ] Perform an AP Spi
Spine
ne Array,
Array, Fast Array,
Array, and Express (Ci and Wi
Wi only) scan.
[ ] Perform a Left Hip Array,
Array, Fast Array,
Array, and Express (Ci and Wi
Wi only) scan.
[ ] Perform a Whole Body scan
scan (A, W,
W, and Wi
Wi only).
[ ] Perform a Forearm scan.
[ ] Perform the IVA
IVA Scan QC Procedure described below.
below.
3.5.12.1 Performing the IVA Scan QC Procedure

The ability of the Discovery to produce high quality images must be tested:
• at the
the tim
timee of
of inst
instal
alla
lati
tion
on
• after the repair
repair of any
any parts
parts associ
associated
ated with the generati
generation
on or detection
detection of x-rays
3-64
Each service engineer has been provided with an 11-step aluminum phantom (Step Wedge
Penetrometer, P/N 099-0716) for checking image contrast
c ontrast and a line-pair phantom (X-ray
Test Pattern, P/N 099-0715) for verifying scan resolution.
Checking the quality of the IVA
IVA scans requires three scans:
• single-ener
erg
gy AP
• si
sing
ngle
le-e
-ene
nerrgy later
ateral
al
• dual-energy AP
AP
To perform an IVA scan QC, do the following:
1. Press the Center Table button to center the table.
1.
2.. Press the Laser button to turn the laser ON. If the laser goes off
2 off during the align-
ment process just press the Laser button again to turn the laser ON.
3. Place the x-ray
x-ray Step
Step Wedge
Wedge Phantom
Phantom (P/N
(P/N 099-0716)
099-0716) on the table
table approxima
approximately
tely
an inch to the right of the crosshair.
crosshair. Center the laser line
line approximately through
the center of the Step Wedge.
4. The Step Wedge
Wedge Phantom
Phantom should
should be placed with
with its
its thickest
thickest end to
to the left (foot
(foot
end) and its thinnest end on the right with its edges parallel to the table.
5. Skip steps 6 through 8 for Models Ci and Wi.
6. The X-ray
X-ray Test
Test Pattern
Pattern Phantom
Phantom (P/N
(P/N 099-0715)
099-0715) should
should be aligned
aligned approxi-
approxi-
mately an inch to the right of the Step Wedge
Wedge Phantom.
7. The x-ray test pattern
pattern should
should be placed
placed on the
the table with
with the lines
lines the Test
Test Pattern
Pattern
Phantom perpendicular to the motion of the C-arm during sscanning.
canning. The laser
line should pass through
through the center of the x-ray Test
Test Pattern Phantom. The 1.8
and 0.6 test patterns should be farthest from the Step Wedge
Wedge Phantom. The 0.6
test pattern should be nearest to the front of the table.
8. Depre the Laser button on the C-Arm to turn OFF the laser.
press th
9. Click the Perform Exam button at the Discovery Main Screen.
9.
10. Select the IVA Test as the patient. If this name is not present, then click the New
Select the
patient button. Enter IVA Test as the new patient last name. Leave the first
name and initials blank and then click the OK button.
11.
11. Click
Click the name IVA Test from the patient names. Click the OK button.
the name
2. In Patient Confirmation Screen, click the OK button.
12.
1
the Select Scan Type screen, select IVA Imaging.
13.. At the
13
Uncheck the Use default scan mode check box and then click the Next>> but-
14. Uncheck
ton.
Select SE AP Image then click the Next>> button.
15.. Select
15
16.. Select
16 Select None then click the Next>> button.
17. From the Scan Parameters screen set the scan length to 10.0 inches.
From the
3-65
18. Cl
Clic
ick the Start Scan button to run a single-energy AP scan.
k the
19. From the Hologic Analyze screen, perform the next 3 steps.
From the
Note: Intensity may be adjusted to visualize scan.
20. Count the 12 steps associated with the Step Wedge
Count the Wedge Phantom.
The number of steps visible on the Step Phantom should be 11 and 1 more for the
table.
21. Skip this step on models Ci and Wi. By clicking the + sign to increase the mag-
nification and using the scroll bar to examine the x-ray test pattern image on the
screen, you should be able to see three lines for the 0.8 test pattern image .
22. When completed click the Cancel button.
completed,, click
3.5.13 Finish Assembling Unit

Dress all cables at the rear of the console with nylon tie wraps. Take the time to replace
any covers or enclosures that may have been previously removed. Check that all of the
machine's safety features (ground wires, emergency stop, etc.) are in place and working
properly.. Finally, clean the machine and remove any unwanted
properly unwan ted packing materials from the
room.
3.5.14 Measure X-Ray Dose To Patient

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
A radiation dose measurement must be performed at installation time, and should be done
routinely whenever the machine is serviced. This test requires the use of a Victoreen
Model 450P or equivalent measuring device set to measure
mea sure dose over time (mR/Hr).
Note: The dose measurements with the machine fully assembled and the
measurements must be done with
table mat in place.
place.
1. Place the meter

meter in the center of the table
table approximat
approximately
ely ½ inch
inch to the right of the
laser crosshair.
2. Click the Perform Exam button, create a test patient biography, and select the
2.
Array spine scan.
3. Set scan
scan lengt
length
h for 9.5 inche
inchess and cli
click the Start scan button.
ck the
4. The
The met
meter
er is now
now scan
scanned
ned..
5. Observe
Observe the scan to
to verify that
that the entire
entire chamber
chamber of the
the meter is
is included
included in the
scan.
6. Record
Record the
the resu
result
lt from
from the meter
meter..
Note: The array spine scan dose should be less than 200µGy (20mrad).
7. Record
Record the
the highest
highest readin
reading
g in the
the servic
servicee report.
report.
3-66
Note: Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement Report (see
example on page 3-70).
3-70).
3.5.15 Measure X-Ray Scatter From Phantom

WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep ha
hands
nds,, head
head and o
othe
therr bod
body
y par
parts
ts out
out
of beam.
A radiation scatter measurement must be performed at the time of installation. You
You must
use a survey-type radiation
ra diation meter (Victoreen 450P or equivalent).
Perform the following:
1. Cent
Center
er the
the ttabl
ablee and
and C-a
C-arm
rm
2. Place the
the spine
spine phantom
phantom in the
the center
center of the table
table and align
align using
using the
the laser
laser.
3. St
Star
artt aan
n AP
AP Spi
Spine
ne sca
scan.
n.
4. Using the <Esc> key, stop the scan when it is between the two middle vertebrae.
4.
5. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
6. Using the
the survey meter
meter,, measure
measure the scatter
scatter radiation
radiation at a distan
distance
ce of 2 meters
meters
from the phantom on a horizontal plane all around the unit. Move the meter
slowly (refer to the Victoreen response table on page 3-59).
3-59).
Note: If you cannot measure the scatter radiation at a distance of 2 meters
because of space restrictions, you can measure at 1 meter and divide the
result by 4. This reading must be less than 10µGy/h (1.0mrad/h) at 2
meters (approx. 80 in.) in array AP scan mode.
7. Record the
the highest
highest reading
reading in the
the service
service report
report and then
then turn off
off X-rays
X-rays by click-
click-
ing on X-ray (F2).
Note: Enter this informat
information
ion into the Radiation
Radiation Measurement
Measurement Report (see example
example on
page 3-70).
3-70).
3.5.16 Perform QC
Once the machine has been
bee n fully assembled and calibrated, at least one QC scan should be
performed.
• Perfor
Perform
m the dail
daily
y QC proced
procedure
ure and
and enter
enter the
the scan
scan into
into the QC
QC databa
database.
se.
3.5.17 Run Reproducibility Test

Reproducibility is the ability of the scanner unit to perform consecutive scans while
keeping the amount of radiation for each scan consistent. Instrument reproducibility is
tested by running 10 consecutive scans of the spine phantom shipped with the unit. You
must then plot the results of the High Air and Low Air measurements for these scans and
3-67
insure that the coefficient of variation for absolute radiation is less than 4%. The plot
screen does not readily display the coefficient of variation for absolute radiation.
ra diation.
You must use the formula:
coefficient of variation for absolute radiation = standard deviation (SD) x.0028
x.0 028
Therefore:
If… Then…
the Standard Deviation (SD) for both High Air the coefficient of variation for absolute radiation is
(HiA) and Low Air (LoA) is less than or equal to less than 4%.
14,
To do this:
1. If necessary
necessary,, restart
restart the
the Discovery
Discovery softwa
software
re in Service
Service Mode.
Mode.
2. Perform
Perform 10 arr
array
ay spin
spinee scans
scans (using Utilities|Service Utilities|Autoscan
(using
from the Discovery Main Menu screen).
3. Analyze
Analyze the fir
first
st scan
scan manual
manually
ly..
4. Include
Include the analyzed
analyzed Scans
Scans into
into the QC database.
database. On the
the APEX main
main screen,
screen,
select QC>QC data Management>Select Scans. In the Excluded Scans
pane, select (highlight) the ten scans just analyzed and click Include Scans. Click
OK when done.
5. Put the results
results in the QC database
database (if
(if you have not already
already done so).
so).
6. From the Discove
Discovery
ry Main
Main Menu,
Menu, sele ct QC|QC Data Management|Plot. Use
select
a start and end date that will only select the scans that you have just completed.
7. Select
Select QC
QC Paramet
Parameter
er to Plot,
Plot, HiA,
HiA, and
and Plot.
Plot.
8. Plot
Plot the
the data
data for the 10 scans
scans in step
step 1.
9. Assu
Assure
re that
that the
the SD is
is 3 or less
less..
10. Repeat for “LoA” by repeating steps 4-7.

4-7. This result m
must
ust also be 3 or less.
less.
Note: Enter this informat
information
ion into the Radiation
Radiation Measurement
Measurement Report (see example
example on
page 3-70).
3-70).
3.5.18 Table Top Radiographic Uniformity (A, W and Wi)

This procedure verifies proper X-Ray beam alignment and the uniformity of the X-Ray
transparency of entire tabletop (for Discovery A, W and Wi models).
models).
1. If necessary
necessary,, restart
restart the Discovery
Discovery software
software in
in Service
Service Mode.
2. Type WBAIRQC in the Patient Biography. Enter the serial number of the unit
un it in
the Patient ID field.
Make sure that only the pad is on the table. Clear the table of anything else.
3-68
3. Perf
Perfor
ormm one
one Whol Body air scan (a scan with nothing on
Wholee Body o n the table). Do NOT
interrupt the scan for any reason. When the scan completes, select Exit Exam.
Do not analyze the scan that was just performed.
4. From the Discove
Discovery
ry Main
Main Menu
screen, select
ties|Table
ties|Table Top Radiographic Uniformity.
5. Select
Select the
the Whol
Wholee Body
Body scan
scan and clic
click
k the
the Next> button.
6. Table Top
Top Radiographi
Radiographicc Uniformit
Uniformityy results
results tabs are now displayed.
displayed. Select
Select the
the
Low Air Tab.
11. If the Global Stats S.D. (2) is less than 2.0, the instrument is properly
aligned.
If the Global Stats S.D. is greater than or equal to 2.0 , then the machine is not
aligned properly. Check the following:
• If the
the image
image appear
appearss "stre
"streaky"
aky" or
or "banded
"banded",", check
check for
for loose
loose wires
wires or other
other
debris between the table and the tank.
• Check
Check thethe Aper
Apertu
ture
re Cal
Calibibra
rati
tion
on (se
(seee page
page 3-53).
3-53).
• Check
heck AC Li Line vo
voltage.
ge.
• Che
heck
ck +/-
+/- 15V
15V Powe
Powerr Sup
Suppl
ply
y
• Chec
Check k Dete
Detectctor
or Fla
Flatt
tten
enin
ingg on pag
pagee 3-55.
3-55.
• Re- daiily QC (see the Discovery User's Guide).
e-rrun da Guide).
Print a copy of the test results and inlcude it with the other paperwork being
be ing
returned to Hologic.
After realignment, repeat the Table Top Radiographic Uniformity test. If the
global S.D. is less than 2.0, you are done. If the global S.D. if equal or greater
than 2.0, print a copy of the test results and include it with the other pa
paperwork
perwork
being returned to Hologic.
If the global is equal to or greater than 2.0, the non-uniformity may be attributed
to the table itself. If so, continue with this procedure.
proce dure. Make sure that the machine
has body composition loaded. If it does,
do es, then follow the appropriate procedure
below.
3.5.19 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA)

Instruments performing BCA must have a global S.D. of less than 2.0. If the realignment
and recalibration procedures above have been performed and an S.D. of less than 2.0
cannot be obtained, then the tabletop must be replaced.
Note: Archive the air scans you have acquired and either e-mail or ship them
them to a
Technical Support Specialist at Hologic headquarters for final evaluation.
3-69
3.5.20 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis

Instruments using only BMD Whole Body measurements can tolerate a larger S.D. If the
global S.D. is less than 3.0, you are done. If the S.D. is eequal
qual to or greater than 3.0, the
tabletop must be replaced.
Note: Archive the air scans you have acquired and either e-mail or ship them
them to a
Note: If the customer is upgrading to the Body Composition
Composition Analysis option, you must
follow the procedure and meet the requirements in “Run Reproducibility Test” on
page 3-67.
3-67.
3.6 The Radiation Measurement Report

After installation, the field engineer must fill out the Radiation Measurement Report
(CSD-0042-F07) and keep this information on file.
3-70
Section 4
ALIGNMENT AND CALIBRATION
4.1 Check Table Alignment

To check the table alignment,
a lignment, perform the following procedure:
1. Using
Using a meas
measuri
uring
ng tape,
tape, and
and referr
referring
ing to
to Figure 4-1,
4-1, check the following:
• Dista
Distance
nce from
from the
the edge of
of the tabl
tablee to the
the back of
of both
both T-ra
T-rails
ils ((“A”
“A”
dimension).
• Distanc
Distancee betwe
betweenen the T-rails
-rails (f
(fron
rontt and
and rear).
rear).
• Gap from
from the
the edge
edge of
of the
the table
table brac
bracket
ket (left
(left side
side)) to the rail.
rail.
2. Recor
Record
d all
all the
the meas
measur
urem
ement
ents.
s.
3. Facing the
the front of the Discovery
Discovery,, gently push
push the foot
foot end (left
(left side)
side) of the table.
table.
The table should move away
aw ay from, and then back, to its original position.
4. Check the
the “A” dimensi
dimension
on and the
the bracket-to-g
bracket-to-guide
uide rail
rail gap again.
again. Compare
Compare them
them
to their original values.
5. If all the
the measurements
measurements are within
within specificat
specification,
ion, the
the table is properly
properly aligned.
aligned. If
the measurements are not within specification, go to the Aligning Table section
below.
4.2 Align the Table

After you have taken the measurements in the Checking Table Alignment section, use the
procedures below to align the table. Note that if both the “A” dimension and the bracket-
to-guide rail gap are out of specification, you should recheck the measurements after
performing the first adjustment.
4.2.1 Table Edge to T-Rail (“A” Dimension) Adjustment

To change the “A” dimension, do the following:
1. Remove the outer
outer and inner
inner covers
covers from the right
right pedestal.
pedestal.
2. Loosen the
the four bolts
bolts fasteni
fastening
ng the top
top of the pedestal
pedestal and
and the four bolts fastening
fastening
the bottom of the pedestal (see Figure 4-2).
4-2).
3. Adjust
Adjust the table
table so the “A” dimension
dimension is withi
within
n the specific
specification.
ation.
4. Tighten
Tighten the bolts
bolts and check
check the
the table
table alignmen
alignmentt again.
again.
If the alignment is within the specification, replace the pedestal covers. If you still note a
change in the “A” dimension, continue with the following steps.
4-1
+/- .06”
63.125”
FRONT & REAR
+/- .25”
“A” “A”
.25” +/- .09”
4-1. Table Alignment

Figure 4-1.
(Not drawn to scale)
Studs and
Adjustment Nuts
T-Rail
Upper Bracket
Pedestal Lower Bracket
Base Adjustment Bolts
4-2. Pedestal (covers removed)

Figure 4-2.
5. Make sure
sure the upper
upper and lower brackets
brackets are securely
securely fastened
fastened to the
the upper and
lower frames.
Note: Even if the brackets are secured to the frames, they may not be securely
fastened to the pedestal. If not, remove the table to access the screws that
4-2
secure the brackets to the pedestal.

pe destal. Refer to Remove Tabletop on page 3-9
for table removal procedures.
If the screws are loose, apply a small amount
amo unt of Loctite to the threads and tighten
the screws.
The upper and lower brackets are attached
attache d to the pedestal with four, 6mm flat-head
Allen screws. While the table is off, it is a good idea to remove the pedestal to
make sure that these screws are tight as well.
To change the “A” dimension, do the following:
6. Mount the
the pedestal
pedestal to the lower
lower frame.
frame. Do not tighten
tighten the bolts
bolts until
until the
the align-
align-
ment has been completed.
7. Install
Install the table
table and check
check its alignment
alignment.. Make the necessar
necessary
y adjust
adjustments
ments,, then
tighten the upper and lower bolts.
8. Install
Install the
the pedestal
pedestal covers that were removed
removed in Step
Step 1.
4.2.2 Front to Back T-Rail and Table Edge/Rail Gap Adjust-

ment
To adjust the front-to-back T-Rail dimensions and table edge-to-rail gap, perform the
following procedure:
1. Remove the outer
outer and inner
inner covers
covers from the left
left pedesta
pedestal.
l.
2. Loosen the
the four bolts
bolts fasteni
fastening
ng the top
top of the pedestal
pedestal and
and the four bolts fastening
fastening
the bottom of the pedestal.
Note: Before adjusting the distance between the
the rails, make sure the upper and
lower brackets are securely fastened to the pedestal. Refer to Steps 3 -5 of
the previous (Aligning Table) section and then go to the next step.
3. Adjust
Adjust the distance
distance between
between the T-rail
T-railss and the table
table edge-to-rail
edge-to-rail gap and tighten
tighten
the bolts.
4. Install
Install the
the pedestal
pedestal covers that were removed
removed in Step
Step 1.
4.3 C-Arm Parallelism Adjustment

1. Using a digita
digitall level and
and with the
the Tank
Tank cover removed,
removed, measure
measure the angle
angle across
the tank and from back to front on the Tank. Record the angles.
2. Remove the
the upper C-Arm covers and repeat
repeat the measurements
measurements on the upper
upper C-
Arm assembly. Again record the angles.
3. If the angles measured
measured on the tank
tank vary by more than 0.0
0.0 degrees from those
those
found on the C-Arm, do the following.
4. Rotate
Rotate the C-Arm
C-Arm until
until the
the center of
of gravity
gravity for
for the upper
upper C-Arm
C-Arm is over the
the
lower C-Arm (approximately 60 degrees rotated).
4-3
5. Loosen
Loosen eight
eight 1/4"
1/4" bolts
bolts (4 on
on each
each side)
side)..
6. Move the C-arm
C-arm until
until it is parall
parallel
el to the tank
tank using the
the digital
digital level to measure
measure
the angles.
4.4 X-Ray Beam Alignment

It is crucial that the X-ray beam be precisely
p recisely aligned with the detector array because
improper alignment will directly affect the repeatability (coefficient of variation, or CV)
of the Discovery. Therefore, this alignment must be verified at the time of installation or
whenever any work is performed that may affect it.
To check beam alignment:
WARNING:
ARNING: X-r
X-rays
ays aare
re bein
being
g genera
generated
ted duri
during
ng this
this proc
procedu
edure.
re. Keep
Keep han
hands,
ds, head
head and o
othe
therr bo
body
dy
parts out of beam.
Insert the alignment fixture (see the following three figures) into the detector opening.
Alignment Pins
Holding Clamps
4-3. X-Ray Alignment Fixture (TLS-00080)

Figure 4-3.
4-4
Detector Opening C-Arm
A C
Alignment Pin
Holding Clamp
Fixture
B, D
View from Front
Step A. Insert the left side of the Alignment Fixture into the left side of the
Detector Opening so that the vertical edges of the four Alignment
Pins are secure.
Step B. Compress the Holding Clamps.
Step C. Raise the right side of the Alignment Fixture into the Detector
Opening.
Step D. Release the Holding Clamps.
Note: If the Alignment Fixture is inserted with the Alignment Pins on the
right, the procedure works equally well.
4-4. Inserting The X-Ray Alignment Fixture

Figure 4-4.
4-5. The Alignment Fixture Properly Installed

Figure 4-5.
1. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
2.. Set Aperture to 10, Hi gain to 2, Lo gain to 1 and X-ray Mode to 3.
2
3. Place the
the Aperture
Aperture Alignment
Alignment Pin through
through the
the hole in
in the Aperture
Aperture Plate.
Plate. It
It
should drop straight through and into the alignment hole in the Filter Drum
Assembly base plate and be perpendicular
perp endicular to the Aperture Plate. If it is not per-
form steps 4 through 7. Otherwise, proceed to step 8.
4-5
4.. Hit the <Esc> key to return to the Discovery Main screen.
4
5. From
From the Dis
Discove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu scre
screen, selectt Utilities|Service Utili-
en, selec
ties|SQDRIVER.
6. At the CARM$$$$> prompt, type move_aper_rel +100 (to move the Aper-
6.
ture Plate right) or move_aper_rel –100 (to the move Aperture Plate left) until
the Alignment Pin is both vertical and perpendicular to the Aperture Plate. (Place
the block on the base plate next to the pin and compare the pin to the vertical sur-
face of the block to see if the pin is perpendicular).
7. Type exit <Enter> to return to the Discovery Main Screen.
7.
8. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
9. Do no
nott cha
chang hiss Aperture setting (set to 10), the Hi gain setting (set to 2), the
ngee tthi
Lo gain setting (set to 1) or the X-ray mode setting (set to 3).
For Display, click Graph/
10.. For
10
11.
11. Cl
Click X-ray (F2) to turn on x-rays.
ick
The correct
with display
alignment should
fixture show(approximately
installed a flat graph with
6.5anvolts
amplitude of aapproximately
pproximately
with alignment 5.5 volts
fixture removed).
If the beam alignment is not correct, perform the following beam alignment procedure.
4-6
To perform beam
b eam alignment:
1. Set the
the machin
machinee in the
the Center
Center Tabl
Tablee positi
position.
on.
Adjusting
Screws and
Jam Nuts
Filter Drum Base

Assembly (filter drum
assembly removed)
FRONT
4-6. Filter Drum Adjustments - Top View

Figure 4-6. View
2. At the Filter
Filter Drum
Drum assembly
assembly,, loosen the
the jam nuts
nuts and insert
insert Allen
Allen wrenches
wrenches (3/
32") in both Filter Drum Allen alignment screws. (Figure
( Figure 4-6 above shows the
locations of alignment screws and jam nuts.) Ensure that the Filter Drum is run-
ning.
3. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
4.. Set Hi gain to 2, Lo gain to 1 and X-ray mode to 3
4
5.
6. For Segment, click Air.
6.
7. Click X-ray (F2) to turn on x-rays.
7.
The next 5 steps adjust the beam
bea m side to side.
WARNING
ARNING:: The X-r
X-rays
ays are on.
on. Keep
Keep body
body part
partss out o
off th
thee be
beam.
am.
8.. Move the front Filter Drum alignment screw until the X-ray signal reaches max-
8
imum voltage.
should be clockwise
9.. Move the rear Filter Drum alignment screw until the X-ray signal reaches maxi-
9
mum voltage.
4-7

should be clockwise
10. Tighten the jam nuts on both Filter Drum alignment screws.
screws.
Note: The X-rays
X-rays should still
still show
show peak amplitude.
amplitude.
11. Turn
Turn off the X-rays using the <F2> key.
X-rays using
12. Remove the alignmen
alignmentt test fixture.
fixture.
X -A
-A l i n m e
enn t N ut
ut 4 x
A l i n m en
e n t S c re
re w
4-7. Array Assembly - T

Figure 4-7. Top
op View, Partial
The next six steps adjust the beam front to back.
13. At the Array assembly,
assembly, loosen the four X-alignment nuts (see Figure 4-7 above).
14. Turn
Turn on the X-rays
X-rays with
with the <F1> key.
For a Discovery A only, adjust the array X-alignment screw in one direction until
15. For
the trace drops off (the signal on the end detectors of the array will drop off).
Then, count the turns while moving it in the other direction until the trace falls
off on the detector on the other end of the array. Set the adjustment in the middle
by turning the screw back half the number of turns counted.
For Discovery C, Ci, W,
16.. For
16 W, Wi, and SL models, detectors 44 through 171 will be
turned on. You
You will have to exit this routine, remove the alignment pin, run the
Aperture Calibration procedure (Aperture Calibration cannot be run on Ci and
Wi), and then return to X-Ray Survey. When you enter X-Ray Survey do not
change this Aperture setting (set to 7), the Hi gain setting (set to 2), the Lo gain
setting (set to 1) or the X-ray mode setting (set to 3).
For Display, click Graph.
17.. For
17
18.. Cl
18 Click X-ray (F2) to turn x-rays on.
ick
4-8
19. Follow the procedure in in step 3 while checking detectors number 44 and 171 to
check for the fall off of x-rays.
20. Tighten
Tighten the four array
array X-alignment
X-alignment nuts.
nuts.
21.. Cl
21 Click X-ray (F2) to turn x-rays off.
ick
22. Remove the

the block and pin (Discovery
(Discovery A Only).
Only).
23.. Cl
23 Click Close to exit X-Ray Survey.
ick
24. Reboot the PC to return to the Discovery software.
4.5 Aperture Calibration

Note: Aperture Calibration cannot be run on Ci and Wi)
This procedure locates the exact starting positions of each aperture (slit) in motor steps
and the center of each slit.
1.. Cent
1 Center
er the
the tabl
table.
e.
2. From
From the Dis
Discove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
select
ties|SQDRIVER.
3. At the CARM$$$$> prompt type CALIBRATE<Enter> (Note that this proce-
3.
dure takes approximately 2 – 3 minutes to start and 10 minutes to complete).
4-9
4.6 Motor Calibration

The SQDRIVER program provides a CALIBRATE command for each of the motors (AY,
AR, TY, TX, and TZ) to calibrate the encoder readback and determine the limits of
motion.
Use the following table to determine which calibration procedures you need
nee d to perform on
a given Discovery model.
Perform the calibration procedures if
indicated (*) in order from left to
right.
Model TZ AY TY TX AR
A * * * * *
SL * * N/A * *
W N/A * * * N/A
Wi N/A * * * N/A
C N/A * N/A * N/A
Ci N/A * N/A * N.A
Each motor (except TZ) requires the corresponding protocol calibration file in the
PROTOCOL sub-directory (e.g., for MOTOR$AY
MOTOR$AY, the calibration protocol is
MOTOR_AY.PRO).
1. From
From the Dis
Discove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
select
ties|SQDRIVER (you must be in Service Mode).
2. At the CARM$$$$> prompt, type MOTOR$XX<Enter>, where XX equals TZ,
2.
AY, TY, TX, or AR depending on which motor you are calibrating.
4.6.0.1 MOTOR$TZ (Discovery A and SL only)

1. Select
Select the
the TZ moto
motorr device
device driv
driver
er by typing: MOTOR$TZ<Enter>.
typing:
2. At the MOTOR$TZ> prompt, type: CALIBRATE<Enter> .
2.
The program sends the calibration command to the TZ microprocessor and waits
twenty seconds for table motion to complete. During this time, the TZ
microprocessor moves the table pedestals to their top mechanical limit and then
back down to their lower mechanical limit. You are then asked the following:
Mark the current height of the table and press the <Enter>
key to move the table to the topmost position. Then measure
the distance that the table moved in centimeters.
3. Measure
Measure the distance
distance moved
moved using
using the bottom
bottom edge
edge of the
the top pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and
the floor. The system displays:
Total Distance Moved By Pedestal [20.0 cm]?
4-10
Type xx.x<Enter> where xx.x = the distance you measured. It should be

20.0 cm (7 inch). If the distance is not 20.0 cm, type the actual measurement.
The distance measurement affects system results.
4. Press <Enter>. The system then displays the following:
4.
Are Sure Total
Total Distance Moved By Pedestal Is xx.x cm. [Y/N]?
The xx.x equals the measurement you typed in above. If you type N, the system
redisplays the second message and you should retype the distance you measured.
If you typed Y, the system displays the following:
5. Type Y<Enter>.
5.
The SQDRIVER program then reads the calibration parameters from the TZ
microprocessor and prompts:
set_table_calibration=368,3227,382,3237

page 4-11.
4-11.
6. If the position
position limits
limits are within
within specifi
specification
s, Type
ibration values.
n ot within specifications, Type N<Enter> and adjust
If the position limits are not
the Linear Rotary String (Encoder). See Adjustment on page 5-15 for details.
7. Calibrate
Calibrate the
the TZ motor
motor lower left and
and lower right encoder posit
positions
ions to
to a range of
250 - 300 and a difference of no more than + 5 between the two enc
encoders.
oders. Setting
the TZ encoders to a number outside this range may introduce other errors.
Unlike the encoders for the table and arm motions, the encoders for TZ are not
adjustable in real time. You
You must make a trial adjustment and then rerun the cali-
bration to update the values on the display screen.
The measured distance traveled for motor TZ must be very accurate as well. The
distance traveled should be 20.0 cm
c m +0.1 cm. Always use this specification
whenever performing TZ motor calibrations.
Report any systems that do not conform to the TZ specifications to Techni-
cal Support.

The four values for set_table_calibration are, respectively, the left pedestal lower and
a nd
upper encoder limits and the right pedestal lower and upper en
encoder
coder limits. The two lower
4-11
limits should be close to each other, as should the two upper

up per limits. The eight
calibrate_position fields are:
1) 10 (Tolerance). The ± position tolerance, in encoder ticks, for absolute moves.
Although the TZ microprocessor
microproce ssor does its own absolute moves, not the AT device
driver, this field
field is used by state machine programs to determine whether the TZ
position is within tolerance and should be ten (10).

corresponding to the step distance in microns. These two fields are only used for
stepping motors, not for the DC table motors, and should always be 1000,1000.
4,5) 819,50000 (NumberOfTicks,T
ickDistance). The number ofo f encoder ticks
corresponding to the tick distance in microns. The table encoder calibration is fixed
and should always be 819 encoder counts per 50,000 microns.
origin of motion. The origin of TZ motion is the lower
lowe r right pedestal, so this field
should be the same as the third field in the set_table_calibration line (above).
7,8) 500,3494 (NegLimit,PosLimit). The encoder readings for the negative (downward)
and positive (upward) mechanical stops. In normal operation,
o peration, the TZ microprocessor
uses the right pedestal readings for closed loop control so these two fields should be
the same as the last two fields in the set_table_calibration line (above).
in the positive and negative direction
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [TzMotor] section of the
SQDRIVER.INI file determine the motion
mo tion limits relative to the mechanical stops. If
4.6.0.2 MOTOR$AY
If you have to replace the encoder, before beginning this procedure, loosen the set screws
that secure the encoder coupling
co upling to the pulley shaft.
1. Select
Select the
the AY
AY motor
motor device
device driv
driver
er by typing: MOTOR$AY<Enter>
typing:
2. At the MOTOR$AY> prompt in SQDRIVER, type: CALIBRATE<Enter>
2.
Press <Enter> when the AY motor reaches the LEFT mechanical limit.
3. The program
program moves the AY AY motor to
to the left.
left. When AY
AY hits the
the left mechanic
mechanical
al
4. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 3750±
3750±5.
5. Adjust
Adjust if necessa
necessary
ry..
4-12

coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
5. Repeat the
the calibration
procedure above
above but now,
now, when AY
AY hits the
the left mechani-
mechani-
The program then starts AY

AY moving to the right and prompts:
Press <Enter> when the AY motor reaches the RIGHT mechanical limit.
6. When
When AY
AY hits
hits the right
right mechan
mechanica
icall stop, press <Enter>.
stop, press
The program then switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs
Distance calibration grid. It steps the AY
AY motor to the left in one inch
increments until the motor hits the left mechanical stop, and then steps
the AY
AY motor to the right in one inch
in ch increments until the motor hits the
right mechanical stop. The program plots the encoder data during the
scan (in raw encoder units,
un its, 0-4095).
each
ch other.
4-13
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [AyMotor] section
limits are set to the mechanical limits).
change s the plot title to PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
The program then changes
motor_direction=1

page 4-11.
4-11.
4-14
8. If the position
position limits
limits are within
within specifi
specification
s, Type
ibration values.

This value is set from the corresponding parameter in the MOTOR_AY
MOTOR_AY.PRO file and is a
stepper motor).
calibrate_position field in the MOTOR_AY.PRO file.
corresponding to the step distance in microns. The ratio of these two numbers
determines the step size (41187/2288 ≅ 18 microns). The calibration program sets
these fields to the values found in the corresponding calibrate_position fields in
the MOTOR_AY
MOTOR_AY.PRO file. Since Sinc e these values are a property of the mechanical
mec hanical
design of the system, they should never change.
enc oder ticks
corresponding to the tick distance in microns. Again, it is the ratio of these two
numbers (61339/209 ≅ 293 microns) that determines the encoder calibration.
These numbers will generally change from calibration to calibration (although the
ratio should remain approximately the same).
origin of motion. The origin of AY
AY motion is the extreme right mechanical stop, so
this value should be the same as
a s the first field below.
below.
7,8) 363,3719 (NegLimit,PosLimit). The encoder readings for the negative (right) and
positive (left) mechanical stops.
in the positive and negative direction.
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [AyMotor] section of the
SQDRIVER.INI file determine the motion limits relative to the mechanical stops.
If these entries are not present, or are zero, the motion limits are set to the
mechanical limits, as in the above example).
Note: The last calibration scan data is
is saved in the file
file MOTOR_AY
MOTOR_AY.DAT
.DAT. You
You can
reanalyze the data–e.g., after editing SQDRIVER.INI by typing the command
CALIBRATE @MOTOR_AY.DAT at the MOTOR$AY> prompt in SQDRIVER.
4-15
4.6.0.3 MOTOR$TY (A, W and Wi models only)

If you have replaced the TY Encoder, before beginning this procedure, loosen the set
screws that secure the encoder coupling
cou pling to the pulley shaft. If you are pe
performing
rforming the
initial installation of the instrument, this is unnecessary
un necessary..
1. Select
Select the
the TY motor
motor devic
devicee driver
driver by typing:: MOTOR$TY<Enter>
by typing
2. At the MOTOR$TY> prompt in SQDRIVER, type: CALIBRATE<Enter >
2.
The program starts TY moving to the left and prompts:
Press <Enter> when the TY motor reaches the LEFT mecha
mechanical
nical limit.
3. The program
program moves
moves the TY
TY motor
motor to the
the left.
left. When TY
TY hits the left
left mechanical
mechanical
4. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 3750±
3750±5.
5. Adjust
Adjust if necessa
necessary
ry..
coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
5. Repeat the
the calibration
procedure above
above but now,
now, when TY hits
hits the left
left mechani-
mechani-
The program then starts TY moving to the right and prompts:
Press <Enter> when the TY motor reaches the RIGHT mechanical limit.
When TY hits the right mechanical stop, press <Enter>. The program then
switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs Distance calibration grid. It
steps the TY motor to the left in one inch increments until the motor hits the left
mechanical stop, and then steps the TY motor to the right in one inch increments
until the motor hits the right mechanical stop. The program plots the encoder
data during the scan (in raw encoder units, 0-4095).
4-16
each
ch other.
both the positive and negative motion. The linear fir parameters are displayed at
each
ch other.
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [TyMotor] section
mechanical stops. If these entries are not present, or are
a re zero, the motion
6. The prog
program
ram then
then changes
changes the plot
plot title to PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE .
title to
Press the <Enter> key and the program prompts.
motor_direction=0
4-17
Note: The last calibration scan data is saved in the file MOTOR_TY.DA
MOTOR_TY.DAT T. You
You
command CALIBRATE @MOTOR_T @MOTOR_TY Y.DAT at the MOTOR$TY>
prompt in SQDRIVER.
4.6.0.4 MOTOR$TX
If you have replaced the encoder, before beginning this procedure, loosen the set screws
that secure the encoder coupling to the pulley shaft and make sure that the tank assembly
is not under the operator console. For normal installations, this is unnecessary.
1. Select
Select the
the TX motor
motor devic
devicee driver
driver by typing:: MOTOR$TX<Enter>
by typing
2. At the
the MOTOR$
MOTOR$TX>
TX> promp
promptt in SQDRI
SQDRIVER type: CALIBRATE<Enter>
VER,, type:
The program prompts:.
The program moves the TY (W only) and AY

AY motors to their center positions
and prompts:.
Use the Table
The above message is always displayed when calibrating MOTOR$TX. This is

the normal message for a QDR-4500. The message was not changed for DIS-
COVERY systems.
3. Press <Enter> and the program prompts:
3.
Press <Enter> when the TX motor reaches the OUTER mechanical limit.
4. The program
program moves
moves the TX
TX motor
motor to the
the left.
left. When TX
TX hits the left
left mechanical
mechanical
5. Check the
the position
position value.
value. It must
must be 1000±
1000±5.
5. Adjust
Adjust if necessa
necessary
ry..
coupling setscrew.
setscrew.
6. Repeat the
the calibration
procedure above
above but now,
now, when AY
AY hits the
the left mechani-
mechani-
The program switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs Distance cal-
ibration grid. It steps the TX motor in by 1" increments
incre ments until the inner mechani-
cal stop is
encoder hit. The
units, program plots the encoder
0-4095). encode r data during the scan (in raw
7. Press <Esc> at anytime during the scan to terminate the calibration procedure.
4-18
When the calibration completes, the program computes

comp utes the linear fit for both the
positive and negative motion. The line for parameters are displayed at the top left
and top right of the plot in the form Y = Intercept + Slope * X. The two slopes
(87.0 and 86.9 in the example below) should be within 0.3 o off each other.
NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [TxMotor] section
The program then changes the plot title to PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
8. Press the <Enter> key and the program prompts:
motor_direction=1
The motor_direction, calibrate_position, pos_limit_position and

neg_limit_position fields have the same interpretation as discussed under
MOTOR$AY.
4-19
Note: The last calibration scan data is saved in the file MOT
MOTOR_TX.DA
OR_TX.DAT T. You
You
command CALIBRATE @MOTOR_TX.DAT at the MOTOR$TX>
prompt in SQDRIVER.
4.6.0.5 MOTOR$AR (Discovery A and SL)

If you have replaced the encoder, before beginning this procedure, loosen the set screws
that secure the encoder coupling
c oupling to the pulley shaft. If this is an initial installation, this is
unnecessary.
1. Confirm
Confirm that the
the table
table is level front-
front-to-bac
to-back.
k. Do this by removing
removing the table
table pad.
Place the digital level on the table at the foot end and read the value on the level.
It must be 0º degrees ±0.0º degrees. Move the level to the head of the table. Con-
firm that the level is still at 0.0º degrees. Adjust the leveling feet as necessary to
obtain this result. Failure to perform this step will result in positioning toler-
ance errors on whole body, lateral, and IVA IVA scans.
2. Select
Select the
the AR motor
motor devic
devicee driver
driver by typing:: MOTOR$AR<Enter>
by typing
MOTOR$AR>
3.
3. At the prompt, type: CALIBRATE<Enter>
The program moves the TY and AY AY motors to their center positions, then moves
the TZ motor to its topmost position and prompts:
Use the Table
4. Remove
Remove the C-arm
C-arm Tank cover
cover.
5. Place the
the digital
digital level on the top of the tank assembly (not on the top of the C-
tank assembly
arm)) and use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm
arm
until it is 0º ±0.0º
6.. Remo
6 Remove
ve the
the leve
levell.
7. Press <Enter>.
7.
4-20
The program moves the TZ table to its top most position and moves the TX table
inwards until it almost touches the C-arm. It rotates the C-arm by 2 degrees to
obtain an initial estimate of the encoder calibration and then prompts:
Press <Enter> when the AR motor reaches the AP mechanical limit.
8. The program
program rotates
rotates the
the C-arm counter
counter clockwise
clockwise (i.e.,
(i.e., the tank
tank assembly
assembly moves
moves
away from the front of the machine). When the C-arm hits the AP mechanical
limit the first time, press <ESC>.Check the position value. It must be 250±5.
Adjust if necessary.
until the readback is 250±5 (i.e., in the range 245-255) and then tighten the cou-
pling setscrew.
9. Before
Before repeating
repeating the
the calibration
calibration procedur
procedure,
e, rotate
rotate the C-arm
C-arm back
back to approxi-
approxi-
mately 0º by:
Typing the command: MOVE_REL 1470<Enter>.
10. Repeat the calibration procedure above but now,
now, when A
AY
Y hits the left mechani-
Press <ESC> to stop calibration. Press <Enter> when the AR motor reaches the AP
mechanical limit.
Wait until the rotation completes and then repeat

repe at the calibration procedure above
but now, when the C-arm hits the AP mechanical stop,
Presss <Enter>
11. Pres
prompts:
Use the Table
0º ±0.1º. Remove the level, wait until the rotation completes, and then repeat the
calibration procedure above but now, when the C-arm hits the AP mechanical
stop,
Presss <Enter>
12. Pres
4-21

4-22

prompts:
Use the Table IN / OUT switch to move the C-Arm to 0 degrees.

0º ±0.1º. Remove the level and then
Presss <ENTER>
13. Pres
and moves
mately 83°.the C-arm
It then and the
changes theX-table
prompttogether
to: until the C-arm is at approxi-
Press <Enter> when the AR motor reaches the LATERAL mechanical

limit.
and begins rotating the C-arm clockwise (i.e., the tank assembly moves toward
the front of the machine). When the C-arm hits the LA
LATERAL
TERAL mechanical limit,
Presss <ENTER>
14. Pres
prompts:
Use the Table
15. Place the digital level on top of the X-ray tank assembly
assembly and use the Table
Table IN/
OUT switch on the operator panel
pa nel to move the C-arm until it is at 83 °±0.1º (do
not make this measurement with the cosmetic covering
cove ring on the tank assembly).
16. Remove the
the level and then press <Enter>
then press
4-23
and moves the C-arm and the X-table back to their initial 0 ° positions.
The program then switches to graphics mode and draws the Encoder Vs. Angle
calibration grid. It steps the AR motor clockwise in 1 ° increments until the motor
reaches the 83° position and then steps the AR motor counter clockwise in 1 °
increments until the motor return to approximately 0 °. The program plots the
encoder data during the scan (in raw encoder units, 0-4095).
Note: Press <ESC> anytime during the scan to abort the calibration procedure.
ress
When the calibration scan completes, the program computes the linear fits to the
positive and negative rotation. The linear fit parameters are displayed at the top
left and top right of the plot in the form Y = Intercept + Slope
S lope * X. The two slope
values should be within 0.1 of eacheac h other.
The program displays the positive and negative limits as horizontal dashed lines
Note: The PosLimitOffset and NegLimitOff
NegLimitOffset
set entries in the [ArMotor] section
The program then changes the plot title to:

PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
4-24

17. Press
motor_direction=0
neg_limit_position=-1395
page 4-25.
4-25.
ype Y<Enter> to accept the calibration values or N<Enter> to reject them.
18.. Type
18
19. Exit SQDRIVER
SQDRIVER by typing exit
exit and clicking Retu
Return.
rn.

This value is set from the corresponding parameter in the MOTOR_AR.PRO file and is a
stepper motor).
calibrate_position field in the MOTOR_AR.PRO file.
corresponding to the step distance in minutes of rotation. The ratio of these two
numbers determines the step size. The calibration program calculates these fields
based on the measurements of the 0° and 83° positions.
enc oder ticks
corresponding to the tick distance in minutes of rotation.
ro tation. Again, it is the ratio of
these two numbers that determines the encoder calibration. These numbers will
generally change from calibration to calibration (although the ratio should remain
approximately the same).
origin of motion. The origin of AR motion is the 0° position, so this value is the
encoder reading at 0°.
7,8) 265,3831 (NegLimit,PosLimit). The encoder readings for the negative (counter
clockwise, or AP) and positive (clockwise, or LATERAL)
LATERAL) mechanical stops.
The pos_limit_position and the neg_limit_position are the limits of motion, in minutes
of rotation, in the clockwise and the counter clockwise direction
4-25

NegLimitOffset
fset entries in the [ArMotor] section of the
Note: The last
last calibr
calibration
ation scan data
data is
is saved file MOTOR_AR.DAT. You can re
saved in the file
analyze the data–e.g., after editing SQDRIVER.INI –by typing the command
CALIBRATE @MOTOR_AR.DAT<Enter> at the MOTOR$AR> prompt in
SQDRIVER.
4.7 Laser Positioning Offset Adjustment

The laser of the Discovery is used to correctly
co rrectly position the C-Arm over the patient.
Improper adjustment can cause improper detector flattening and may force the operator to
reposition the scan more frequently than necessary.
1. Center the
the table, turn
turn on the laser
laser,, and set the point
point of a sharp
sharp metallic
metallic object
object on
the crosshair
2. At the
the QDR
QDR Main
Main Menu
Menu screen click the Perform Exam button, create a test
screen,, click
patient biography, and select AP Lumbar as the scan type. (DO NOT use the
spine phantom biography as a patient.) Uncheck the Use Default Scan Mode
check box and click Next. Select Array Mode and click Next.
3. Click the Start Scan button.
3.
4. After scan starts
starts and you
you can see the metallic object, click the Reposition
metallic object,
Scan button.
5. Using the
the mouse,
mouse, move thethe image so that the tip
tip of the metallic
metallic object
object is in the
horizontal center of the scan area and touching the bottom edge of the scan area.
6. Click the Restart Scan button and let the arm
6. a rm reposition.
7. At the Start Scan screen, click the Cancel button.
7.
8. Turn
urn on
on the
the lase
laserr.
9. Locate the
the 3 laser adjust
adjustment
ment screws
screws (small
(small Phillips
Phillips)) under the
the C-arm.
C-arm. Adjust
these screws to tilt the assembly until the laser crosshair is on the tip of the
pointed object.
10. Run another
another scan to check your
your adjustments.
adjustments.
4.8 A/D Gain Control Adjustment

An A/D gain adjustment potentiometer ensures that all systems have the same input to the
A/D converter regardless of slight variations in X-ray flux. The location of the
potentiometer depends on the system configuration:
• On system
systemss with
with a separate
Converter board,
board, the adjust
adjustment
ment is the
the only
only potenti-
potenti-
ometer on the A/D Converter board.
4-26
• On system
systemss without
without a separate
Converter board,
board, the adjust
adjustment
ment is the
the only
only poten-
poten-
tiometer on the X-Ray Detector assembly.
Caution:Any adjustment of this potentiometer affects the QC highs and lows. You must
run detector flattening after adjusting the A/D gain. DO NOT ADJUST THE A/
D GAIN UNLESS ABSOLUTELY
ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY AS DEFINED BY “Check
and Verify
4-27.
4.8.1 Check and Verify the A/D Gain
1. Instal
Installl all syst
system
em covers
covers that
that are
are normal
normally
ly in the
the X-ray
X-ray beam
beam..
2. In
Inst
stal
alll the
the tab
table
le pad
pad ont
onto
o the
the tabl
table.
e.
3. Start
Start the QDR/AP
QDR/APEX
EX soft
softwar
waree in Servic
Servicee mode.
mode.
4. On the
the QDR
QDR/A
/APEX
PEX main
main scr
screen
een,, select Utilities|Service Utilities|X-Ray
select
Survey.
5. Set Pulse to 1, press <ALT><P>.
6. Set
a. Hi Gains to 2.
b. Lo Gains to 1.
c. X-ray Mo to 3.
Mode to
d. o 7.
Aperture tto
5. Press <Enter>.
6. Displa
Display
y the X-Ra
X-Ray
y Survey
Survey bar
bar graph,
graph, pres
presss <Ctrl>
<Ctrl><Pag
<Pagee Down>.
Down>.
7. Obse
Observ
rvee Hi Air
Air, pre
press
ss <Alt
<Alt><
><S>
S>..
8. Turn
urn on
on X-ra
X-rays
ys,, p
pre
ress
ss <F1>
<F1>..
9. Verify that the average
average X-ray
X-ray signal
signal level is 6.25V
6.25V and that all
all detectors
detectors are
within the 4.5V to 8.5V range. If these conditions are met, the procedure is com-
plete. Do not adjust the A/D gain.
If these conditions are not met, continue to “Adjust the A/D Gain” on page 4-27
4-27..
4.8.2 Adjust the A/D Gain

Caution:Do not adjust the A/D gain unless absolutely
a bsolutely necessary as defined by “Check
and Verify
1. Adjust
Adjust the A/D gain
gain potentiom
potentiometer
eter to achieve
achieve an average
average X-ray
X-ray signal of
of 6.25V.
6.25V.
2. Check that
that all detectors
detectors are
are within
within a range of
of 4.5V to
to 8.5V.
8.5V.
3. Perform
Perform the
the Detecto
Detectorr Flatteni
Flattening
ng procedure
procedure described
described in
in “Detector Flattening ” on
page 4-29.
4-29.
4-27
4.9 Filter Drum Encoder Alignment

1. Attach Ch1 probe
probe to
to SEGMENT
SEGMENT test
test point (TP3) on the
the C-Arm
C-Arm Interf
Interface
ace board.
board.
2. Attach Ch2 probe
probe to BRASS test point (TP2) on the
the C-Arm
C-Arm Interface
Interface board.
board.
3. Conn
Connec
ectt pr
prob
obee to grou
ground
nd..
4. Go to X-Ra
X-Ray
y Survey
Survey and
and turn
turn on
on the Filter
Filter D
Drum
rum motor
motor..
5. As the
the filter
filter drum
drum motor
motor turns
turns on and rotates
rotates look on
on the C-Arm Interface
Interface board.
board.
a. The yellow
yellow “Index”
“Index” LED blinks
blinks (on then
then off)
off) as the
the Index mark passes
passes the
optical interrupter.
interrupter.
b. Verify the
the green “Top
“Top of Drum”
Drum” and “Brass
“Brass on Top”
Top” LED (D8)
(D8) blink
blink as the
drum spins.
c. The green
green “AC Lock”
Lock” LED
LED (D7) lights
lights (steady
(steady,, not blinki
blinking)
ng) after
after a few
few rev-
olutions of the drum.
6. Measure
Measure from
from the
the rising
rising edge
edge of the BRASS
BRASS to the
the rising
rising edge of the SEGMENT
SEGMENT
(it does not matter which edge leads).
lead s). The time measured must be less than 500
µs (500 µs = 0.5 ms). See Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9.
4-9.
Segment
Signal
Jigger Brass
Signal
500μs
Figure 4-8 Trigger on CH1

4-28
Brass
Jigger Signal
Segment
Signal
500μs
4.10 Detector Flattening

WARNING:
ARNING: X-rays
X-rays are bein
being
g gener
generate
ated
d during
during tthis
his proced
procedure
ure.. Keep
Keep han
hands,
ds, head
head aand
nd ot
other
her bod
body
y
parts out of beam.
This procedure flattens the X-ray beam for each scan mode and finds the metal edge of the
table.
Note: All covers,
covers, table
table mat, etc.,
etc., normally
normally in the
the X-ray path,
path, MUST be
be on the Scanner
Scanner
before running Beam Flattening.
1. Restart
Restart the Discov
Discovery
ery software
software in service
service mode (if
(if not already).
already). Press the Center
Press the
Table button and turn on the laser.
2. If you are
are using an Anthropomo
Anthropomorphic
rphic Spine
Spine Phantom
Phantom (resem
(resembles
bles vertebra
vertebrall bod-
ies, Part Number 030-1967), place the phantom on end (vertical) with the spinal
processes pointing towards the head end of the table. The laser crosshair should
be 1.5ifinch
hole, not,in from
use the left end and centered. (Some phantoms will have a target
a ruler).
If you are using a DXA Quality Control Phantom (aluminum representation of
vertebral bodies, Part Number ASY-01564),
ASY-01564), place the phantom on its end
e nd with
the flattening target facing up. Orient the phantom so the metal edge is to the
right (head end) and tissue to the left (foot end) as viewed from the front of the
table. Align the phantom
ph antom flattening target to the la
laser
ser crosshair.
crosshair.
3. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
selecting Utilities/Service Utilities/X-Ray
ting
4.. Set Pulse to 1, High gain to 2, Low gain to 1, X-ray Mode to 3 and Aperture to
4
7.

5.
6.
4-29
7. Check that
that phantom
phantom covers
covers the whole
whole beam. This
This is critical.
critical. If
If phantom
phantom does not
cover the whole beam, move it until it does. Keep the phantom as straight as pos-
sible.
8. Turn
urn off
off X-r
X-ray
ayss wit
with the <F2> key and press <Esc> to exit X-Ray Survey.
h the Surv ey.
Reboot the PC, logon asa s Field Service, and restart the software in Service Mode
to return to Discovery Main Menu screen.
9.. Select Utilities|Service Utilities|Detector Flattening. Click the Continue
9
button. This procedure can takes about 10 minutes on a C or W model and 50
minutes on an A or SL.
10. When flattening is complete, run
run a QC scan and cancel adding it to the QC plot.
11. Use the Scan File Plot utility to check X-ray beam flatness of the QC scan
scan per-
formed in Step 10.
4.11 Lateral Alignment Test (QDR 4500A and

SL)
This procedure applies to A and SL systems only.
only. Use this procedure to verify lateral
alignment.
This procedure verifies lateral alignment.
1. On the control
control panel press
press Center
Center to move the
the table
table and C-Arm
C-Arm to the
the center
position.
2. On the control
control panel press
press Laser
Laser on the
the control
control panel
panel to turn
turn the laser
laser light
light on.
3. Place the spine
spine phantom
table top with
with its
its laser target
target towar
towards
ds the left
left (foot
end) and the vertebrae to the right (head end).
4. Align the
the phantom
phantom so that the
the laser crossh
crosshair
air is on the
the phantom
phantom laster
laster target.
target.
Using the laser as a guide, adjust the phantom to be parallel to the table edges
(just like when performing a QC scan).
5. On the APEX/
APEX/QDR
QDR main
main scree
screen,
n, select
select Perfo
Perform
rm Exam.
Exam.
6. Create
Create a ttest
est patien
patientt biogr
biography
aphy..
7. Select
Select OK
OK at pati
patient
ent Conf
Confirm
irmati
ation
on Screen
Screen..
8. On the Select
Select Scan Type
Type screen
screen select AP/Lateral
AP/Lateral Pair
Pair. Uncheck
Uncheck Use Default
Default
Scan Mode and click Next.
9. Select
Select Arra
Array
y and
and clic
click
k next
next..
10. On the Select Lateral Scan Mode screen
screen select Array and click Next.
11. Verify the alignment of the
the spine phantom to the laser.
laser.
12. Change Scan Length to 6.0 inches and click Start

Start Scan to perform tthe
he AP scan.
13. When scan has finished,
finished, select Spine as the analysis method, and click Next.
4-30
14. Analyze the scan, and click Start

Start Position. At the bottom of screen verify that
that the
centerline angle is + 2 degrees.
de grees. If OK, go to the next
ne xt step. If not OK, restart the
procedure (go back to Step 1), being careful to align
a lign the phantom properly to the
laser.
15. If you are using an Anthropomorphic Spine Phantom (looks like actual bones,
Part Number 030-1967), skip this step.
If you are using a DXA Quality Control Phantom (does not look like actual bones,
Part Number ASY-01564),
ASY-01564), place 2 sheets
shee ts of paper along the left and right edges of
the phantom as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10.
Next, rotate the phantom “bone” segments towards the front of the scanner as
shown in Figure 4-11. Be careful to keep the phantom left and right edges parallel
to the sheets of paper.
4-31
Figure 4-11.
16. Click close, and then hold the Enable Lateral switch on the control panel to
to move
the system to the lateral position.
17. Click Start
Start Scan to perform
perform the lateral
lateral scan.
18. When the scan has finished, press and hold the Enable Lateral sswitch
witch to return
the system to AP position.
19. Analyze theClose.

done, click lateral scan (refer
(refer to User Guide for instructions if necessary).
necessary). When
20. At the Exit Analysis screen select Report. Print a report of the procedure just per-
formed, and include the report in the paperwork being returned to Hologic.
4.12 Table
Table Top Radiograph
Rad iographic
ic Uni
Uniformity
formity
This procedure verifies proper X-ray beam alignment (for Discovery A and W):
1. Restart
Restart the Discover
Discovery
y software
software in
in service
service mode (if
(if not already).
already).
2. Type WBAIRQC in the Patient Biography. Enter the serial number of the unit
un it in
the Patient ID field.
Make sure that only the pad is on the table. Clear the table o
off anything else.
4-32
3. Perfo
Perform
rm one
one Who
Whole Body air scan (a scan with nothing on
le Body o n the table). Do NOT
interrupt the scan for any reason. Select Exit Exam when complete. Do not ana-
lyze the scan you just performed.
4. From the Disc
Discover
overy
y Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
select
ties|Table
ties|Table Top Radiographic Uniformity.
5. Select
Select the Whole
Whole Body
Body scan
scan and
and click
click the Next> button.
6. Table Top
Top Radiographic
Radiographic Uniformit
Uniformity
y results
results tabs are now display
displayed.
ed. Select the
the
Low Air Tab.
7. If the Global Stats S.D. (2) is less than 2.0, the instrument is properly
aligned. Print a copy of the test results and include it with the other paperwork
If the Global Stats S.D. is greater than or equal to 2.0 , then the machine is not aligned
properly.. Check the following:
properly
• If the
the image
image appears
appears "streaky"
"streaky" or "banded",
"banded", check for
for loose
loose wires or other
other debris
debris
between the table and the tank.
• Check the “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9 4-9..
• Chec
Check k AC Line
Line vo
volt
ltag
age.
e.
• Chec
Check k +/
+/- 15V
15V Power
ower Supp
Supplly
• Check “Detector Flattening ” on page 4-29.
4-29.
• Re-r
Re-run
un da (see the Discovery User's Guide).
daiily QC (s Guide).
After realignment, repeat the Table Top
Top Radiographic Uniformity test. If the global S.D. is
less than 2.0, print a copy of the test results and include it with the other paperwork being
returned to Hologic.
If the global S.D. if equal or greater than 2.0, the non-uniformity may be attributed to the
table itself. If so, continue with this procedure. Make sure that the machine has body
composition loaded. If it does, then follow the appropriate procedure in 4.12.1 or 4.12.2.
4.12.2.
4.12.1 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA)

Instrument performing BCA must have a global S.D. of less than 2.0. If the realignment
and recalibration procedures above have been performed and an S.D. of less than 2.0
cannot be obtained, then the tabletop must be replaced.
Note: Archive
Archive the airscan
airscanss you have
have acquired
acquired and either
either e-mail
e-mail or FEDEX them
them to a
4.12.2 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis

Instruments using only BMD Whole Body measurements can tolerate a larger S.D. If the
global S.D. is less than 3.0, then you are done. If the S.D. is equal or greater then 3.0, then
the tabletop must be replaced.
Note: Archive
Archive the airscan
airscanss you have
have acquired
acquired and either
either e-mail
e-mail or FEDEX them
them to a
4-33
Note: If the customer

customer is
is upgrading
upgrading to the
the Body Compositi
Composition
on Analysis
Analysis option,
option, you must
must
follow the procedure and meet the requirements in 4.12.1.
4.12.1.
4.13 Check Phantom values

1. ties|Field
From
From the Dis
DService
iscove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
scr
Calibration . een, sele
select
ct Utilities|Service Utili-
2. Click the Number button.

2.
3. Compare
Compare values displayed
displayed with
with actual values print
printed
ed on the phantom.
phantom. If there
there is a
discrepancy, check to make sure you have the phantom that shipped with the unit.
Check with Hologic Technical Support if needed.
4.14 Area, BMD, and BMC Calibration

Calibration for Area, BMD, and BMC is accomplished in 3 stages:
a. Array
Array Scan
Scan Thick
Thicknes
nesss Meas
Measure
uremen
mentt & Calibr
Calibrati
ation
on
b. Calibr
Calibrati
ation
on of
of Area
Area and BMC for Array
Array Scan
Scan Modes
Modes
c. Addi
Adding
ng Arr
Array
ay AP
AP scan
scanss tto
o tthe
he QC
QC data
databas
basee
Follow the procedure, in order, and exactly as shown, for each stage of the calibration.
ca libration.
Note: If the Discover
Discovery
y being install
installed
ed is to replace
replace an existing
existing QDR (model 2000plus
QDR (model plus,,
2000, 1500, 1000plus
plus,, 1000 or 1000/W), then a cross-calibration must first be
performed to ensure that any longitudinal studies begun on the QDR being
c ontinued on the new Discovery. Perform the cross-
removed can safely be continued
calibration before de-installing the existing QDR. (Refer to QDR 1000-4500
Upgrade Procedure, 080-0767 for complete instructions.)
4-34
Note: To ensure stabilit

stability
y, the instrument
instrument must be completel
completely y powered up for a minimum
minimum
of 30 minutes prior to running any of the following tests. Also, because the
tabletop pad will have a slight affect on the test results, all scans must be
performed with it in place.
WARNING:
ARNING: X-rays
X-rays aare
re produ
produced
ced d
duri
uring
ng most
most of thes
thesee tes
tests
ts.. Keep h
hand
ands,
s, head
head an
and
d oth
other
er bo
body
dy parts
parts
out of the X-ray

dosimetry badge.beam path. The tester should also be wearing an approved radiation
4.14.1 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (C and

W)
1. Press
Press the Center
Center Table button
button..
2. Turn
urn on
on the
the lase
laserr.
3. With
With the laser
laser on, place
place the phantom
phantom so that
that the laser
laser dot is on
on the centerline
centerline of
of
the phantom, 1/2" from the left end,
end , shining on the phantom target. The sides of
the phantom should be aligned parallel to the table, using a ruler if nec
necessary
essary..
4. "Spine
Be surePhantom
the
the spine
spine#nnnn
#phantom has been
nnnn"" (where nnnnentered
entere
is thed number
in the patient
pat
ofient
thedatabas
databasee inso
phantom) thethat
form
form
theof
QC plot program can
c an identify it properly.
5. From
From the
the Discov
Discovery
ery Main
Main Menu
Menu scree
screen, selectt Perform Exam, select the Spine
n, selec
Phantom, and click the OK button at Patient Information dialog box.
6.. Select AP Lumbar Spine, uncheck default scan check box, and click the
6
Next> button.
7.. Select Array, click the Next> button, set the scan length to 6 inches, and start
7
the scan.
8. Anal
Analyz
yzee the
the scan
scan and
and clic
click the Close button to exit the Analysis screen.
k the
9. Start
Start the Field Service
Service Calibratio
Calibration
n program selecting Utilities|Service Utili-
program by selecting
ties|Field Service Calibration from the Discovery Main Menu screen.
10. Select the Spine Highs/Lows
Highs/Lows for Array Spine phantom option
option to automatically
calculate the new thickness indicators for array spine.
11. Select the Spine Phantom scanned in step 6 from the list of Analyzed Scans and
click the Next button. Click the Continue button on the Successfully Calcu-
lated message box.
12. Click on the Temp
Temp Write
Write button and click the Continue
Continue button on the Success-
fully Wrote message box. Exit Field Service Calibration.
4-35
4.14.2 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (A and

SL)
1. From the
the QDR For
For Windows
Windows perform
perform exam button,
button, select the spine
spine phantom
phantom to
be used for checking the array scan modes. This should be the one shipped with
the machine.
Note: Be sure the spine phantom has been entered in the patient database in the
form of "Spine Phantom #nnn" (where nnn is the number of the phantom)
so that the QC plot program can identify it properly.
properly.
2. Center the table,
table, place the
the phantom
phantom on the
the table and
and set up a exam using
using the
the AP/
Lateral setup, uncheck the use default scan mode box, click next, select Array
scan mode for the AP component and Fast Array for the Lateral component. The
sides of the phantom should be aligned parallel to the table, using a ruler if neces-
sary.
3. Press and hold Enable
Enable until
until the
the arm and
and table
table move into
into position
position.. Recheck phan-
tom alignment with laser, and click Continue.
Note: over.
Do not move the arm or table, otherwise the test will have to be start
started
ed
4. Change the
the scan length
length to
to 6 inches,
inches, and click
click start
start scan
scan to beg
begin
in the AP
AP compo-
compo-
nent.
5. When scan
scan has finished
finished,, select
select Spine
Spine as the analysis
analysis method, click Next.
method, and click
6. Analyze
Analyze the scan, and
and click start
start positi
position.
on. Check at bottom
bottom of
of screen that
that the cen-
cen-
terline angle is + or - 2 Degrees.
Degree s.
7. Click close, and then
then hold the enable
enable button
button to
to lateral
lateral positi
position.
on.
8. Click
Click Start
Start Scan
Scan to
to perform
perform Late
Lateral
ral comp
componen
onent.
t.
9. Press and hold
hold the Enable switch
switch to return
return to AP position.
position.
10. Analyze scan (refer to user guide for Lateral analysis)
analysis) and close the screen.
11. Click exit to
to close the Exit Analysis
Analysis screen.
screen.
12. Restart QDR for Windows software
software in service mode (if(if not already). From the
the
QDR Main window, select Utilities, Service Utilities, Field Service Calibration.
13. Select Highs/Lo
Highs/Lows
ws for Array Spine
Spine Phantom
14. Select the
the AP scan just performed and click Next.
performed
15. Click continue
continue on the Calculated
Calculated highs
highs and lows page.
page.
16. Select Highs/Lo
Highs/Lows
ws for Array Lateral
Lateral Phantom.
Phantom.
17. Click continue
continue on the Calculated
Calculated highs
highs and lows page.
page.
18. Click Temp

Temp Write to write
write temporary results and click continue to exit the write
dialog box.
4-36
4.14.3 Calibration of Area and BMC, for Array Scan Modes

1. Restart
Restart the Discovery
Discovery softwar
softwaree in service
service mode (if
(if not already).
already). Center
Center the table.
table.
From the Discovery

Reposition . ReturnMain
to theMenu
menuscreen, select
and select Utilities|Service
Utilities|Service Utilities|AP
Utilities|Auto
Scan.
2. Se
Sele
lect
ct the Sp
Spin
inee Phant
Phantom
om..
3. Click OK at Patient Confirmation dialog box.
3.
4. Select
Select AP Lumb
Lumbarar Scan Type, input 20 for number of scans, uncheck Use
ype, input
Default, and click the Next button.
5. Select
Select Arra
Array
y and
and clic
click the Next button.
k the
6. Analyze the first
first scan manuall
manually
y. Note the scan
scan #. Click the Close button to exit
Click the
analysis.
7. ties|Auto
From
From the Dis
DAnalyze
iscove
covery
ry Main
Ma
. in Menu
Menu screen,
screen, sele
select
ct Utilities|Service Utili-
8. Click on unanalyzed
unanalyzed Scans and select
select the 19
19 scans, click on Compare radio but-
scans, click
ton and then click the next button.
9. Now,
Now, sselect
elect the scan
scan analyzed
analyzed in
in step
step 6 and
and click the next button.
click the
10. The 19 scans will
will now be compared
compared with the analyzed
analyzed scan.
11. From the Discover
Discovery
y Main Menu screen, select Utilities|Service Utili-
screen, select
ties|Field Service Calibration.
Click the ACF/BCF button. Select the 20 scans, click next, and then click Con-
12. Click
tinue at the Successfully Calculated dialog box.
13. At the Field

values Service
Service Calibra
to ARRC.TXT Calibration
tion dialog
file. Click dial
the og box, click
Continue the Write
button button
to return to write
to the the
Discovery
Main Menu screen.
14. Print ARRC.TXT
ARRC.TXT file
file by using these steps:
steps:
• Press the <Ctrl><Esc> keys to bring up the WindowsXP Taskbar.Taskbar.
• Select Find
• Select Files or Folders
• Type ARCC.TXT in the Named: edit box.
• Click Find Now or simply hit the <Enter> key.
• Rig
Right
ht click
click on
on the firs
firstt ARRC.T
ARRC.TXT
XT entry
entry in the list
list presen
presented
ted to
to you and
and select
select
Print from the menu. (You want the ARRC.TXT entry in the QDR\DATA
directory NOT the QDR\DATA\LRTEMP directory.)
15. Verify ACF ACFL ACFT and BCF BCFL BCFT in
in ARRC.TXT.
ARRC.TXT.
4-37
4.14.4 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC

Database
Once the unit has been calibrated, AP scans must be re-analyzed and added to the QC
database.
1. From
From the Dis
Discove
covery
ry Main
Main Menu
Menu screen,
select
ties|Auto Analyze.
2. Select
Select Anal
Analyze
yzed
d scans
scans,, click RECALYZE, and select the 20 scans
click sca ns just acquired
and click the Next button.
3. . The scans
scans will
will now
now be recalcul
recalculated
ated to
to the new
new calibrati
calibration.
on.
4. Highlight
Highlight the
the scans
scans from
from the Excluded list and click the Include Scans button
Excluded list
and then the Finish button. (Selection is easier if you click Scan Date bar above
the list. This will order the scans by date and
a nd time).From the Discovery Main
Menu screen, select QC|QC Data Management|Select Scans .
5. From
From the
the Discove
Discovery ry Main
Main Menu, selectt the QC|QC Data Management|Plot
Menu, selec
to create plots for BMD, BMC, AREA, HiAir, and LoAir plot for each array
mode. Verify that the QC plots inlcude QC scans from at least the last two years.
6. Ensure that all
all scans
scans fall
fall between
between the two,
two, dotted
dotted limit
limit lines.
lines.
7. Print the BMD,
BMD, BMC,
BMC, Area, HiAir,
HiAir, and LoAir
LoAir plots.
plots. Include
Include them with the other
other
paperwork being returned to Hologic.
Note: For more detail
detailss on performing
performing the
the QC setup and producing
producing QC plots,
plots, refer
refer to the
the
Discovery User's Guide.
Sample HARDWARE.INI
HARDWARE.INI (Calibration) File
HARDWARE.INI Variables Set by… Descriptions
[Version] .INI File Section Name
HardwareModel=14 Factory Discovery model (C=20, W=21, A=23, SL=22).
[Laser]
LaserYOffset=-38100 Factory Laser Offset Value
[TxMotor]
PosLimitPosition=409575 Factory Positive limit in microns (= 16 1/8 inches)
SpineInitPos=208000 Factory TX center position in microns (= 8.18 inches)
MaxSpinePos=233400 Factory + Limit for spine placement
MinSpinePos=182600 Factory - Limit for spine placement
PatientUnloadPos=0 Factory Table position for unloading patients
APLatDiff=376200 Factory AP/Lateral Di
Difference
MaxTrackOffset=25400 Factory
4-38
LocalMotionMax=465000 Factory Max table position using Control Panel

LocalMotionMin=0 Factory Min table position using Control Panel
LocalMotionHomePos=208000 Factory X Center table position using Cont
ontrol Panel
nel
ScanPosTolerance=25400 +/- Tolerance for Scan X Position (1 in)
[TyMotor]
SpineInitPos=503175 Factory TX center position in microns (= 8.18 inches)
FlatPos=503175 Factory TX position for Detector Flattening
LocalMotionPos=503175 Factory Y Center table position using Control Panel
ScanPosTolerance=25400 Factory +/- Tolerance for Sc
Scan Y P
Po
osition (1
(1 in
in)
[TzMotor]
SpineInitPos=500 Factory TZ Start Position (AP)
LatInitPos=98425 Factory TZ Start Position (LAT)
LocalMotionPos=500 Factory TZ Center Positioning Control Panel
PatientUnloadPos=500 Factory Patient Unload Position
ScanPosTolerance=3175 Factory +/- Tolerance for TZ
[AyMotor]
SpineInitPos=460000 Factory C-Arm scan start position
FlatPos=510000 Factory Detector flattening start position
FlatMoveDist=25400 Factory Detector flattening move distance
LocalMotionHomePos=460000 Factory Center C-Arm position
YTiltOffset=-127000 Factory
TBarStartPos=152400 Factory Tissue BAR Start Position
[ArMotor]
SpineInitPos=500 Factory Spine Initial Position
LateralInitPos=4980 Factory Lateral initial Position
ScanPosTolerance=60 Factory +/- Tolerance for Scanning
LocalMotionMax=60 Factory Not Max Talerance for Center
LocalMotionMin=-60 Factory Min Center Position Tolerance
[Gain] Collimator & gain selection
SpineHiGain=3,3 Factory
SpineLoGain=3,3 Factory
4-39
DecubHiGain=3,3 Factory
DecubLoGain=3,3 Factory
HipHiGain=6,3 Factory
HipLoGain=6,2 Factory
HipHiGain=7,2 Factory
HipLoGain=7,1 Factory
IVAHiGain=6,1 Factory
IVALoGain=6,1 Factory
[Flattening]
DailyFlatFile=FLT721NA.DCL Automatic
[Aperture] Size Parameters: Number, Length, Width
Size=0, 2.510, 0.04 Factory
Size=10, 2.510, 0.04 Factory
Size=11, 2.510, 0.04 Factory
Size=12, 2.510, 0.04 Factory
Size=13, 2.510, 0.04 Factory
Tolerance=10 +/- Tolerance to center of aperture
Slot=0, 4439 Factory Number and distance to center of aperture
Slot=1, 4139 Factory

4-40


SlotOff=0, 3909 Factory Number and Position “Off Aperture”
SlotOff=1, 3909 Factory
[Attenuator]
Tolerance=15 Factory +/- Tolerance for Attenuator Blocks
Block=0,4038 Factory Attenuator Block Number and Distance
Block=1,3809 Factory
4-41
[HeatUnits]
BDelay=30 Factory Boot Up Delay

MaxVHU=70000 Factory Maximum Vinnie Heat Units
CoolRate=250 Factory Cooling Rate of VHU
Vhus1=90 Factory X-Ray Mode 1
Sample ARRC.TXT (Array Calibration) File

ARRC.TXT Variables Set by… Descriptions
A variable used by the software to determine what
USE = 0 Factory parameters to use for scatter correction. It can be set
to one of four possible values (0, 1, 2, or 3) but should
always be set to 0.
These numbers are used for all array modes. The
Q4 = 0.651 1.013 1.461 Factory numbers are determined by measuring a three-step
(thin, medium, and thick) block phantom at the
factory.
Q4_HA
Q4_HAT
1.445 T = 0.617 0.980 Fa
Fact
cto
ory Si
Sim
themStep
il
ilar
ar to Q4,
Q4, exc
excep
phantom eptt th
with thextra
emmea
eas
sur
urem
emen
ents
absorber ts are
are tak
take
material en on
on
placed
on top of it.
T4 = 2.628 Factory Thickness (height in inches) of the block phantom.
T4_HAT = 7.00 Factory Thickness (height in inches) of the block phantom
with extra absorber.
DELTA0 = 0.493 Factory Thickness of tissue segment in the filter wheel.
T0_N = 6.85 Fact. or F.S. Overall height of the phantom (in inches) shipped
with the Discovery. (Varies with each phantom.)
HIA_N = 1305.39 Automatic Hi Air,
LOA_N = 1622.56 Automatic Low Air,
HIT N = 1389.09 Automatic Hi Tissue, and

HIT_N 1389.09 Automatic Hi Tissue, and
4-42
LOT_N = 1718.52 Automatic Low Tissue attenuations values in "raw A/D"

numbers.
These values are used to determine the thickness of a
patient being scanned in an AP array scan mode. They
are updated whenever a spine array scan is added to
the QC database (i.e. the daily array QC scan) or in
FSCAL.
ACF = 1.021550 Fact. or F.S. Area Correction Factor fo
for AP Spine and Hip scans
BCF = 1.005450 Fact. or F.S. Bone Correction Factor for AP Spine and Hip scans
SFF = 1.083600 1.095000 Factory Spine Fan Factors
LFF = 0.943000 0.954000 Factory Lateral Fan Factors
HFF = 1.077300 1.120000 Factory Hip Fan Factors
1.077300 1.120000 Multiplication factors for BCF & ACF array scans.
1.077300 1.120000 These values are the same on all Discovery models.
1.077300 1.120000

T0_NL = 6.00 Factory Width of the phantom shipped with the discovery.
This value is the same for all phantoms.
HIA_NL = 0.00 Automatic Hi Air - Lateral
LOA_NL = 0.00 Automatic Lo Air - Lateral
HIT_NL = 0.00 Automatic Hi Tissue - Lateral
LOT_NL = 0.00 Automatic Lo Tissue - Lateral
ACFL = 1.021550 Fact. or F.S. Area Correction Factor for Lateral scans.
BCFL = 1.005450 Fact. or F.S. Bone Correction Factor for Lateral scans.
HIA_NF = 1319.16 Factory Hi Air,
LOA_NF = 1634.86 Factory Low Air,
HIT_NF = 1402.73 Factory Hi Tissue, and
LOT_NF = 1730.71 Factory Low Tissue attenuations values in "raw A/D"
numbers.
Factory values for AP array scans. Used as reference
for the software to determine if the Hi/Low values are
out of factory range.
HIA_NLF = 0.00 Factory Hi Air
LOA_NLF = 0.00 Factory Lo Air
Not used in the Factory Hi Tissue
DISCOVERY
LOT_NLF = 0.00 Factory Lo Tissue
QC_HILO_MIN 50.0 Factory Day to day d
drrift ch
check w
waarning m
meessage li
limit.
QC_HILO_MAX = 1
10
00.0 Factory Day-to-day d
drrift ch
check er
error m
meessage li
limit.
4-43
QC_HILO_FACT_MAX =
QC_HILO_FACT_MAX Fa
Fact
cto
ory Lo
Lon
ng-
g-te
term
rm dr
driift chec
check
k war
warning
ning messa
essag
ge lim
limit.
it.
200.0
QC_HILO_FACT_MIN =
QC_HILO_FACT_MIN Fa
Fact
cto
ory Lo
Lon
ng-
g-tter
erm
m dr
drif
iftt chec
check
k erro
rorr mess
messaage lim
limit.
it.
100.0
UPDATED = 06/20/94 Au
Auto
toma
mati
ticc Da
Date
te and
and ttim
imee the
the ARR
ARRC.T
C.TXT
XT file
file wa
wass las
lastt upd
updat
ated
ed..
12:00:00
UPDA
UP DATE
TED_
D_N
N= Auto
Automa
mati
ticc Da
Date
te La
Last
st Up
Upda
date
ted
d - No
Norm
rmal
al
UPDA
UPDATE
TED_
D_NL
NL = Auto
Automa
mati
ticc Da
Date
te La
Last
st Up
Upda
date
ted
d - Late
Latera
rall

QDR_SERIAL_NB = Factory Serial number of the Discovery.
80015
ARRAY_PHANTOM_NB Fact.
Fact. o
orr F
F.S.
.S. Serial
Serial number
number of tthe
he p
phan
hantom
tom shippe
shipped
d with
with the
the
= 1922 instrument.
ARRC_SEQUENCE_NB = Au
Auto
toma
mati
ticc Se
Sequ
quen
enti
tial
al nu
numb
mber
er of the
the last
last ARR
ARRC.
C.TX
TXT
T ffil
ile.
e.
001
ACFT = 1.021550 Fact. or F.S. Area Correction F
Faactor for Turbo scans.
BCFT = 1.005450 Fact. or F.S. Bone Correction Factor for Turbo scans.
SFFT
SFFT = 1.
1.0
083
8360
600
011.0
.095
9500
000
0 Fa
Fact
cto
ory Spi
Spine Fan
Fan Fac
Facttor
orss Tu
Turb
rbo
o mo
mode
de co
corrrec
rection
tion fact
factor
orss.
HFFT = 1.042700 1.102800 Factory Hip Fan Factors Turbo mode.
1.042700 1.102800 Multiplication factors for BCF & ACF in turbo scan
1.042700 1.102800 modes. These values are the same on all Discoverys.
1.042700 1.102800
VERSION_NB = 005 3/27/ Fan Factor Version # (same for all)
95
WBINTACF = 1.000 Whole Body Fan Factor Area
WBINTBCF = 1.131 Whole Body Fan Factor BMC
AWBAREA = 0.975 Whole Body Fan Factor Area
AWBBMC = 1.020 Whole Body Fan Factor BMC
AWBLEAN = 0.962 Body Composition Fan Factor lean
AWBWT = 1.01 Body Composition Total Mass
FOREAREA = 1.0 Forearm Fan Factor Area
FOREBMC = 1.0 Forearm Fan Factor BMC
HWVERSION = 14 System Hardware Descriptor
PCAL_STEP_NB = 5 PCAL Step Phantom
4-44
Section 5
REMOVE AND REPLACE
PROCEDURES
This section describes how to remove and replace the Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) in the
Discovery.. To safely perform a FRU removal or replacement, take care to follow the procedure
Discovery
precisely as written.
Note: Whenever
Whenever a component
component in the x-ray
x-ray path is
is replaced,
replaced, you must
must recalibrate
recalibrate an
and
d rerun QC.
QC.
5.1 Recommended Tools

Tool Size/Type
Hex driver 3/32"
Hex driver or wrench 5/32"
Nut driver 1/4"
Nut driver 3/8 inch
Nut driver 5/16"
Nut driver 7/16"
Screwdriver Narrow slotted
Screwdriver Phillips head
Screwdriver Slotted
Wrench 3/8 inch
ESD PRECAUTIONS: To prevent damage due to ESD (Electrostatic Discharge), you

must take precautions when handling components.
compone nts. Remove any charge from your body
by wearing an approved and properly grounded wrist strap. Keep PCBs in their ESD
protective bag until you are ready to install them. Treat defective PCBs as new to
prevent any additional damage.
5.2 Electronics Tray FRUS

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs in the Electronics Tray/Carriage
Drive area of the Discovery (see Figure 5-1).
5-1). To remove any of the FRUs in the Electronics Tray
assembly,, remove the 6 Phillips retaining screws and remove the cover. Next, remove the nut that
assembly
holds the ground wire to the cover ground lug.
5-1
5.2.1 Electronics Tray Printed Circuit Boards

To remove and replace the Distribution Board, Din Rail Assembly, Low Voltage
Voltage Power
Supply, TZ Drive Board (A & SL only), or AY Drive Board refer to Figure 5-1 and follow
the procedure below:
Front
Din Rail
Encoder Assy.
Power Supply
Multi-Voltage
Multi-Voltage DC
Distribution Board
Motor Control Board
C-Arm Y Belt
Stepper Motor
5-1. Electronic Tray FRUs

Figure 5-1.
1. Move
Move the
the C-arm
C-arm all the way to
to the
the right
right..
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and then
then turn
turn off the
the main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on
on the foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove the cable
cable covers
covers and
and unplug
unplug the cables on the
the board to be replace
replaced.
d.
4. To remove
remove the board,
board, unscrew
unscrew the Phillips
Phillips screws
screws holdin
holding
g the board.
board.
Note: Some boards have standoff
standoffss and/or plastic
plastic hold-down
hold-down snaps.
5. To replace
replace the board
board revers
reversee the step
steps.
s.
6. Restor
Restoree the
the motor
motor cable
cable shie
shield.
ld.
Note: When replacing the AY Motor Controller
Controller board, make sure
sure that you set
the ID switch to 7. When replacing the TZ Drive board, make sure that
you set the Normal/Service switch to the Normal position.
p osition.
C-Arm Y Belt
To remove and replace the C-arm Y-Belt,
Y-Belt, refer to Figure 5-1 and follow the procedure
below:
5-2
1. Move
Move the
the C-arm
C-arm to the
the cente
table.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. At the encoder
encoder end
loosen the
the 2 bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block,
remove the tensioning nut, and remove and replace the belt.
4. Instal
Installl the tens
tension
ion spri
spring
ng and tens
tension
ioning
ing nut.
nut.
5. Tighten
Tighten the
the tension
tension nut so that
that the spring
spring compres
compresses
ses to 7/8
7/8 inch. The
The bracket cut-
cut-
out can be used as a measuring guide (the inside of the washer should be flush
6. Tighten
Tighten the
the two mounting
mounting bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
7. Restore
Restore power,
power, boot the compute
computerr and login as Service.
Service.
8. Perfo
Perform
rm the
the proc
proced
edure
ure in “MOTOR$AY”
“MOTOR$AY” on page 3-35.
3-35 .
5.2.2 C-Arm Y Motor or Gearcase

To remove and
a nd replace the C-arm Y-Motor
Y-Motor or Gearcase, refer to Figure 5-1 and follow the
procedure below:
1. Move
Move the
the C-arm
C-arm to the
the cente
table.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. At the encoder
encoder end
loosen the
the 2 bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block,
remove the tensioning nut and remove the belt.
4. At the motor end
end of the
the belt,
belt, remove the cable
cable cover and
and unplug
unplug the motor
motor cable
cable
from the Motor Controller Board.
5. Remove the
the four Allen
Allen bolts
bolts,, and nuts,
nuts, holding
holding the
the motor and gearcase.
gearcase.
Note: The two bottom

bottom nuts are accessible with a ratchet wrench and extension.
extension.
6. Remove
Remove the
the motor
motor first,
first, then
then the gearcas
gearcase.
e.
7. If replacing
replacing the gearcase,
gearcase, instal
installl the pulley
pulley from
from the
the old gearcase
gearcase on
on the new
gearcase.
8. Replace the motor
motor and gear
gear case assemb
assembly
ly making
making sure to align
align the gasket
gasket cor-
cor-
rectly.. Snug the Allen bolts,
rectly b olts, but do not over tighten.
9. Instal
Installl tthe
he belt
belt on both
both pulley
pulleys.
s.
10. At the encoder end of the belt, install
install the tension sspring
pring and tensioning nut.
11. Tighten the tension nut so that the spring compresses to 7/8 inch. The bracket cut-
out can be used as a measuring guide (the inside of the washer should be flush
12. Tighten the two mounting bolts holding the tension
tension block.
5-3
13. Restore the cable shield and ground strap terminations

terminations..
14. Restore power,
power, boot the computer and login as Service.
15. Perform
Perform the procedu
procedure
re in “MOTOR$AY”
3-35 .
5.2.3 C-Arm Y Encoder

To remove and replace the Encoder, refer to Figure 5-1 and follow the procedure below:
1. Before
Before removing
removing power from
from the Discover
Discoveryy, remove both
both cable covers,
covers, unhook
unhook
the center cable hold-down clip and free the encoder cable
c able without unplugging it.
2. Move the
the C-arm towards
towards the center
center of
of the Scanner
Scanner (so
(so the encoder
encoder is accessible)
accessible)..
3. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
4. Unplug the encoder
encoder from
from the Motor
Motor Control
Controller
ler Board
Board and pull
pull out the cable.
cable.
5. Remove the coupling
coupling hardware
hardware holding
holding the
the encoder
encoder to the belt
belt drive.
drive.
6. Remove
Remove the
the encoder
encoder from
from the
the bracket
bracket assem
assembly
bly..
7. Replace the
the encoder
encoder on the bracket
bracket,, install
install the
the coupling
coupling but do
do not tighten
tighten the
the
screws.
8. Restore
Restore power,
Service.
9. Perfo
Perform
rm the
the proc
proced
edure
ure in “MOTOR$AY”
3-35 .
Note: When starting
starting this procedure, make sure the encoder coupling setscrew is
not tightened.
5.3 Table Y FRUs (A, W and Wi Only)

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs associated with the Table Y
motion of the Discovery (see Figure 5-2).

5-2).
1. Before
Before removing
removing power from
from the Discover
Discovery
y, move the table
table to the
the far left using
the Motor Control Pad. The Motor Control Pad can be accessed from the Discov-
ery Main Menu screen by choosing Utilities|Emergency Motion.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove 2 screws
screws from
from the right
right table
table rail
rail end cover,
cover, and slide
slide the cover off from
from
the end.
5-4
Motor Control Board

TY Drive
Control Panel Board
Control Panel
A/SL - 9 button
C/W - 7 button
KP1085_004-0502
5-2. T
Figure 5-2. Table
able Y FRUs (C and W Models only)
5.3.1 Control Panel (All models)

To remove and replace the Control Panel refer to Figure 5-2 and follow the procedure
below:
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Remove
Remove 3 screw
screwss located
located under
under the Cont
Control
rol Panel
Panel box.
box.
3. Unplug the
the cable and
and ground
ground strap
strap (from
(from the Control
Control Panel to
to the Control
Control Panel
Panel
board) on the Control Panel board and remove the panel.
4. To replace
replace the
the Control
Control Panel
Panel rever
reverse
se the step
steps.
s.
5.3.2 PCBs Under Right-Side of the Table

To remove and replace the boards under the table (TY Motor Controller Board or Control
Panel Controller Board), refer to Figure 5-2 and follow the procedure below:
1. Unplug
Unplug the
the cables
cables on
on the boar
board
d to be
be replac
replaced.
ed.
2. To remove
remove the board,
board, unscrew
Phillips screws
screws holdin
holding
g the board
board
Note: Some boards have standoff
standoffss and/or plastic
plastic hold-down
hold-down snaps.
3. To replace
replace the board,
board, rever
reverse
se the
the steps.
steps.
Note: When replacing the TY Motor
Motor Controller board, ensure that the ID switch
is set to 5.
5-5
5.3.3 Table Y Belt

To remove and replace the Table Y-Belt, refer to Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3 and follow the
procedure below:
Table Y Encoder
Table Y Belt
5-3.Foot End Table Y FRUs

Figure 5-3.Foot
1. Center the table
table and remove
remove the
the two screws
screws that secure
secure the
the tabletop
tabletop in place.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Pull the
the tabletop
tabletop to the left
left far enough
enough to remove
remove the right
right table
table rail end cover
cover,,
and remove the cover
cove r. Mark this as the right cover so that it is not confused later
with the left cover (they are not interchangeable).
4. Pull the
the tabletop
right far enough
enough to remove
remove the left
left table
cover,,
cove r. Mark this as the left cover so that it is not confused later
with the right cover (they are not interchangeable).
5. At the encoder
encoder end
loosen the
the 2 bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block,
6. Instal
Installl the tens
tension
ion spri
spring
ng and tens
tension
ioning
ing nut.
nut.
7. Tighten
Tighten the tensio
tension
n nut so that
that the spring
spring is compres
compressed
sed to 7/8 inch.
inch. The bracket
bracket
8. Tighten
Tighten the
the two mounting
mounting bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
9. Restore
Restore power,
Service.
5-6
10. Perform
Perform the procedu
procedure
re in “MOTOR$TY (A, W and Wi models only)” on page 3-
38.
38.
Note: When starting
starting this procedure, make sure the encoder coupling setscrew is
not tightened.
5.3.4 Table Y Motor or Gearcase

To remove and replace the Table Y Motor or Gearcase, refer to Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3,
5-3,
perform the steps for removing the belt described above, and continue with this procedure.
Perform the following:
1. Remove
Remove the
the Tabl
Tablee Y Belt
Belt as desc
describ
ribed
ed above.
above.
2. Unplug the motor
motor cable from the Motor
Motor Controller
Controller Board.
3. Remove the
the four Allen
Allen bolts
bolts,, and nuts,
nuts, holding
holding the
gearcase.
4. Remove
Remove the motor
motor and the gearcas
gearcase.
e.
5. If replacing
gearcase, instal
installl the pulley
pulley from
from the
the old gearcase
gearcase on
on the new
gearcase.
motor and gear
gear case assemb
assembly
ly making
align the gasket
gasket cor-
cor-
rectly.. Snug the Allen bolts but don’t over tighten.
rectly
7. Instal
Installl tthe
he belt
belt on both
both pulley
pulleys.
s.
8. At the encoder
encoder end
end of the belt, instal
installl the tension
tension spring
spring and tensioni
tensioning
ng nut.
nut.
9. Tighten
Tighten the tensio
tension
n nut so that
that the spring
spring is compres
compressed
sed to 7/8 inch.
inch. The bracket
bracket
10. Tighten the two mounting bolts holding the tension
tension block.
11. Restore
Restore power,
power, boot the computer
computer and login as Service.
12. Perform
Perform the procedu
procedure
re in “MOTOR$TY (A, W and Wi models only)” on page 3-
38.
38.
Note: When startin
starting
g this procedure,
procedure, make
make sure the
the encoder
encoder coupling setscrew is not
coupling setscrew
tightened.
5.3.5 Table Y Encoder

To remove and replace the Table Y Encoder, refer to Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3 and follow
1. Center the table
table and remove
remove the
the two screws
screws that secure
secure the
the tabletop
tabletop in place.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
5-7
3. Pull the
the tabletop
tabletop to the left
left far enough
enough to remove
remove the right
right table
cover,,
cove r. Mark this as the right cover so that it is not confused later
with the left cover (they are not interchangeable).
4. Pull the
the tabletop
right far enough
enough to remove
remove the left
left table
cover,,
cove r. Mark this as the left cover so that it is not confused later
with the right cover (they are not interchangeable).
encoder from
from the Motor
Motor Control
Controller
ler Board
Board and pull
pull out the cable.
cable.
6. Remove the couplin
coupling
g holding
holding the encoder
encoder to the
the belt
belt drive.
drive.
7. Remove
Remove the
the encoder
encoder from
from the
the bracket
bracket assem
assembly
bly..
8. Replace the
the encoder
encoder on the bracket
bracket,, install
install the
the coupling
coupling but do
do not tighten
tighten the
the
screws.
9. Restore
Restore power,
Service.
10. Perform the MOTOR$TY calibration
calibration procedure on page 3-38.
3-38.
Note: When starting this procedure, make sure the encoder
e ncoder coupling setscrew is not
tightened.
5.4 Table X FRUS
This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs associated with Table X
motion of the Discovery (see Figure 5-4).
5-4).
5-8
Table X Encoder
Table X Belt
Motor Controller Board
Front Endcap
Table X Motor
5-4. Table X FRUs

Figure 5-4.
5.4.1 Table X Motor Controller PCB

To remove and replace the TX Motor Controller board, refer to Figure 5-4 and follow the
procedure below:
1. Before
Before removing
removing power from
from the Discover
Discovery
y, move the table
table up as far
far as it will
will go.
2. Remove 6 flat head

head Phillips
Phillips screws
screws from the upper
upper pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and remove
remove the
the
cover.
3. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
4. Unplug
Unplug the
the cables
cables on the
the TX Motor
Motor Cont
Control
roller
ler boar
board.
d.
5. To remove
remove the board,
board, unscrew
Phillips screws
screws holdin
holding
g the board.
board.
6. To replace
replace the board
board revers
reversee the step
steps.
s.
7. Restor
Restoree the
the motor
motor cable
cable shie
shield.
ld.
Note: When replacing the TX Motor
Motor Controller board, ensure that the ID switch
is set to 4.
5-9
5.4.2 Table X Belt

To remove and replace the Table X Belt located within the X Table Drive Assembly
A ssembly,, refer
to Figure 5-4 and follow the procedure below:
1. Before
Before removing
removing power from
from the Discover
Discovery
y, move the table
table to the
the far left using
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove 2 screws
screws from
from the right
right table
table rail
rail end cover,
cover, and slide
slide the cover off from
from
the end.
4. Remove the
the front
front endcap
endcap from the table
table X drive
drive assembly
assembly (3 Phillips
Phillips screws
screws).
).
5. Remove the
the back Philli
Phillips
ps scr
screw
ew from
from the right
right side
side cover
cover (of the
the table
table X drive
assembly) and slide the cover out from the front. This provides access to the belt.
6. At the encoder
encoder end
loosen the
the 2 bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block,
7. Instal
Installl the tens
tension
ion spri
spring
ng and tens
tension
ioning
ing nut.
nut.
8. Tighten
Tighten the tensio
tension
n nut so that
that the spring
spring is compres
compressed
sed to 7/8 inch.
inch. The bracket
bracket
9. Tighten
Tighten the
the two mounting
mounting bolts
bolts holding
holding the tension
tension block.
10. Restore power,
11. Perform
Perform the MOTOR$TX
MOTOR$TX calibration
procedure on page 3-40.
3-40.
Note: When starting
starting the MOTOR$TX
calibration procedure,
procedure, make sure the
coupling setscrew is not tightened.
5.4.3 Table X Motor or Gearcase

To remove and replace the Table X Motor or Gearcase, refer to Figure 5-4 and follow the
procedure below:
1. Remove
Remove the
the Tabl
Tablee X Belt
Belt as desc
describ
ribed
ed above.
above.
head Phillips
Phillips screws
upper pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and remove
remove the
the
cover.
3. Unplug the motor
motor cable from the Motor
Motor Controller
Controller Board.
4. Remove the
the four Allen
Allen bolts
bolts,, and nuts,
nuts, holding
holding the
gearcase.
5. Remove
Remove the motor
motor and the gearcas
gearcase.
e.
6. If replacing
gearcase, instal
installl the pulley
pulley from
from the
the old gearcase
gearcase on
on the new
gearcase.
5-10

motor and gear
gear case assemb
assembly
ly making
align the gasket
gasket cor-
cor-
rectly.. Snug the Allen bolts but don’t over tighten.
rectly
8. Instal
Installl tthe
he belt
belt on both
both pulley
pulleys.
s.
9. At the encoder
encoder end
end of the belt,
belt, loosen
loosen the
the two bolts
bolts holding
holding the
the tension
tension block
block and
install the tension spring and tensioning nut.

10. Tighten the tension
tension nut so that the spring
spring is compressed to 7/8 inch. The bracket
11. Tighten the two mounting bolts holding the tension block.
12. Restore the cable shield and ground strap terminations
terminations..
13. Restore power,
14. Perform
Perform the procedu
procedure
re in “MOTOR$TX” on page 3-40.
3-40.
Note: When starting
5.4.4 Table X Encoder

To remove and replace the Table X Encoder located
loca ted within the X Table Drive Assembly,
refer to Figure 5-4 and follow the procedure below:
1. Before
Before removing
removing power from
from the Discover
Discovery
y, move the table
table to the
the far left using
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove 2 screws
screws from
from the right
right table
cover,, and slide
slide the cover off the
the
end.
4. Remove the
the front endcap from
from the X table drive assemb
assembly
ly.. The cover
cover is held
held on
with 2 hex screws.
5. Remove 6 Phillip
Phillipss scre
screws
ws from the
the right side
side cover (of
(of the X table
table drive assem-
assem-
bly) and slide the cover out from the front. This provides access to the encoder
and belt.
head Phillips
Phillips screws
upper pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and remove
remove the
the
cover. This provides access to the Motor Controller Board.
encoder from
from the Motor
Motor Control
Controller
ler Board
Board and pull
pull out the cable.
cable.
8. Remove the couplin
coupling
g holding
holding the encoder
encoder to the
the belt
belt drive.
drive.
9. Remove
Remove the
the encoder
encoder from
from the
the bracket
bracket assem
assembly
bly..
10. Replace the encoder on the bracket, install the coupling but do not tighten the
screws.
5-11
11. Restore
Restore power,
power, boot the computer
12. Perform
Perform the procedur
proceduree in “MOTOR$TX” on page 3-40.
3-40.
Note: When starting
encoder coupling setscrew is not tightened.
5.5 Table Z FRUs (A and SL only)

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs associated with Table Z (up
and down) motion of the Discovery (see Figure 5-5).
5-5).
TZ Motor (not visible)
Pedestal (covers removed)
Linear Encoder
(old style)
Pedestal Power Plug
String Encoder
(new style, right side,
left side not shown)
5-5. Table Z FRUs

Figure 5-5.
5.5.1 Pedestal
To remove and replace either pedestal, refer to Figure 5-6 and follow the procedure below.
The procedure requires two pieces of 2 x 4 lumber, approximately 3 feet long, and two
pieces of foam padding.
5-12
5-6. Installing the Rotary String Encoder

Figure 5-6.
1. Remove
Remove the
the Elect
Electron
ronics
ics Tray covers
covers..
head Phillips
Phillips screws
upper pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and remove
remove the
the
cover.
3. Remove 5 flat head Phillip
Phillipss scre
screws
ws from
from the lower pedest
pedestal
al cover and remove
remove the
cover.
4. Move the
the C-arm towards
towards the pedestal
pedestal to be replaced,
replaced, but
but ensure
ensure that
that the service
service
switches on the TZ Motor Controller board are accessible.
a ccessible.
5. Place two
two 2 x 4s on
on end, on top
top of the
the tank. The
The 2 x 4s should
should be
be oriented
oriented front to
back, on the tank, to support the table. Place foam padding between the 2 x 4s
and the table to protect the tape safety switch.
6. Push
Push in
in the
the Emerg
Emergency
ency Stop
Stop swit
switch.
ch.
7. On the TZ Motor Controller
Controller board, set
set the Normal/
Normal/Servi
Service
ce switch
switch to Service
Service and
and
set the Direction switch to Down.
8. Press the
the left and
and right switches
switches together
together until
until the table
table just rests
rests on the
the 2 x 4s.
9. Remove the
the top bolts
bolts on
on the pedestal
pedestal (9/16”)
(9/16”).. The cosmetic
cosmetic bracket
bracket will come
off.
Note: If removing the left pedestal, the left T-rail
T-rail will become loose. Be careful
not to drop this T-rail.
10. Press the appropriate pedestal switch
switch on the TZ Motor Controller board to lower
the pedestal completely.
completely.
11. Remove the pedestal power plug, the lower four pedestal bolts,
bolts, and remove the
the
pedestal.
5-13
12. Remove the end plates from the old pedestal and install on the new pedestal
being careful to maintain their orientation (6mm Allen screws). Apply a small
amount of Loctite when installing the screws.
13. Replace the pedestal and install the pedestal lower bolts
bolts,, but leave them loose for
now.
14. Replace
Replace the power
power plug.
plug.
Controller board, set the Direction
Direction switch to Up.
16. Press the appropriate pedestal switch
switch on the TZ Motor Controller board to raise
raise
the pedestal until it just touches the T-rail.
17. Install the cosmetic bracket
bracket and upper pedestal bolts leaving tthe
he bolts loose for
now.
18. Using the switches on the TZ Motor Controller board, raise both pedestals and
remove the 2 x 4s and foam.
19. Measure from the inside of one T-rail
T-rail to the inside of the other
other.. It must be 65
inches at both the front and back. If it is not, move the pedestal until the measure-
ments are correct.
20. Tighten
Tighten the lower and upper pedestal
pedestal bolts.
bolts.
Controller board, set the Direction
Direction switch to Down.
22. Using the switches on the TZ Motor Controller board, lower both pedestals all
the way down.
Controller board, set the Service switch
switch to Normal and press
Reset (large black button).
MOTOR$TZ calibration by selecting Utili-
24. Login as Service and perform the MOTOR$TZ
ties|Service Utilities|SQDRIVER from the Discovery Main Menu screen
(you must be in Service Mode). At the CARM$$$> prompt, type MOTOR$TZ
<Enter>
Refer to the MOTOR$TZ calibration procedure on page 3-33 for details.
25. After the calibration process completes, replace all covers.
5.5.2 The Linear Rotary String

String (Encoder)
5.5.2.1 Installation
When replacing one of these encoders, make certain you have the correct part.
Part Number
Right Encoder 030-2417
Left Encoder 030-2867
Refer to Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 and follow the procedure below:
5-14
1. Remove
Remove the electr
electroni
onics
cs tray
tray covers.
covers.
2. Push in the
the Emergency
Emergency Stop
Stop Switch
Switch then press
press and hold
hold the Table
Table Up Switch
Switch to
move the table all the way up.
WARNING
ARNING:: Shut d
down
own th
thee computer
computer and
and then
then turn off
off th
thee main circu
circuit
it br
breaker
eaker on the foot
end pedestal.

head Phillips
Phillips screws
upper pedestal
pedestal cover
cover and remove
remove the
the
cover.
4. Remove 5 flat
flat head
head Phillips
Phillips screws
screws from
from the lower
lower pedestal
pedestal cover and remove
remove the
cover.
5. Remove
Remove the
the linear
linear encode
encoderr top screw
screw (Phil
(Phillip
lips).
s).
6. Remove the
the linear encoder
encoder bottom
bottom screw
screw (access
(access to the
the bottom
bottom Phillips
Phillips screw
screw is
through the frame hole).
7. Unplug the linear
linear encoder
encoder cable
cable from the TZ Drive
Drive board
board and snake
snake the cable
out..
WARNING
ARNING:: Do no
nott allow
allow the string
string to snap back
back into
into th
thee enc
encoder
oder after being exte
extended.
nded. This
can permanently damage the unit.
8. Route the
the new encoder
encoder cable
cable through
through the path
path of the
the old encoder
encoder and
and plug it
it into
into
the TZ Drive board.
9. Install
Install the
the rotary
rotary encoder at the bottom
bottom using the
the screw
screw and two
two washers
washers pro-
vided.
Note: The bracket
bracket must sit
sit on the top surface
surface of the base
base frame before
before
tightening.
10. Replace the linear encoder top screw by extending the string and fastening to the
the
top using screw and washers provided.
11. Turn on the instrument
instrument power,
12. Perform
Perform the MOTOR$TZ
MOTOR$TZ calibration selecting Utilities|Service Utili-
calibration by selecting
ties|SQDRIVER from the Discovery Main Menu screen (you must be in Ser-
vice Mode). At the CARM$$$> prompt, type MOTOR$TZ <Enter>
Refer to “MOTOR$TZ (Discovery A and SL only)” on page 3-33 for details.
13. When calibration and adjustment
adjustment is done,
done, replace the pedestal covers.
5.5.2.2 Adjustment
Use this section only when the pedestals
pede stals are not within the 20 counts specified.
1. Typ
ypee Y<En
Y<Entter
er>.
>.
A screen similar to the following appears.
DeviceState E_OK
PedestalMode OPERATIONAL
5-15
Table Status OK
Left Pedestal AT_TARGET
Right Pedestal AT_TARGET
Position 199649
PosLimitPosition 199930
NegLimitPosition 0
LowerLeft 384
UpperLeft 3235
LowerRight 383 Adjust the Right String
UpperRight 3234 Encoder center hub until
PositionAverage 8 EncoderPosition
DriverVersion 8.02 equals UpperLeft.
DeviceVersion 2.30
EncoderPosition 3230
EncoderNegLimit 383
EncoderPosLimit 3234
A384;3235;383;3234
2. Loosen the three

three screws
screws on the
the inner side of the right
right encoder
encoder just
just enough to
allow the center hub to turn.
3. Adjust
Adjust the encoder
encoder by rotating
rotating the
the center hub
hub until the
the 'Encoder
'Encoder Position'
Position' count
count
value on the monitor matches the 'Upper Left' count value.
4. Secure the three
three adjustm
adjustment
ent screws
screws on the face of the encoder
encoder..
5.
5. Return to Step 2 of the “MOTOR$TZ (Discovery A and SL only)” on page 3-33
to recalibrate at the new encoder setting.
Note: Upon recalibration, the 'Upper Right' and 'Upper Left' count values
va lues should
become virtually equal. If the 'Lower Left' and 'Lower Right' count values
differ by more than 20 counts, readjust the encoder
en coder by rotating the center
hub until the 'Encoder Position' count value equals the 'Upper Left' count
value ± half of the lower count difference. Secure the three adjustment
screws on the face of the encoder Return to Step 2 of the MOTOR$TZ
calibration procedure on page 3-33 to recalibrate at the new encoder
setting.
5.6 Lower C-Arm FRUS

This section describes how to remove and replace the C-arm Interface Board, X-Ray
Controller (XRC), Tank, and Filter Drum Assemblies located on the lower C-arm (see
Figure 5-7),
5-7), and Arm rotation FRUs (A & SL only).
5-16
C-Arm Interface Bd
Filter Drum Assembly
Tank Assembly
L-Bracket (2x)
X-Ray Controller Assembly
5-7. Lower C-Arm FRUs

Figure 5-7.
5.6.1 C-Arm Interface Board

To remove and replace the C-Arm Interface Board, refer to Figure 5-7 and follow the
procedure below:
1. With the C-arm
C-arm inin the center
center of the table,
table, use
use the Control
Control Panel
Panel to move the
the table
table
out as far as it will go, for easier access
acc ess to the cover screws.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove the
the lower
lower C-arm cover,
cover, then remove
remove the
the rear tank cover
cover (covers
(covers the
the C-
arm Interface board).
4. Unplug
Unplug all
all cable
cabless to the
the C-Arm
C-Arm Inte
Interfa
rface
ce Board.
Board.
5. Remove
Remove 4 Phill
Phillips
ips scre
screws
ws and
and remove
remove the
the board
board..
6. To replace
replace the C-Arm Interface
Interface Board
Board reverse
reverse the steps.
steps.
7. Restore
Restore power,
Service.
8.
8. Perform “T
“Test
est Scan Modes” on page
pa ge 3-64.
3-64.
5-17
5.6.2 X-Ray Controller Assembly

To remove and replace the X-Ray Controller (XRC), refer to Figure 5-22 and do the
following:
1. Using the Control
Control Panel,
Panel, move
move the table
table in for easier
easier access
access to the
the XRC.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove the
the lower
lower C-arm
C-arm cover by removing
removing 2 Phillip
Phillipss screws
screws and slidin
sliding
g it out
from the front.
4. Remove
Remove the
the 4 Phillip
Phillipss screws
screws holdi
holding
ng the XRC
XRC (see
(see Figure 5-7
5. Pull
Pull the XRC
XRC forwa
forward
rd far
far enough
enough to acces
accesss the cabl
cables.
es.
6. Unplug all of
of the cables and remove
remove the XRC by pulling
pulling it out.
7. To repla
replace
ce the
the XRC
XRC rever
reverse
se the
the step
steps.
s.
8. Restore
Restore power,
Service.
9.
9. Perform “Area, BMD, and BMC Calibration” on page 4-34
4-34..
10. Log out of Service
Service and login
login as User.
User.
11. Perfo
Perform
rm “T
“Test
est Scan Modes” on page
pa ge 3-64.
3-64.
5.6.3 Filter Drum Assembly

To remove and replace the Filter Drum Assembly,
Assembly, refer to Figure 5-7 and do the
following:
1. Using the
the Control
Control Panel,
Panel, move
move the table
table in as far as it will
will go and
and center the C-
arm for easier access to the Filter Drum Assembly.
Assembly.
2. St
Start
art the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
3.. Set Aperture to 7.
3
4. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
5. Remove the
the lower
lower C-arm
removing 2 Phillip
Phillipss screws
screws and slidin
sliding
g it out
from the front. Also, remove the bottom cover.
6. Remove
Remove the
the 4 Philli
Phillips
ps screw
screwss holding
holding the
the XRC
XRC (see
(see Figure 5-7).
5-7).
7. Pull the
the XRC forwar
forwardd far enough
enough for
for access to the Filter
Filter Drum (i
(itt is not neces-
sary to remove the XRC cables.
8. Remove the rear
rear tank
tank cover
cover (covers
(covers the
the C-arm
C-arm Interface
Interface board).
board).
9. Unplug the
the 2 Filter
Filter Drum cables from the C-arm
C-arm Interface
Interface board.
board.
10. Remove 3 hex head screws (3/32
(3/32 inch Allen screws).
screws).
5-18
11. Remove the Filter Drum by lifting

lifting it up (while tilting
tilting it slightly forward) and out.
12. Replace the 3 hex head screws.
screws. Ensure that the curved spring washers
washers are placed
(curved downward) so that the washer compresses when the screw is tightened.
13. Replace
Replace the
the cables.
cables.
14. Replace the screws

screws in the XRC assembly
assembly..
15. Restore power,
16. Perfo
Perform
rm “X-Ray Beam Alignment ” on page 4-4.
4-4.
17. Perfo
Perform
rm “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9.
4-9.
18. Perfo
Perform
rm “A/D Gain Control Adjustment” on page 4-26.
4-26 .
19. Replace
Replace all covers that
that were removed.
removed.
20. Perfo
Perform
rm “Detector Flattening ” on page 4-29.
4-29.
5.6.4 Tank Assembly

To remove and replace the Tank Assembly,
Assembly, refer to Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 and follow
WARNING:
ARNING: Bec
Becaus
ausee of th
thee weight
weight o
off the tank
tank (abou
(aboutt 200
200lb
lbs),
s), 2 peopl
peoplee are requ
require
ired
d to sa
safel
fely
y rem
remove
ove
and replace the tank.
1. Using the
the Control
Control Panel,
Panel, move
move the table
table in as far as it
it will
will go for
for easier
easier access.
access.
2. Start
Start the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Surve
Survey
y Utilit
Utility
y by selec
ting
3.. Set Aperture to 7.
3
4. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
5. Remove the
the lower
lower C-arm
removing 2 Phillip
Phillipss screws
screws and slidin
sliding
g it out
from the front.
6. Remove
Remove the XRC (see
(see proced
procedure
ure above).
above).
7. Remove the Filte
Filterr Drum
Drum Assembl
Assembly
y (see
(see procedure
procedure above).
8. For A and SL models
models only:
only: Lock the
the C-arm
C-arm in place
place by securing
securing the
the shipping
shipping
brackets on each side of the arm.
5-19
5-8. Top View of Tank

Figure 5-8.
9. Remove the
the two L-bracket
L-bracketss from the front
front of the
the tank that
that holds
holds the tank
tank to the
the
C-arm (7/16 inch).
10. Carefully slide the tank out of the C-arm onto a pallet (requires 2 people).
11. Remove the old tank from the tank tray,
tray, and install the new tank on the tray.
12. Remove the cable assembly from the old tank and install it
it on the new tank (see
Figure 5-8).
5-8).
13. Remove the Filter Drum support
support brackets from the old tank and install on the
new tank (see Figure 5-8).
5-8).
14. Slide the tank tray,
tray, with tank installed, back in place in the C-arm and replace the
L-brackets.
15. Remove the 2 shipping
shipping brackets
brackets on each side
side of the C-arm.
C-arm.
16. Replace
Replace the Filter Drum
Drum Assembly
Assembly.
17. Replace the X-ray Controller
Controller Assembly
Assembly..
18. Be sure to reconnect the cable shield and ground strap terminals.
19. Before turning on the Scanner, check the tank cable connections to ensure that
they are correct.
20. Restore power,
5-20
21. Starting
Starting with
with the
the “Check Tube kV Peak Potential” on page 3-28,
3-28, perform all the
procedures in that section in order, with the exception of the Calibrate Motors
and Check Laser Positioning Offset procedures.
5.6.5 Arm R FRUS (A and SL only)

This section describes how to remove and replace the Arm R (Rotate) FRUs located on the
right side of the lower C-arm (see Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-8).
5-8).
Before removing power from the Discovery,
Discovery, move the C-arm towards the middle-left side
of the table to allow working room. Use
U se the Motor Control Pad. The Motor Control Pad
can be accessed from the Discovery main screen by choosing Utilities|Emergency
Motion.
Gas Spring
C-Arm R Encoder
Motor Controller
Board
C-Arm R Motor
5-9. C-Arm R FRUs (Outside View)

Figure 5-9.
5-21

5-22
C-Arm R Belt
C-Arm R
Encoder Belt
5-10. C-Arm R FRUs (Inside View)
Figure 5-10.
5.6.6 Motor Controller Board

To remove and replace the Motor Controller Board refer to Figure 5-9 and follow the
procedure below:
1. Remove the motor
motor cover
cover plate
plate by removing
removing 2 (Phill
(Phillips)
ips) screws.
screws.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Unplug the
the cables
cables and unscrew
unscrew the
the Phillips
Phillips screws
screws holding the board.
board.
4. To replace
replace the board
board revers
reversee the step
steps.
s.
Note: When replacing the AR Motor Controller
Controller board, ensure that the ID switch
is set to 6.
5.6.7 Arm R Belt

To remove and replace the Arm R Belt refer to Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10,
5-10, and follow the
procedure below:
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Remo
Remove
ve the
the tank
tank co
cover
vers.
s.
3. Remove the
the X-ray
X-ray controller
controller assembl
assembly
y (to gain
gain access
access to the
the front belt clamp).
clamp).
4. Remove
Remove the
the rear
rear C-arm
C-arm shou
shoulde
lderr cover
cover..
Note: Take care not to move the C-arm during the remainder of this procedure.
5. Remove the
the belt tension
tension nut,
nut, and remove
remove the rear
rear belt
belt clamp (four 5/16" bolts)
bolts)..
6. Remove the
the belt from
from the motor
motor pulleys.
pulleys. Access
Access the pulleys
pulleys from the
the left side
side of
the Scanner looking under the C-arm (see Figure 5-10).
5-10).
5-23
7. Remove the
the belt from the front
front belt
belt clamp (four Phillips
Phillips screws)
screws)..
8. Install
Install the new
new belt in reverse
reverse order
order,, front belt
belt clamp
clamp first,
first, then over
over the pulleys,
pulleys,
and then to the rear belt clamp.
9. Tight
ighten
en bot
both
h belt
belt clam
clamps
ps..
10. Loosen the belt tension

tension bloc
block
k (two 1/4" bolts).
bolts).
11. Install the tension nut
nut and adjust to 7/8" from
from the inside of one washer to the
inside of the other washer.
12. Tighten
Tighten the tension
tension block
block bolts.
13. Restore power,
14. Perform
proceduree in “MOTOR$AR (Discovery A and SL)” on page 3-42.
3-42 .
5.6.8 Arm R Motor

Motor,, Gearcase, Encoder or Encoder Belt
To remove and replace the Arm R Motor refer to Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10,
5-10, and follow
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Remove the
the rear C-arm should
shoulder
er cover and the arm
arm R motor
motor cover plate.
plate.
3. At the rear
rear of the C-arm,
C-arm, remove
remove the belt
belt bracket (2 bolts)
bolts) while
while leaving
leaving the belt
attached. This provides enough slack to remove the belt from the motor pulleys.
4. Remove the
the belt from
from the motor
motor pulleys.
pulleys. Access
Access the pulleys
pulleys from the
the left side
side of
the Scanner looking under the C-arm (see Figure 5-10).
5-10).
5. Remo
Remove
ve the
the arm
arm R en
encod
coder
er cab
cable
le..
6. Remove the
the Motor
Motor Controller
Controller board ribbon
ribbon cable
cable and snake
snake the cable
cable through
through the
access hole.
7. Remove the entire
entire arm
arm R motor
motor assembly
assembly bracket
bracket with motor
motor,, board,
board, and encoder
encoder
(four 7/16" bolts).
8. Remove the
the encoder
encoder and pulley
pulley assembl
assembly
y (2 Phillips
Phillips screws)
screws) and the encoder
encoder
belt.
9. If replacing
replacing the
the motor or
or gearcase,
gearcase, remove thethe four Allen
Allen bolts,
bolts, and nuts,
nuts, holding
holding
them. If replacing the gearcase, install the pulley from the old gearcase on the
new gearcase. Then, replace the motor and gear case assembly making sure to
align the gasket correctly. Snug the Allen bolts but don’t over tighten.
10. If replacing the encoder, loosen the coupling setscrew
setscrew and remove the
the encoder
from the bracket assembly. Then, replace the encoder on the bracket but do not
tighten the coupling setscrew yet.
11. Replace the arm R motor
motor assembly bracket with
with motor,
motor, board, and encoder (four
7/16" bolts).
5-24
12. Replace the cables and replace the belt on the motor pulleys. Be ssure
ure to restore
the cable shield and ground strap terminations.
13. Replace the belt bracket and loosen the belt tension block (two 1/4" bolt
bolts).
s).
14. Adjust the tension nut so that the spring is
is compressed to 7/8" from
from the inside of
one washer to the inside of the other washer.

15. Tighten
Tighten the tension
tension block
block bolts.
16. Restore power,
17. Perform
proceduree in “MOTOR$AR (Discovery A and SL)” on page 3-42.
3-42 .
Note: When starting
starting the MOTOR$AR calibration
calibration procedure, make
make sure the
5.6.9 Gas Spring

It is not necessary to remove any covers to remove and replace either Gas Spring. Refer to
Figure 5-9 and follow the procedure below:
1. Using Emer
Emergency
gency Motion,
Motion, rotate
rotate the
the C-Arm
C-Arm to the Lateral
Lateral position.
position.
2. Remove the
the retaining
retaining clip
clip from
from the top
top of the
the gas spring
spring and
and remove
remove the spring
spring
from the stud.
3. Remove
Remove the
the nut that
that holds
holds the lower
lower stud
stud in place.
place.
4. Remove
Remove the
the stud
stud and spri
spring
ng toget
together
her..
5. Prior to installin
installing
g the new spring,
spring, lubric
lubricate
ate the ball
ball studs
studs at both ends
ends with
with white
white
lithium grease.
6. Put the
the lower
lower stud
stud on the
the new spring
spring and attach
attach the retaining
retaining clip.
7. Install
Install the top of the
the spring
spring to the top stud and
and replace
replace the retainin
retaining
g clip.
5.7 Upper C-Arm FRUS

This section describes how to remove and replace the Detector Assembly,
Assembly, ADC Board (A
Only), Control Panel, and Laser Assembly located on the upper C-arm. It also describes
the procedure for replacing a failing 64 Channel Detector Assembly (010-1653) with a 64
Channel Detector Assembly (ASY-00271)
(ASY-00271) on Ci and Wi units.
5-25
5.7.1 Detector Assembly A, SL, W, C Systems

Detector Assembly
080-1085_004-0513
5-11.. Detector Assembly Mounting

Figure 5-11
To remove and replace the Detector Assembly (refer to Figure 5-11)
5-11) and follow the
procedure below:
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Unplug the cables
cables and remove the screws
screws on the detector
detector assembl
assembly
y and remove
remove it
from the system.
3. Install
Install the
the new detector
detector assembl
assembly
y using the screws
screws and
and cables removed
removed in the
the
previous step.
4. Turn
Turn on the Discov
Discovery
ery power
power,, boot the
the computer
Service.
5. Perform
Perform the
the X-Ray
X-Ray Beam
Beam Alignme
Alignment
nt procedur
proceduree on page 4-4.
4-4.
6. Perform
Perform the
the A/D Gain Control
Control Adjustme
Adjustment
nt on page 4-21.
4-21.
7. Perform
Perform the ìLaser Positioni
Positioning
ng Offset
Offset Adjustment
Adjustment on page 4-21.
8. Replace any
any covers
covers that were removed
removed and perform
perform ìDetector
ìDetector Flatte
Flattening
ning on page
4-22.
9. Perfor
Perform
m the Field
Field Servic
Servicee Calibra
Calibratio
tion
n procedur
procedure.
e.
10. Perform
Perform a System
System Backup.
11. Perform a System Recover. Verify
Verify that the System Backup recovers without
error.
12. Verify proper system operation.
5-26
5.7.2 Detector Assembly C1 and Wi Systems

Early versions of Discovery Ci and Wi systems used detector assembly 010-1653. This
assembly is no longer available and has been replaced by detector assembly ASY-00271.
The following procedure explains how to remove the old detector assembly and replace it
with the new detector
d etector assembly. If your system already has the new ASY
ASY-00271
-00271 detector
assembly, use the removal/replacement procedure in Section 5.7.1.
Remove the 010-1653 Detector Assembly

To remove the 010-1653 Detector Assembly, refer to Figure 5-12 and follow the
procedure below:
1. Shut down the computer and then turn off the main circuit breaker on the foot end
pedestal.
2. Unplug the 180-0292 laser cable
c able connector.
3. Remove the cables and the screws on the existing Detector Assembly (010-1653)
and remove the assembly.
assembly.
4. Remove the cables and the screws on the existing ADC Board (140-0087) and
remove the board.
Note: The 180-0185 and 180-0189 ribbon cables on the ADC Board will not be
reused. Also, the four 6-32x.25 screws (200-0356) securing the ADC
board will not be reused.
180-0292 010-1653
laser cable
180-0189
180-0185
140-0087
180-0419
200-0356 (4x)
5-12. Detector Assembly 010-1653
Figure 5-12.
5-27
Install the ASY-00271

ASY-00271 Detector Assembly
1. Install the ASY-00271
ASY-00271 Detector Assembly (see Figure 5-13
5-13)) in place of the 010-
1653 using the screws removed in Step 3.
2. Connect the 180-0292 laser cable.
3. Re-route the 180-0419 ribbon cable and install it on P1 of the ASY-00271.
ASY-00271.
4. Install the 370-0056 clamp-on ferrite core over the 180-0419 ribbon cable.
5. Turn on the Discovery power, boot the computer and login as
a s Service.
6. Perform “X-Ray Beam Alignment ” on page 4-4.
4-4.
7. Perform “A/D Gain Control Adjustment” on page 4-26.
4-26 .
8. Perform “Laser Positioning Offset Adjustment” on page 4-26
4-26..
9. Replace any covers that were removed and perform “Detector Flattening ” on
page 4-29.
4-29.
10. Perform the Field Service Calibration procedure.
ASY-00271
180-0292
laser cable
370-0056
180-0419
5-13. Detector Assembly ASY

Figure 5-13. ASY-00271
-00271
11. Perform a System Backup.

12. Perform a System Recover. Verify
Verify that the System Backup recovers
rec overs without error.
13. Verify proper system operation.
5-28
5.7.3 Laser Assembly

To remove and replace the Laser, or Laser Assembly, refer to Figure 5-11 and Figure 5-14
and follow the procedure below:
Laser Clamping Screw
Laser Assembly
Laser
KP1085_004-0514
5-14. Laser Assembly

Figure 5-14.
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Remo
Remove
ve the
the top
top C-ar
C-arm
m cover
cover..
3. Remove
Remove the
the cables
cables at
at the Dete
Detecto
ctorr Assem
Assembly
bly..
4. Remove the
the 4 bolts
bolts holding
holding the
the Detector
Detector Assembly
Assembly (on
(on rubber
rubber grommets)
grommets) to the
C-arm (see Figure 5-11).
5-11).
5. Remove
Remove the Detecto
Detectorr Asse
Assembl
mbly
y.
6. To replace the
the laser only,
only, loosen the
the laser clamping
clamping screw
screw. T
To
o replace the
the laser
assembly,, remove the three mounting screws.
assembly
7. Restore
Restore power,
power, boot the
the computer
computer and
and login
login as User.
User.
8. To adjust the
the laser,
laser, loosen the
the laser clamping
clamping screw
screw,, turn the laser
laser on and rotate
rotate it
until the correct alignment is seen.
9.
9. Perform “Laser Positioning Offset Adjustment” on page 4-26
4-26..
5-29
5.7.4 Analog to Digital Converter Board (A Model only)

To remove and replace the Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) Board refer to Figure 5-15
and follow the procedure below:
Counterweights
Convertor Bd
Convertor
Analog to Digital
5-15. Rear C-Arm FRUs

Figure 5-15.
1. The C-arm should be in the AP position.
2. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
3. Remo
Remove
ve the
the C-a
C-arm
rm cover
covers.
s.
4. Unplug
Unplug the cables
cables on
on the
the ADC
ADC board
board..
5. Remove
Remove 4 Phill
Phillips
ips scre
screws,
ws, and
and remove
remove the
the ADC board.
board.
6. To replace
replace the
the ADC board
board revers
reversee the step
steps.
s.
7. Restore
Restore power,
Service.
8.
8. Perform “A/D Gain Control Adjustment” on page 4-264-26..
9. Replace
Replace any covers
covers that
that were
were removed
removed..
10. Perfo
Perform
rm “Detector Flattening ” on page 4-29.
4-29.
5-30
5.8 Aperture Assembly FRUS

This section describes how to remove and replace
replac e the FRUs on the Aperture Assembly.
5.8.1 Aperture
To remove and replaceStepper Motor
the Aperture Stepper Motor (320-0041), refer to Figure 5-16 and
follow the procedure below:
Motor Shaft Bracket
Aperture Stepper Motor
Motor Mount
Aperture
Posit
osition
ion Belt
Tension Nuts
PCB Bracket
Clamping Nut
Rotary Potentiometer Aperture Mot or PCB

PCB
5-16. Aperture Assembly FRUs

Figure 5-16.
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Unpl
Unplug
ug the
the mot
motor
or ca
cabl
ble.
e.
3. Remove the 2 Phill
Phillips
ips screws
screws from the
the motor
motor shaft
shaft bracket.
bracket.
4. Remove the
the motor mount
mount (2 Philli
Phillips
ps scre
screws)
ws) and remove
remove the motor
motor assembl
assembly
y.
5. Remove the
the motor from the
the motor mount,
mount, and remove
remove the end
end lock nut
nut and flat
flat
washer. Transfer
Transfer the dampening pad to the new motor.
6. Reverse
Reverse the steps above to
to install
install the new
new motor
motor..
7. Turn
Turn on the Discov
Discovery
ery power
power,, boot the
the computer
Service.
8.
8. Perform “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9
4-9..
5-31
5.8.2 Aperture Motor PCB

To remove and replace the Aperture Motor PCB (140-0068), refer to Figure 5-16 and
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
Phillips
ips screws
screws from the
the motor
motor shaft
shaft bracket.
bracket.
3. Move the
the aperture
aperture back far enough
enough to expose
expose the
the screws
screws that hold the
the PCB
bracket.
4. Remove
Remove the
the 2 PCB
PCB brack
bracket
et scre
screws
ws..
5. Unplug the cables
cables and instal
installl the new PCB
PCB on the bracket.
bracket.
6. Reverse
Reverse the steps
steps above to complet
completee the installa
installation
tion of tthe
he new Aperture
Aperture Motor
Motor
PCB assembly.
assembly.
7. Turn
Turn on the Discov
Discovery
ery power
power,, boot the
the computer
Service.
8. Perf
erform
orm the “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9
4-9..
5.8.3 Aperture Position Belt

To remove and replace the Aperture Position Belt (255-0032), refer to Figure 5-16 below:
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Loosen the 2 belt tension
tension nuts
nuts and the belt
belt clampin
clamping
g nut.
nut.
3. Remove and
and replace
replace the belt
belt (ensure
(ensure the
the belt is under
under the pem
pem stud).
stud).
4. Tension
ension the belt moderat
moderately
ely tight
tight (remove
(remove slack),
slack), and tighten
tighten the belt
belt tension
tension
nuts.

Phillips
ips screws
screws from the
the motor
motor shaft
shaft bracket.
bracket.
6. Rotate
Rotate the belt pulley
pulley fully
fully clockwise
clockwise,, then turn
turn the pulley
pulley back 3/4 turn
turn counter
counter
clockwise (3/4 turn of the potentiometer pulley, not the idler pulley).
7. Move the
the aperture
aperture towards
towards the potentiomete
potentiometerr until
until it stops.
8. Tighten
Tighten the belt
belt clamping
clamping nut (do
(do not over tighten).
tighten).
9. Move the aperture
aperture back until the motor
motor shaft
shaft bracket
bracket screw
screw holes
holes line
line up.
10. Install the 2 Phillips screws holding the motor shaft bracket.
11. Turn on the Discovery
Discovery power, boot the computer and login as Service.
Service.
12. Perfo
Perform
rm “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9.
4-9.
5-32
5.8.4 Rotary Potentiometer

To remove and replace the Rotary Potentiometer (included in the cable assembly 180-
0267), refer to Figure 5-16 and follow the procedure below:
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Remove the Apertur
Aperturee Position
Position Belt
Belt (refer
(refer to the
the procedure
procedure above).
above).
3. Remove
Remove the potent
potentiom
iomete
eterr pulle
pulley
y.
4. Remove and
and replace
replace the potenti
potentiometer
ometer (face wires
wires towards
towards the Aperture
Aperture Motor
PCB).
5. Replace the
the potentiom
potentiometer
eter pulley
pulley (pulley
(pulley goes all
all the way
way down on the
the shaft).
shaft).
6. Refer to the
the Aperture
Aperture Position
Position Belt procedure
procedure and replace
replace the belt.
belt.
7. Turn
Turn on the Discov
Discovery
ery power
power,, boot the
the computer
Service.
8.
8. Perform “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9
4-9..
5-33
5.9 Drum Assembly FRUS

This section describes how to remove and replace
replac e the FRUs on the Drum Assembly.
5.9.1 Drum
To remove Encoder
and replace PCB
the Drum Encoder
Encod er PCB (140-0089), refer to Figure 5-16,
5-16, Figure 5-
17 and Figure 5-18 and follow the procedure below:
Motor Mount
5-17. Aperture Assembly Removal

Figure 5-17.
5-34
Drum Encoder PCB

140-0065
Encoder Wheel, Inner
Encoder Wheel, Outer
5-18. Rear Drum Assembly FRIS

Figure 5-18.
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. assembly
Remove the
assembly,t,he
andAperture
Aper ture Assem
Assembly
2 Phillips
P hillips blythat
screws by secure
removing
removing
the 4aperture
Phillips
Phillipsmotor
screws
screws that
thatt,secure
moun
mount, setocure the
the
the drum
end plates.
3. Unpl
Unplug
ug the
the PCB
PCB ca
cabl
ble.
e.
4. Remove and
and replace
replace the PCB
PCB (ensure
(ensure that
that the encoder
encoder wheels
wheels are
are not touching
touching
the sensors.
5. Attach Ch1 probe
probe to SEGMENT
SEGMENT test
test point
point (TP3)
(TP3) on the
the C-Arm
C-Arm Interface
Interface board.
board.
6. Attach Ch2 probe
probe to BRASS
BRASS test
test point
point (TP2)
(TP2) on the C-Arm Interface
Interface board.
board.
7. Conn
Connect
ect pr
prob
obee tto
o gro
groun
und.
d.
8. Go to X-Ray
X-Ray Survey
Survey and turn
turn on the
the Filter
Filter Drum
Drum motor
motor..
9. As the filter
filter drum
drum motor turns on
on and rotates
rotates look on the
the C-Arm
C-Arm Interface
Interface board.
board.
a. The yellow
yellow “Index”
“Index” LED blinks
blinks (on then
then off)
off) as the
the Index mark passes
passes the
optical interrupter.
interrupter.
b. Verify the
the green “Top
“Top of Drum”
Drum” and “Brass
“Brass on Top”
Top” LED (D8)
(D8) blink
blink as the
drum spins.
c. The green
green “AC Lock”
Lock” LED
LED (D7) lights
lights (steady
(steady,, not blinki
blinking)
ng) after
after a few
few rev-
olutions of the drum.
10. Measure from the rising edge of the
the BRASS to the rising edge of the SEGMENT
(it does not matter which edge leads).
lead s). The time measured must be less than 500
µs (500 µs = 0.5 ms). See Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20.
5-20.
5-35
Segment
Signal
Jigger Brass
Signal
500μs
Jigger Brass
Signal
Segment
Signal
500μs

11. If timing is out of specification, (no steady LOC LED) loosen the
the two encoder
board mounting screws, and adjust the PCB up or down to get timing in specifi-
cations. When timing is in specifications, retighten the PCB mounting screws
and recheck timing. If necessary, readjust the timing. The LOC LED must be
solid on and steady.
steady.
12. Replace
Replace the Aperture Assembly
Assembly..
5.9.2 Drum Belts

To remove and replace either Drum Belt (130 teeth or 150 teeth), refer to Figure 5-18 and
1. Push
Push the
the Emer
Emergenc
gency
y Stop
Stop button
button..
2. Remove the
the Aperture
Aperture Assemb
Assembly
ly by removing
removing 4 Philli
Phillips
ps screws
screws that
that secure
secure the
assembly,, and 2 Phillips screws that secure the aperture motor mount, to the drum
assembly
end plates (refer to Figure 5-16).
5-16).
5-36
3. Loosen the
the 2 drum motor mount
mount screws,
screws, the idler
idler screw
screw and the outer pulley
pulley set
screw.. Remove the belts.
screw
4. Install
Install the Filter
Filter Drum Alignm
Alignment
ent Pin (099-01
(099-0110),
10), small
small end first,
first, through
through the
the
slotted holes and into the small hole at the base plate. If the pin is installed prop-
erly, the drum will not rotate.
5. Install
Install the 150
150 tooth
tooth belt on
on the back pulley (ensure
(ensure the belt
belt is positi
positioned
oned under
under
the idler).
6. Instal
Installl the 130
130 tooth
tooth belt
belt on
on the front
front pulley
pulley..
7. Tighten
Tighten the
the 2 drum motor mount screws
screws (the
(the motor
motor mount
mount is spring
spring loaded
loaded to
seek proper tension).
8. Tighten
Tighten the idler
idler screw
screw (the
(the idler is
is spring
spring loaded to
to seek proper
proper tension).
tension).
9. Tight
Tighten
en the
the outer
outer pull
pulley
ey set
set screw
screw..
10. Remove the Filter
Filter Drum
Drum Alignment
Alignment Pin.
11. Pull the
the Emergency
Emergency Stop
Stop button.
button.
5.9.3 Stepper
Stepper Motor Assembly
To remove and replace the Stepper Motor Assembly,
Assembly, refer to Figure 5-18 and follow the
procedure below:
1. Shut down
down the computer
computer and
and then turn
turn off the main
main circuit
circuit breaker
breaker on the foot
foot end
pedestal.
2. Remove
Remove the Apertur
Aperturee Asse
Assembl
mbly
y.
3. Remove
Remove the
the drum
drum belts
belts (see
(see proc
procedur
eduree above).
above).
4. Remove
Remove the stepper
stepper motor
motor pulley
pulley..
5. Remove and replace
replace the
the motor
motor (4 flathead
flathead Phillip
Phillipss screws).
screws).
6. Replace the
the pulley
pulley,, use Loctite
Loctite 222
222 (540-0100)
(540-0100) on
on the set
set screw
screw.
7. Refer to the
the Drum Belts procedure
procedure above
above and replace
replace the belts.
belts.
5.9.4 Drum Bearings

To remove and replace the drum bearings, refer to Figure 5-21 and Figure 5-22 and follow
5-37
Stepper Motor Assembly

010-0627
Idler Arm
Belt, 150 Teeth

255-0030
Belt, 130 Teeth
Teeth
255-0031
Drum Motor Mount
5-21. Front Drum Assembly FRUs

Figure 5-21.
Bearing
250-0046
Endplate
Alignment Hole
Side Plate
Lead Shield
Endplate
Lead Shield Bearing

250-0046
Side Plate
5-22. Drum Bearings
Figure 5-22.
1. Remove the
the aperture
aperture assembly
assembly and drum belts
belts (see procedu
procedures
res above).
above).
2. Remove
Remove the
the 2 drum
drum motor
motor mount
mount scre
screws
ws (see
(see Figure 5-18)
5-18)
5-38
3. Remove 6 screws from undernea

underneath
th the drum
drum assembly
assembly base
base plate
plate (4 screws
screws hold
hold
the end plates and 2 screws hold the motor mount spring tensioner block).
4. Remove the
the side plates
plates and lead
lead shields
shields (3 Philli
Phillips
ps screws
screws on each side).
side).
5. Remove
Remove the
the drum
drum encode
encoderr PCB and
and both
both encode
encoderr wheels.
wheels.
6. Remove
Remove both
both drum
drum bel
beltt pull
pulley
eys.
s.
7. Remove
Remove the drum
drum from
from the endplat
endplates.
es.
8. Remove one
one drum endcap
endcap (4 Phillips
Phillips screws
screws)) and remove
remove the
the inner drum.
drum.
9. Repl
Replac
acee the
the bear
bearin
ings
gs..
10. Reassemble the drum and replace (and tighten) the screws in the endcap.
Note: When replacing
replacing the
the end cap ensure that
that the flats
flats on each side of the drum
drum
shaft are facing the same way (this happens where the two side-by-side
holes line up).
11. Replace the 2 endplates. The endplate with the cutout (for the PCB) goes on the
drum end away from the alignment hole (see Figure 5-21).
5-21).
12. Replace the
the lead shields and side
side plates (6 screws).
screws).
13. Align the 2 endplates onto the holes
holes on the recessed area on the base plate. Orient
the front endplate towards the 2 slotted holes. Orient the rear endplate on the
opposite set of holes and position so that the endplate side with cutout (for PCB)
is facing the "C" cutout of the base plate. Replace the 4 flat washers, split locks,
and 4-40 x 3/8 screws that secure the endplates.
14. Insert the Drum Spacing Fixture (099-0296) between the endcap and the front
endplate. Push the filter drum against the fixture to center it between the two
blocks. Do not remove the fixture at this time.
15. Install the spacers
spacers and pulleys at the front endplate (see Figure 5-18).
5-18). Ensure that
the pulley set screws line up with the flat, and use Loctite 222 on set screws.
Press the filter drum against the fixture, and the pulley against the endplate, while
tightening the set
se t screw.
Note: Leave the outer pulley set screw loose until belts are installed.
16. Remove the
the Drum Spacing
Spacing Fixture.
Fixture.
17. Replace
Replace the inner encoder wheel
wheel (see
(see Figure 5-17).
5-17). Press (squeeze together) the
drum and encoder wheel against the endplate and tighten the set screw (use Loc-
tite 222).
18. Replace
Replace the outer encoder wheel.
wheel.
19. Replace the drum encoder PCB. Ensure that the encoder wheels do not contact
the sensors.
20. Replace the stepper motor assembly (2 screws on the m
motor
otor mount, and 2 screws
on the base plate). Leave the motor mount screws loose for now.
21. Replace the drum belts
belts (see the
the Drum Belts procedure).
22. Tighten outer pulley set screw after belts
belts are installed.
installed.
23. Refer to the Aperture Assembly
Assembly procedure and install tthe
he aperture assembly.
assembly.
5-39
Bearing Endcap
250-0045
Bearing Bearing
250-0045 250-0045
Bearing
250-0045
Endcap
5-23. Drum Inner Bearings

Figure 5-23.
5.10 Replacing EMI Cables

EMI cables are ribbon cables modified with braided shielding and ground lugs. When
replacing, be sure each ground lug is fastened to a ground connection, usually to the
ground plane of the PCB at that end. Use a star washer between the ground lug and the
ground plane. Be sure the ground lug does not short out any component on the PCB.
When dressing the cables, be sure the braided shield does not come in contact with any
electrical component or voltage source.
5-24. The EMI Compliance Cable
Figure 5-24.
5-40
5.11
5.11 FRU Lists
The following tables provide the information necessary to identify and order the correct
FRU.
Please note:
• The table
tabless are liste
listed
d by Figure,
Figure, and
and then by
by Cable,
Cable, Miscel
Miscellan
laneous
eous,, Mobile,
Mobile, and
and
then Special Tools.
• The "Used
"Used On"
On" column
column indica
indicates
tes whic
whichh Discove
Discovery
ry model(
model(s)
s) the
the Part Numb
Numberer is
used; "All" indicates all Discovery models.
5-41
Table 5-1. Electronics Tray FRUs (Figure

(Figure 5-1)
5-1)
Part Number Description Used On
010-0792 Stepper Motor (AY Drive Motor) All
100-0060 Power Supply, 24V +/-15V All
140-0049 TZ Control Board

140-0085 Motor Control Board A and SL
140-0086 Distribution Board All
180-0239 Cable, AY Encoder All
180-0423 Cable, Arm YY Drive, Shielded C a nd W
180-0426 Cable, Arm YY Drive, Shielded A and SL
255-0038 AY Drive Belt All
310-0006 Circuit Breaker, 7.5 Amp All
310-0053 Circuit Breaker, 15 Amp All
310-0018 Circuit Breaker, 20 Amp All
310-0014 Fuse, 10 Amp All

325-0004 Gearcase 50:1 All
Table 5-2. Table Y FRUS (Figure

(Figure 5-2)
5-2)
010-0792 Drive Motor (TY Drive Motor) A and W
140-0085 Motor Control Board A and W
180-0241 Cable, TY Encoder A and W
180-0426 Cable, Table YY Shielded A and W
255-0033 TY Drive Belt A and W
325-0004 Gearcase 50:1 A and W
Table 5-3. Table X FRUs (Figure

(Figure 5-4)
5-4)
010-0792 Drive Motor (TX Drive Motor) All
140-0085 Motor Control Board All
180-0240 Cable, TX Encoder All
180-0422 Cable, Table XX Drive Shielded All
255-0021 TX Drive Belt All
325-0005 Gearcase 30:1 All
5-42
Table 5-4. Lower C-Arm FRUs (Figure

(Figure 5-7)
5-7)
010-0575 X-ray Tank All
010-1547 Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly Ci, Wi
010-1549 Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly C, W, SL, A
ASY-000409 Assy, 10ma X-Ray Controller All
140-0090 C-arm Interface Board All
Table 5-5. Upper C-Arm FRUs (Figure

(Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10)
5-10)
010-0682 Assy, Crosshair Laser Block All
030-3171 Control Panel, Discovery, 7 Button C a nd W
030-3127 Control Panel, Discovery, 9 Button A and SL
465-0042 Switch, Pushbutton w/LED Pnl All
465-0043 Switch, Emergency Stop Anti-Rotate All

ASY-01374 128 Channel Assy 56303 C, W, SL
010-1606 Assy, Discovery Det 216 Chan 2mm A
010-1653 64 Channel Detector Assembly Ci, Wi
ASY-00271 64 Channel Detector Assembly Newer Ci, Wi
and
replacement
for 010-1653
on older Ci,
Wi
140-0087 A/D Converter PCB Ci/Wi with
010-1653
detector
Table 5-6. Computer and Isolation Module
PWR-100-DISCRY Kit, Power, Discovery, 100V All
010-1559 Assembly, Torroid All
120-0049 Monitor, 17" SVGA All
120-0152 Mouse, P/S All
120-0161 Keyboard, P/S All
010-1545 Discovery Computer w/XP All
5-43
Table 5-7. Internal Computer Assemblies

120-0208 5.2 GB Magneto-Optical Drive All
120-0135 PCI SCSI Interface Board All
120-0116 Hard Drive, 20GB minimum All
120-0017 3.5”, 1.44MB Floppy Drive All
120-0241 CD-R/W Drive All
120-0154 Network Card, PCI Communication Command Board All
140-0124 PCI Communications Controller PCB All
180-0136 SCSI Cable, Internal All
129-0159 MODEM PCI All
Table 5-8. Aperture Assembly FRUs (Figure

(Figure 5-16)
5-16)
140-0068 Aperture Motor PCB All

180-0267 Cable, Aperture Motor Signal All
255-0032 Aperture Position Belt All
320-0041 Aperture Stepper Motor All
Table 5-9. Front Drum Assembly FRUs (Figure

(Figure 5-21)
5-21)
010-0627 Filter Drum Stepper Motor Assembly All
140-0089 Drum Encoder Assembly All
255-0030 Drum Wheel Belt 150 Teeth (Inboard) All
255-0031 Drum Wheel Belt 130 Teeth (Outboard) All

Table 5-10. Drum Bearings (Figure
(Figure 5-22)
5-22)
250-0045 Drum Inner Bearing All
250-0046 Drum Outer Bearing All
5-44
Table 5-11. Cables

180-0213 Cable, Fan, X-Ray Controller All
180-0328 Cable, X-Ray Signal All
180-0529 Cable, C-arm Sig Discovery A and SL
180-0344 Cable, Tank Drive All
180-0416 Cable, X-Ray Power C and W
180-0526 Cable, X-Ray Power A and SL
180-0417 Cable, Safety Switch All
180-0533 Cable, Operator Panel All
180-0531 Cable, AR Drive A and SL
180-0419 Cable, DAS Communication All
180-0420 Cable, C-Arm Signal All
180-0421 Cable, C-Arm Power All
180-0422 Cable, Table XX Drive C and W
180-0532 Cable, Table X Drive A and SL
180-0423 Cable, Arm YY Drive C and W
180-0426 Cable, Table YY Drive W
189-0543 Cable, Arm YY Drive A and SL
180-0530 Cable, C-arm Pwr A and SL
180-0292 Cable, Laser Pwr All
180-0534 Cable, Table Z Drive A and SL
180-0527 Cable, Ped Right A and SL
180-0528 Cable, Ped Left A and SL

180-0185 Cable, A/D Analog Data A and older Ci/Wi with 010-
1653 detector
180-0189 Cable, A/D Digital Data A and older Ci/Wi with 010-
1653 detector
180-0190 Cable, Power Multipleer A and older Ci/Wi with 010-
1653 detector
190-0619 Cable, TZ Power A and SL
Table 5-12. Miscellaneous

010-1578 Cable Kit, Discovery C & W C a nd W
010-1556 Cable Kit, Discovery A & SL A and SL
5-45
Table 5-13. Mobile

010-0980 ASSY, L'KG PIN Y CARR, MOBILE A and SL
010-0981 ASSY, L'KG PIN C-ARM MOBILE A and SL
010-0993 ASSY,CARR L'KG PIN,MOBILE C&W
Table 5-14. Special Tools

099-0110 Filter Drum Alignment Pin All
099-0111 Aperture Alignment Pin All
099-0145 Aperture Alignment Block All
099-0264 Communications Controller Board Loopback Plug All
099-0269 24 Inch Digital Level All
099-0566 X-ray Leakage Test Tool All
099-0715 X-ray Test Pattern All

099-0716 Step Wedge Penetrometer All
180-0287 Tape Switch Eliminator Jumper All
TLS-00080 X-ray Fan Beam Alignment tool All
5-46
Section 6
FAULT ISOLATION
This section provides information to help identify the source of a problem in the Discovery
system. The three general categories are:
Problem... Refer to the section titled... On page...
Dead system, or power problem Power Problems 6-1
Scanner motion problem Motion Problems 6-2
Computer display problem Display Problems 6-5
6.1 Before Starting

Before starting, make sure the software configuration is compatible with the scanner.
6.2 Software Configuration

To check the software revision and loaded
loa ded options, from the Discovery Main Screen, select
Utilities|System Configuration. On the System Configuration screen, you will find a drop-
down list box labeled "Software:" By dropping down this list, you will be shown the release
version of the Discovery software and all loaded options. The release version should be aatt a
minimum level of 12.0.
6.3 Hardware Configuration

When troubleshooting, it is sometimes helpful to observe the indicators available on the PCBs and
other FRUs. Many components of the system have
ha ve LEDs indicating the presence of ne necessary
cessary
voltages and the state of some signals. Section 8 is helpful in locating these LEDs and observing
the state of the system.
6.4 Power Problems

Table 6-1. Power Component Locations
Component... Where…
Main circuit breaker Rear of foot end pedestal
Power switch Control panel
LED’s for DC voltages Distribution Board and most driver
and control PCBs
Emerge
Emergenc
ncy
y st
stop sw
swit
itch
ches
es an
and
d cir
circcui
uitts Con
ontr
trol
ol pan
panel
Computer power and operation Computer console power strip
6-1
The following suggestions apply to a Discovery system exhibiting a power problem:

If... Check... Refer to...
System "dead” Main breaker left pedestal Check Power Line
Li ne Voltage
Emergency Stop or Instrument On/Off heading, Section 3
switch on Control Panel Check fuses
Main power suspect Check AC input voltage Power Module heading,
Power cable to the Torroid Assembly Section 2
Suspected Power Module Check AC Voltage at Scanner DIN Rail Power Module FRU s
problem heading, Section 5
Suspected DC power supply Check LED’s on Distribution Board for Check fuses
problem all DC voltages (lit if present)
2
244V LED not lit All tape switches and connectors (tape sw Check fuses
reads 120W when open Distribution board,
Emergency Stop Switch and associated Figure 5-1
circuitry
Computer is off
Hologic software running
(check error log)
Syst
System
em do
doees n
not
ot sta
tarrt u
up
p Sys
Syste
temmp prrop
oper
erly
ly co
con
nfi
figu
gurred (see
see “Before
Starting” on page 6-1
Before starting, make sure the software
configuration is compatible with the
scanner.
Emergency Stop switch in “On” (Out)
position
Co
Cons
nsol
olee doe
doess n
not
ot po
powe
werr u
up
p Main
Main ci
circ
rcui
uitt b
bre
reak
aker
er,, pow
power
er stri
strip
p
Also...
Problem... Possible cause... Corrective action...
Laser does not Safety feature if system thinks C-arm
C -arm Restart in Service mode
turn on is at head of table From Service Utilities, run SQDRIVER
At CARM$$$$> prompt, type
LASER_SAFTY
LASER_SAFT Y 0 <Enter>
Exit from SQDRIVER
Reboot the computer
6.5 Motion Problems

Motion problems are failures related to movement of the table and/or C-arm. In most (but
not all) cases, an error message accompanies Discovery motion problems. Therefore, it is
good troubleshooting practice to check the error log (C:\ERRLOG.DA
(C:\ERRLOG.DAT T file) for
occurrences of motion related problems. The following suggestions apply to a Discovery
system that exhibits a motion problem.
Start by identifying the bad axis (if it is not obvious). Ask the operator for symptoms and
check the error log. See Figure 6-1 for possible motion directions.
6-2
Table 6-2. Motion Component Locations

Refer to the Figure Below
ARM-Y TX TY
Drive Belt Figure 5-1 Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2
Drive Motor Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2

Driver Board Figure 5-1 Figure 5-1 Figure 5-1
Encoder Figure 5-1
Motor Controller Board Figure 5-1 FigureFigure
FigureFigure 5-2 5-2
Distribution Board Figure 5-1
Operator Control Panel Figure 5-2
Control Panel PCB Figure 5-2
Computer
PCI Communications Controller
Board
AY
AR
TZ
TX
TY
6-1. Scanner Motion Directions|

Figure 6-1.
Table 6-3. Motion Component Locations

Refer to the Figure 6-1
ARM-Y ARM-R TX TY TZ
Drive Belt Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2
Drive Motor Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2
Driver Board Figure 5-1
Encoder Figure 5-1
Encoder Belt
6-3
Motor Controller Board Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2

Distribution Board Figure 5-1
Oper Cntrl Panel Figure 5-2
Control Panel PCB Figure 5-2
Computer
PC Communications
Controller Board
Table 6-4. TX, TY, TZ, AR, AY

Check... Refer to...
Belt Motor Controller Board heading,
Encoder coupling Figure 5-1
5-1,, Figure 5-2
5-2,, , , ,
Motor controller board Section 8, PCB SUMMARY INFORMATION
Motor/gear case for the motor subsystem
in question
TY (on A & W models only)
Left and right end panels on table for proper installation. This
may cause problems if reversed. (Left 030-1376, right 030-
1838).
CAUTION: Running any motor subsystem to its limit (in either direction) does not
damage the motor. However, if the motor encoder is not properly
calibrated, it may be damaged.
Table 6-5. TX, TY, AY

To... Run... Refer to...
Perform simple table and C-arm Motor Control Pad The Discovery Main Menu, select:
movements (computer motion Utility
control) Emergency Motion
Perform precise table and C-arm SQDRIVER Motor Calibration heading, and
movements Motor$XX (for the specific motor),
Section 4
Monitor all motion parameters
Troubleshoot problems encountered
Troubleshoot Control Panel heading, Section 2
initiating motion from the Operator's
Control Panel
Run the hardware checker Hardware checker SQVERIFY
6-4
6.6 Control Panel Problems

If a Control Panel problem is suspected, or if control
c ontrol panel functions are not responding,
use the SQVERIFY program to help isolate the problem. From Discovery Main Menu,
select Utilities|Service Utilities|SQVERIFY. Select the Panel test function and run all
subtests.
6.7 Display Problems

Display problems can be grouped into four general categories: vertical stripe, horizontal
stripe, noise (dots, speckles, etc.), and no display.
Table 6-6. Display Component Locations
Component See...
Detector Boards Figure 5-11
Aperture Assembly
C-Arm Interface Board Figure 5-7

Filter Drum Assembly
Filter Drum Assembly (X-Ray Beam Alignment) Page 4-4
Detector Assembly (X-Ray Beam Alignment) Page 4-4
Printer (if quality is bad on printout or no bone displayed).
X-Ray Tank and X-Ray Controller Figure 5-7
Collimator Figure 5-7
6.7.1 Vertical Stripe

This type of display problem is most likely related to the detector subsystem. The
following suggestions apply to a Discovery system that exhibits a vertical stripe in the
display:
Detectors Check for signal strength and noise in graphic mode
of X-Ray Survey (see “X-Ray Survey” on page 9-1 9-1))
Narrow vertical stripe - bad detector Data Acquisition System heading, Section 2, for
block diagrams and interconnection charts or run the
DAS tests in SQVERIFY.
Foreign matter (especially metallic) anywhere

in the X-ray beam path in the aperture slit,
collimator cup, etc.
Also...
Run the hardware checker SQVERIFY
6-5
6.7.2 Horizontal Stripe

This type of display problem is most likely related to the line voltage, bad cables,
ca bles, or X-ray
subsystem. The following suggestions apply to a Discovery system that exhibits a
horizontal stripe in the display:
Line voltage/Power ground see “Check Tube kV Peak Potential” on page 3-28
Tube kV Peak Potential see “Check Tube kV Peak Potential” on page 3-28
Tube Current see “Check Tube Current ” on page 3-30
Filter drum turning
Filter drum belt
Green LEDs on C-Arm Interface Figure 5-7
5-7,, Section 8
Banding–variations in horizontal X-ray controller
controller,, Figure 5-7
stripe intensity,
intensity, usually spread
across display.
Also...
Run the hardware checker see “SQVERIFY” on page 9-10
6-6
6.7.3 Noise
The term "noise" is used here to describe any flaw, or irregularity in the display (dots,
specks, uneven lines, etc.) or similar problem. The following suggestions apply to a
Discovery system that exhibits noise in the display:
Tube kV peak potential see “Check Tube kV Peak Potential” on page 3-28
Tube current see “Check Tube Current ” on page 3-30
X-ray beam alignment see “X-Ray Beam Alignment ” on page 4-4
Signal strength and noise see “X-Ray Survey” on page 9-1
Aperture position and aperture belt see “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9
Filter Drum is turning Figure 5-16
Filter Drum belt Figure 5-21
Green LED’s on C-Arm Interface board Figure 5-7,
5-7, Section 8
Aperture plate assembly, first Figure 5-17
precollimator,, ssecond
precollimator econd precollimator and
collimator for specs of lead and other
deformities.
Also...
6.7.4 No Display
The term "no display" is used here to describe:
• no scan display
• co
comp
mple
lettely
ely whi
whitte scr
scree
eenn
• co
comp
mple
lete
telly dar
darkk scr
scree
een
n
• “blo
“blotc
tchy
hy”” or
or ““gr
grai
ainy
ny”” dis
displ
play
ay
This type of display problem is usually related to the detector subsystem or the X-ray
subsystem.
The following suggestions apply to a Discovery system that exhibits no scan display:
Tube kV peak potential see “Check Tube kV Peak Potential” on page 3-28
Tube current see “Check Tube Current ” on page 3-30
X-ray production see “Field Service Preventive Maintenance” on page 7-1
Signal strength and noise see “X-Ray Survey” on page 9-1
Filter Drum is turning Figure 5-6
5-6,, Figure 5-18 through Figure 5-23
Filter Drum belt Figure 5-18,
5-18, Figure 5-23
Green LED’s on C-Arm Interface board Figure 5-6,
5-6, Section 8
6-7
No display may indicate a bad Detector see “Data Acquisition System (C, W, and SL) ” on
Assembly page 2-20
Ch
Chec
eck
k ap
aper
erttur
uree po
posi
siti
tion
on an
and
d ape
pert
rtur
uree bel
eltt see “Aperture Calibration ” on page 4-9
Also...
6.8 Targeting/Laser Problems

Object being Detector array.
array. It may be too far forward or Figure 5-11
scanned appears back inside the upper arm assembly.
to the left or right Laser alignment Page 4-26
of the scan window Run... De
Detector Flattening Page 4-29
6.9 Data Communications Problems

Data communications problems occur between the computer and the scanner. Refer to the
following table:
Error messages usually
include the keywords: Check the:
Message Packet Digital Signal Processor. If IC is not seated properly
properly,, replace the
Sent board.
Received Data, power, and ribbon cables for proper seating.
Device states in the SQDRIVER for errors. If a device is stated as
“E_TIMEOUT”, it is suspect.
6-8
6.10 Area/BMD/BMC/CV Specification Problems

If... Possible cause Refer to...
X-ray beam X-ray beam alignment on aperture 7. Signal output level should page 4-4
misaligned not rise or fall by a significant margin.

X-ray beam Measure X-ray peak potential and tube current waveforms.
w aveforms. Page 3-30,
3-30,
quality problems Make sure they are both stable and within specs. Page 4-4
Check X-Ray Survey bar graph for shifting or “dancing” X-rays.
If so, test X-Ray Controller.
Check A/C line for stability (voltage and frequency).
Mechanical frame Check motor drive belts for excessive play. Page7-1
Page 7-1
problems Ensure all hardware on the arm, frame, and drives are secure
s ecure and
clear of moving assemblies (C-arm, etc.)
Mechanical motor Chec
Check
k ffor
or lo
loos
osee ass
assem
embl
blie
ies:
s: De
Dete
tect
ctor
or As
Asse
semb
mblyly Figure 5-8
drive problems X-ray Tank Figure 5-6
X-ray Controller Figure 5-18
Aperture Assembly Figure 5-18
The bone and/or tissue segments in the filter drum may be Figure 5-18
defective or out of spec. If so, replace and restart system testing. through
Figure 5-24
6.11 X-Ray Problems

The following lists some common X-ray problems and some suggested solutions. Refer to
Section Two Functional Description for more information on the X-Ray subsystem.
6.11.1 No X-Rays
X-Ray (24VDC
Distribution LED)
Board on lit
is not X-ray EnableBoard
Distribution LED should
on Control
be onPanel and
“NO A/C Line Interrupts” Interlock inhibit Figure 5-1,

5-1,
message at start-up 24VDC from LVPS, power distribution Figure 5-2.
5-2.
X-ray Controller interlock switch Figure 5-14.
5-14.
Computer problems (CommCon) Figure 5-16
Defective Control Panel I/F
XRC Power Cable/Connector problems
6.12 X-Ray Alignment Problems

6.12.1 X-Ray beam does not align properly
If the X-ray beam does not align properly per the procedure, follow these suggestions.
1. Try to
to align the
the X-ray beam
beam to the drop-of
drop-offf points
points per the alignmen
alignmentt procedure.
procedure.
Recheck the position of aperture 10 with the alignment block and pin. If the
6-9
block and pin line up, the alignment brackets need to be repositioned. (Check
captive screws and jam nuts.)
2. If you align
align the X-ray
X-ray beam to both
both drop-off
drop-off points
points but the range
range is narrow
narrow,, (on
aperture 10 you should have 3-8 turns of the hex driver) the collimator cup and/or
the pre-collimator disk on the X-ray tank may be misaligned.

Using glow paper, assure that the X-ray beam is hitting the front and back on the
detector array equally. If not, this may indicate that the X-ray tube has shifted
within the letharge. Perform further verification before replacing the X-ray tank.
3. If the aperture
aperture and detector
detector array window
window are
are aligned,
aligned, remove
remove the apertu
aperture
re
assembly and inspect the cup and disk. Look for any de
debris
bris or lead fragments.
When replacing the cup and disk, align the apertures as closely as possible to the
detector array window.
window.
6.12.2 System Fails X-Ray Beam Alignment Verification

Verification
Align the X-ray beam and recalibrate the aperture. If this fails, inspect the aperture
assembly for any loose

aperture assembly hardware
encoder
encoder’ or excessive
’s belt tension. Tensiplay
Tension in the be
on should aperture plate.
set to 2.5 lbs.Check
If thethe
belt is too
tight, it may cause encoder readback
readbac k errors and cause the calibration program to fail.
6.13 Detector Flattening Problems

6.13.1 System Consistently Fails the Detector Flattening Pro-
cedure
1. Check for loose,
loose, misali
misaligned,
gned, or defectiv
defectivee Aperture
Aperture Assembly
Assembly,, Collimator
Collimator Cup,
Cup, or
Pre-collimator Disk. (Refer to X-ray Alignment Problems above.)
2. If the X-rays
X-rays are
are unstable
unstable or “dancing”,
“dancing”, monitor
monitor the
the X-rays
X-rays on the X-RA
X-RAYY SUR-
VEY bar graph screen for any amplitude shifting of the defective signal display.
3. If shifting
shifting is
is taking
taking place, check/rep
check/replace
lace the X-ray
X-ray Controll
Controller
er Assembly
Assembly and X-X-
ray Tank connections. Check the X-ray peak potential and tube current wave-
forms and monitor for waveform distortion. This may indicate a defective
defec tive inter-
connection cable, X-ray Tank, or power supply.
4. Check output
output signal
signal level.
level. You
You may have
have to reset
reset the ADC
ADC gain level.
5. Check for
for bad detectors
detectors in the
the Detector
Detector Assembly
Assembly.. Run the DAS
DAS test in
in SQVER-
IFY.
6. Check the Filter
Filter Drum to see
see that it is installe
installed
d correctly
correctly.. Check the segment
segment
readback values in X Ray Survey with X rays ON.
7. and
Check for
for leadAssembly.
Aperture fragment
fragments
Assembly. s in the
the X-ray
X-ray beam. Inspec
Inspectt the Collimat
Collimator
or Cup, disk,
6-10
8. If a failure
failure occurs
occurs during
during a whole body
body,, recheck the
the TX motor
motor cal files.
files. The X-
rays may be hitting the table edge.
e dge. Make sure the drives are op
operating
erating normally.
normally.
Examine the Detector Flattening scans for any unusual indications using Utili-
ties|Scan File Plot and selecting the WBAIRQC scan. If an error message is
displayed, go to “Detector Flattening ” on page 4-29.
4-29.
6.14 Laser Problems
WARNING: The laser beam can cause

c ause serious retinal damage if focused directly into
the eye. Be sure to turn the laser OFF when visually inspecting the shutter
and aperture.
When troubleshooting the laser, refer to the following:

Make sure... Refer to...
Shutter is open and not obstructing the beam Page 5-29,
5-29, Figure 5-14
Motor drives have been calibrated Pages 3-33 to 3-42
If... Suggestions
(Software is inhibiting laser when table head is near the laser)
Move the C-arm to the center of the table and retry.
Do the following:
1. Check black
black and
and yellow
yellow wires
wires from
from the C-arm
C-arm Interf
Interface
ace PCB
PCB to the
the
Laser does
not turn on underside of the Detector Assembly.
Assembly.
2. Shut off
off instrument
instrument power (Emerg
(Emergency
ency Stop
Stop Switch
Switch on Control
Control
Panel).
3. Discon
Disconnect
nect laser
laser power
power connect
connector
or..
4. Connect a DVM to the
the plug coming
coming from the Detector
Detector Assembly
Assembly..
5. Tur
urn
n las
laser
er po
powe
werr on.
on.
6. Check
Check co
conne
nnect
ctor
or for
for +5V
+5VDC
DC..
Check C-arm Interface Board, Distribution Board, all cables.
Check computer.
At installation only, type “laser safety=0” in SQDRIVER and reboot.
Check AY
AY motor calibration file. If data is corrupt or uncalibrated, laser may
not turn on, despite position of C-arm.
6-11
Laser Check laser block assembly mirrors for breaks, cracks, or misalignment
crosshair
Check that shutter is open
beam is
defective Check that aperture is unobstructed
Loosen
10)
10) the securing screw to adjust the laser to perpendicular
p erpendicular (see Figure 5-
Check laser button on Control Panel

Laser does Check control panel laser switch at PANEL tests in SQVERIFY
not turn off
Check for bad:
C-arm Interface Board
Distribution Board
Interconnect cable
Computer assembly
6.15 Oil leakage

If the tank assembly is leaking oil, you may have
hav e to tighten the screws on the tank cover. It
is important that you tighten the screws using the proper torque specifications and the
proper sequence.
6.15.1 The Torque Specifications

The torque settings are listed in the following table:
Location Torque Specifications Set wrench to…
Lexan Cup 10-12 in-lb 11 in-lb
Bladder Gasket 10-12 in-lb 11 in-lb

Transformer Seal 70 in-lb 70 in-lb
Tank Cover Gasket 36-40 in-lb 38 in-lb
6.15.2 Tank Top Cover Components and Screw Location

The following figure shows the Tank Top Cover and the locations of the seals:
6-12
Lexan Cup Bladder Gasket

Tank Cover
Gasket
Xformer (hidden)
Seal
Front
6-2. Tank Assembly Top view

Figure 6-2.
6.15.3 Tightening
Tightening the Lexan Cup Screws
Tighten the Lexan Cup seals in the following order using the torque settings in the above
table:
7
1 4
5 6
3 2
8 Lexan Cup Screw Tightening Order

6-3.
Figure 6-3.
6.15.4 Tightening the Bladder Gasket Screws

Using the torque settings in the table above and referring to the figure below, tighten the
Bladder Gasket screws as follows:
1. Tight
Tighten
en screw
screw #1,
#1, then
then #2,
#2, then
then #3, and
and then
then #4.
#4.
2. After screw #4,
#4, continue
continue around
around the
the edge of the gasket
gasket in a clockwi
clockwise
se directio
direction,
n,
tightening alternate screws, until returning to #4.
3. Continue
Continue around
around the edge of the gasket
gasket in a clockwis
clockwisee direction,
direction, tighteni
tightening
ng all the
the
remaining screws.
6-13
1 4
3 2
6-4. Bladder Gasket Screws

Figure 6-4.
6.15.5 Tightening the Transformer Seal Screws

Tighten the Transformer
Transformer Seal screws using the torque settings in the table above and the
sequence in the figure below.
2 4
1 3
6-5. Transformer Screws
Figure 6-5.
6.15.6 Tightening the Tank Cover Gasket Screws

Refer to the figure below and the torque settings in the table above and tighten the Tank
Cover Gasket screws as follows:
1. Tighten
Tighten screws
screws #1 through
through #6 in the
the sequence
sequence as indicated.
indicated.
2. Starting
Starting at the screw
screw next to
to screw #6,
#6, move in a clockwis
clockwisee direction
direction and tighten
tighten
alternate screws.
3. Repeat this
this pattern
pattern in
in a clockwise
clockwise direction
direction and tighten
tighten all remaining
remaining screws.
screws.
6-14
Note: The three Tank

Tank Cover Gasket screws at the rear of the tank and shown
below are the most critical locations for oil leaks. Always check these
screws if a leak is suspected.
4. Important: Do not remove screws located on the tank. There are no field
replaceable units or
loosen or remove anyrequired
screwsadjustments
on the tank. inside the tank, so there is no reason to
5
1 L
3 A
C
I
T
I
R
FRONT C
T
S
O
M
6 2 4
6-6. Tank Cover Gasket

Figure 6-6.
6.16 Miscellaneous Problems

Problem... Symptom... Solution...
Detector X-Ray Survey bar graph is Replace the Detector Assembly
ramped, or it appears as 3 or 4
separate ramped sections.
X-ray lamp Turns on with X-rays off Replace the Distribution Board
System Fails HI-Pot test Check all ground connections
Make sure ground wire terminals are secure
Check crimped terminals
Hi voltage Buzzing sound from X-ray tank Check torque on transformer bolts
transformer assembly
System No power Check Emergency Stop Switch
Check main power cord
Check Torroid Assembly circuit breaker
Check AC input voltage
6-15

6-16
Section 7
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
This section lists the procedures that should be performed by trained service personnel at least
once per year, and preferably at six-month intervals.
NOTICE
The Discovery system meets applicable FDA radiation performance standards through
its useful and expected life provided no components or parts are removed from the
system and no unauthorized adjustment
ad justment or unauthorized replacement of certified
components is perform
7.1 Customer Preventive Maintenance

Hologic requires that the customer run a daily QC scan of the spine phan
phantom
tom supplied with the
Discovery, and add that scan to the QC database. If the CV of the database exceeds 0.8% the
Discovery,
customer is asked to inform Hologic Field Service.
The customer is further advised to perform a weekly backup of the patient
p atient database (Backup) and
archive QC scans along with their patient scans.
No other regular maintenance activity is recommended or required of the customer.
7.2 Field Service Preventive Maintenance

Hologic recommends that the following procedures be performed by trained service personnel at
least once per year and preferably at six-month intervals:
[ ] Perform an Archive of all scans and a System Backup.
[ ] Exit QD
QDR
R without shutdown,
shutdown, then delete all temporary files (.tmp) on the
the hard drive.
[ ] In the QDR software, run RECONCILE to compact the database.
[ ] Check the QC database for any problems (e.g. drift,
drift, etc.).
[ ] Check ERRLOG.DA
ERRLOG.DAT
T and ERROR.LOG
ERROR.L OG
[ ] Check X-ray tube voltage and current as described in the INST
INSTALLA
ALLATION
TION section of this
manual. With X-rays on acquire screen captures of the X-Ray Survey bar graph screen with
the X-ray beam alignment tool installed and with the alignment tool removed. Print both
screen captures and include with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.
patient dose as described in the INST
[ ] Measure scatter, leakage, and patient INSTALLA
ALLATION
TION section of this
manual.
[ ] Check X-ray beam alignment as described in the ALIGNMEN
ALIGNMENT
T AND CALIBRA
CALIBRATION
TION section
of this manual.
7-1
[ ] On A and W system models, perform the Table T Top

op Radiographic Uniformity test.
test.
Print a copy of the test
te st results and include it with the other paperwork being returned
re turned
to Hologic.
[ ] Run 10 spine scans and check calibration (do not recalibrate unless necessary).
[ ] Print copies of the baseline phantom scan, recent phantom scan, and the results of scan
averaging for the 10 spine scans in the previous step. Compare these printouts with
those from the last PM for possible problems, and send the printouts to Hologic to be
kept with the service records for this system.
[ ] From the Discovery Main Menu, select QC|QC Data Management|Plot. Setup the
Discovery Main
QC Plot to include QC scans from at
a t least the last wo years. Display and print a copy
of the BMD, BMC, Area, HiAir, and LoAir plots to be included in the paperwork
[ ] During a scan, verify that
that pressing the red Emergency switch immediately stops
Emergency STOP switch
all C-Arm motion, table motion, and X-ray production. X-ray production should be
monitored by a Victoreen 450P or equivalent.
[ ]T
Test
est all tape
tape switches. The tape switches are located along the length
length of the front and
back of the table, and mounted on the frame under the table. Verify
Verify that pressing a tape
switch immediately stops all C-Arm motion, table motion, and X-ray production. X-
ray production should be monitored by a Victoreen 450P or equivalent.
Note: The front (table) tape switch is disabled until the C-arm is at 0 °, so this switch
should be checked with the C-arm at a position greater than 30 °.
[ ] Replace (if necessary) and adjust the motor drive belts as follows:
Note: Detailed instructions for drive belt replacement and adjustments can be found
in the REMOVE AND REPLACE section of this manual.
[ ] For each drive belt (C-Arm Y,
Y, C-Arm R, Table
Table X, and Table
Table Y) perform the following:
• Loosen
Loosen the
the 2 mount
mounting
ing bolts
bolts hold
holding
ing the tensio
tension
n block.
block.
• Tighten
Tighten the
the tension
tension nut so that
that the spring
spring is compressed
compressed to 7/8 inch.
inch. The bracket
with the bracket cut). For the AR tension spring, adjust to 7/8" from the inside of
one washer to the inside of the other.
• Tighten
Tighten the two mounting
mounting bolts holding
holding each
each drive
drive belt’
belt’ss ttensio
ension
n block.
block.
Note: It is not necessary to perform the MOTOR calibration procedures after
tensioning the motor drive belts.
[ ] Ensure that all cable connections are tight.
tight.
[ ] Run CHECKDISK on the C drive. This utility
utility program can be started by clicking on
start|Run…, then typing CHKDSK, and then clicking the OK button. DO NOT run
Scandisk on any Archive media.
[ ] Run Dis
Disk
k Defragmenter toto and compact and re-order the files on the computer's hard
c licking on Start|Run…, then typing
disk. This utility program can be started by clicking
DEFRAG, and then clicking the OK button.
7-2
[ ] Run a computer virus checker (any major brand that is current for latest
latest virus types).
[ ] Clean the fan filters, paying special attention to the computer fan filter.
filter.
[ ] Clean all exterior metal surfaces and wipe off the rails.
[ ] Clean the monitor screen, keyboard, and mouse ball rollers.
[ ] Clean the inkjet printer rollers and ink cartridge electrical contacts with isopropyl
alcohol.
7.2.1 Guide Rail and Bearing Maintenance

On all Discovery models, a guide rail and two guide
gu ide bearings (AY)
(AY) are located at the lower
back of the C-arm. Another guide rail and two guide bearings (TX) are located on the right
side running front to back just below the table. (See Figure 7-1).
7-1).
1. Clean the
the AY
AY and the
the TX guide
guide rails
rails using
using a dry,
dry, clean cloth.
cloth.
Note: DO NOT use solvents such as alcohol or WD-40. If a solvent is needed to
remove dirt and/or gum buildup on the rail, be sure to thoroughly dry the
rail before moving the bearings. The solvent may harm the bearing
be aring grease.
Motion
Motio n
Guide Bearing
Grease Fitting
Seal
Guide Rail
7-1. Guide Bearing and Rail

Figure 7-1.
7-3
2. Gr
Greas
easee the
the guid
guidee bear
bearin
ings
gs..
Note: The bearings must be greased every 100km (62mi) of travel, depending
on usage. This may range between
be tween one and two years. The following table
lists more information about the grease to be used.
Generic Brand Names Manufacturer
EP-2 Lithium Beacon 325 ESSO
soap-based grease Alvania Grease RA Shell
Mobilux Grease No. 2 Mobil
Isoflex Super LDS 18 Kluber
Consult Hologic Field Service for more information on obtaining the proper tools,
material, and procedure.
7-4
Section 8
PCB SUMMARY
SUMM ARY INFORMA
INFORMATION
TION
Distribution Board
LED’s1 Signal Voltage Source Jumpers Refer to...
D1 On +7VDC Int Voltage Reg. JP1 (panel) Out
D32 Off TZ Drive - - JP2 (dist) Out
D5 On +5VDC Int Voltage Reg. JP3 (C-arm) Out

D7 On +28VDC Int Low Voltage
Power Supply Circuit Breakers Figure 5-1
D9 On +15VDC Int Low Voltage CB Drive Normall
Power Supply y
D10 On -15VDC Int Low Voltage 1 TZ In A&SL

Power Supply
- - +24VDC Int Low Voltage 2 TY In
Power Supply
D112 Off TY DRIVE 3 TX In
D122 Off TX DRIVE 4 AR In A&SL
D132 Off AR DRIVE 5 AY In
D142 Off AY DRIVE
Notes: Voltage indicato

indicatorsrs = green; motor drive status = red
If red led is on, there is a failure in the PCB. The CB should be tripped.
PCI Communications Command Board

Jumpers Refer to...
JP1 (IRQ) at 10 In
JP2 (IRQ) Out Figure 5-17
JP3 (IREQA) Out
JP4 (IREQB) In
JP5 (E-OUT) at C In
8-1
Stepper Motor Controller

Signal Signal Source Jumpers and Switches Refer to...
D3 On +24VDC E xt Signal Dist. W1 (SYSRESET) In
D6 On +5VDC I nt . Voltage
Reg.
- - -5VDC I nt . Voltage
Reg.
D7 (4 LED pack)
MEN On Note: All 4 LED’s are On
CPU Flash solid when the selected
DIR Off motor drive is engaged.
STEP Off Set to...
Stepper motor (AR) SW1 6 Figure 5-9
Stepper motor (AY SW1 7 Figure 5-1

Stepper motor (TX) SW1 4 Figure 5-3
Stepper motor (TY) SW1 5 Figure 5-2
TZ Drive (A and SL Only)

LEDs Voltage /
Signal Source Jumpers Refer To...
D11 On +5VDC Int. Voltage JP7 In
Reg. (NORMAL)
D12 On +24VDC Ext. Signal JP8 (TEST) Out Figure 5-1
Dist.
D8 Flash STATUS - - NORMAL/ NORM
(4 LED SERVICE
group)
- - -5VDC Int. Voltage UP/DOWN N/A
Reg. SERVICE
- - +3VDC Int. Voltage
Reg.
- - -3VDC Int. Voltage
Reg.
- - 240VAC Ext. Power JP6 Left Ped.
Cons. (pin 4 to
5) Right
Ped. (pin
1 to 2)
8-2
128-Channel Detector Assembly (C, W and SL Models only)

LED’s Voltage Voltage Source Jumpers Refer to...
D4 On +12VDC Int. Voltage Reg. J1 (Run/Test) In

D5 On -12VDC Int. Voltage Reg. J2 (Run/Test) In
D6 On VCC Int. Voltage Reg.
D7 On +5VDC Int. Voltage Reg.
U14 (LED display) Flickers “1” on bootup, then lock on “2”.
Potentiometer R18 (A/D GAIN CNTRL) See procedure in Section 4. Page 4-26
Detector Array Assembly (A Model only)

Source Source Refer To...
+15VDC Ext. ADC PCB
-15VDC Ext. ADC PCB Figure 5-8
+5VDC Ext. ADC PCB
+12VDC Int. Voltage Reg.
-12VDC Int. Voltage Reg.
ADC (A Model only)

LEDs Voltage Voltage Source Jumpers Refer to...
D1 On VCC Int. Voltage Reg. JP3 (GROUND) Out
D2 On +5VDC Int. Voltage Reg. JP5 (HI/LO RES)
D3 On +12VDC Int. Voltage Reg. A In
D4 On -12VDC Int. Voltage Reg. Figure 5-11
D5 On -5VDC Int. Voltage Reg.
- - +7VDC Ext C-Arm Int. Bd.
- - +/-15VDC Ext C-Arm Int. Bd.
U14 (LED display) Flickers “1” on bootup, then lock on “2”.
Potentiometer P3 (A/D GAIN CNTRL) See procedure in Section 4. Page 4-26
8-3
C-Arm Interface
LED’s Signal Voltage Source Jumpers Refer to...
D1 On +28VDC Ext Signal Dist. JP7 DRUM Out
D3 On +24VDC Ext Signal Dist. JP8 MAIN Out
D6 On +5VDC Int. Voltage W1, NORMAL(1-2) In
Reg. W2 TEST (2-3)
- - +7VDC Int. Voltage W3 SYS-RESET In
Reg.
- - +15VDC Ext Signal Dist. W4 TEST- Out
MODE
- - -15VDC Ext Signal Dist. W5 Safety In
switches
Drum JP15 Redundant for
D7 On LOCKED W5 may be Out if W5 is Figure 5-6
In
D8 Flash- DRUM AT
ing TOP
X-Ray
D9 Off X-RAY
CPU
ERROR
D10 Off X-RAY
ENABLE
D11 On X-RAY
CPU OK
D12 Off X-RAY
FAULT
8-4
Section 9
SOFTWARE TOOLS
The Discovery system software includes software tools to troubleshoot the system. They are:
• X-Ra
X-Ray
y Sur
Surve
vey
y Too
Tooll Dis
Disk
k
• SQDRIVER
• SQVERIFY
• Emer
Emerge
genc
ncy
y Moti
Motion
on (SQ
(SQKE
KEYP
YPAD
AD))
9.1 X-Ray Survey

The X-Ray Survey is a 32-bit
3 2-bit utility that tests the functions of X-Ray generation and detection for
the system. This utility is used by Hologic manufacturing and service engineers only.
9.1.1
1. Invokingas theX-Ray
Log on as Fiel
Field SerSurvey
d Servic
vicee and start
start the
the QDR
QDR Softwa
Software
re in Serv
Service
ice mode
mode..
2. Click Utility > Service Utilities > X-Ray Survey and the X-Ray Survey utility screen
will appear (see Figure 9-1).
9-1).
Main Display
AW-00335_001-0902
Display Controls Close utility
9-1. The Main Display Controls

Figure 9-1.
The utility screen is broken into three parts:
9-1
1. The Main
Main Display
Display shows either
either a bar-grap
bar-graph
h or numeric
numeric fields
fields for each detector
detector
depending on which Display button is selected.
2. The Display
Display Controls
Controls that
that affect
affect the
the data
data shown in the
the main display
display.. Not all con-
con-
trols are used by the field engineer.
3. The Close button which exits the utility.
9.1.2 The Main Display

The Main Display provides data in two forms depending
de pending upon which display bu
button
tton is
selected.
AW-00335_001-0902
9-2. The Main Display Controls

Figure 9-2.
When the Graph button is active and the system is producing X-Rays, the data is
presented in a bar graph (see Figure 9-3).
9-3). Scale markings on the bottom of the graph
indicate detector numbers. Scale markings aling the sides indicate the numeric value of the
column height. A label alone the left half of the graph indicates which numeric value for
the column is being displayed (for field engineering purposes this will always be Volts). A
label above the right half of the graph indicates which drum segment is bebeing
ing displayed
(for feild engineering purpose this will always be Air Segment). The bar grapg shaded
green is the hi voltage, the bar graph shaded brown is lo voltage.
9-2
AW-00335_001-0903
9-3. X-Ray Data as a Bar Graph

Figure 9-3.
When the Table button is active and the system is producing X-Rays, numeric data is
preserved (see Figure 9-3).
9-3). A label above the left half of the graph indicates which value is
being displayed (for field engineering purpose this will always be Volts). The display has a
vertical scroll bar on the right because only a sixth of the data for aall
ll of the detectors is
showing at one time.
AW-00335_001-0904
9-4. X-Ray
Figure 9-4. Data as a Raw Data
9.1.3 The Display Controls
9.1.3.1 The Display Controls

The Display Controls can be broken into four functional areas:
• Cont
Contrrols
ols ssta
tarrting with Xrays (F2) OFF/ON
ting wit
• Cont
Contrrols
ols ssta
tarrting with Test Signals
ting wit
• Cont
Contrrols
ols sta
starrting with Display
ting wit
• Cont
Contrrols
ols sta
starrting with Status Bits
ting wit
9-3
9.1.3.2 Controls starting with Xrays
AW-00335_001-0905
9-5. Controls Starting with Xray

Figure 9-5.
These controls include:
9.1.3.2.1 Xrays (F2) button OFF/ON.

The default setting of this button is OFF. Clicking this button will produce X-Rays from
the system. Keyboard F2 can also be used (toggles Xrays ON and OFF). When Xrays are
ON warning lights on the scanner will go on and the Main Display will look like eeither
ither
Figure 9-3 or Figure 9-4 depending on the setting of the Display button (see below).
When the Xray (F2) button is ON the Filter Wheel button is grayed out and cannot be
used.
WAR
ARNIN
NING:
G: While
While the
the Xray
Xray button
button is
is ON the
the system
system is
is produ
producin
cing
g X-Rays
X-Rays,, take
take prope
properr
precautions.
9.1.3.2.2 Filter Wheel button OFF/ON.
The
and itdefault
shouldfor this button
a lways
always remainis OFF.
OFF. This
The Field
dealsEngineer willthe
with testing notsystem
use theinFilter Wheel
different button
mode.
Note: The next set of controls have the label Filter Wheel Off Phase which indicates the
state of the Filter Wheel. These controls (HI/LO, BONE/AIR/TISSUE, 0/1/2/3 and 0/1)
indicate where the Filter Wheel will stop when it is not moving.
9.1.3.2.3 HI/LO buttons.

The default for these buttons is HI. The Field Engineer will not use the HI/LO buttons
and they should always remain the default.
9.1.3.2.4 BONE/AIR/TISSUE buttons.

The default for these buttons is BONE. The Field Engineer will not use the BONE/AIR/
TISSUE buttons and they should always remain the default.
9-4
9.1.3.2.5 0/1/2/3 buttons.

The default for these buttons is 0. The Field Engineer will not use the 0/1/2/3 buttons and
they should always remain the default.
9.1.3.2.6 0/1 buttons.

The default for these buttons is 0. The Field Engineer will
w ill not use the 0/1 buttons and they
should always remain the default.
Label Information
This area also provides information on the Hi Voltage Setting (either ON or OFF),
Frequency, Filter Errors and HiLo Errors.
9.1.3.3 Controls starting with Test

Test Signals
AW-00335_001-0906
9-6. Controls starting with

Figure 9-6. wi th T
Test
est Signals
These controls include:
9.1.3.3.1 Test Signal button OFF/ON.

The default setting of this button is OFF. When this button is ON a test signal is sent to all
of the detectors. Activity will be shown on the main display (see Figure 9-3 or Figure 9-4).
9-4).
9.1.3.3.2 Pulse 0/1/2/3.

The default setting of this button is 1. This indicates what data is displayed and not what
the scanner is doing. The Field Engineer will not use the Pulse 0/1/2/3 buttons and they
should always remain the default.
9.1.3.3.3 Drum Half 0/1.

The default setting for this button is 0. This indicates what data is displayed and not what
the scanner is doing. The Field Engineer will not use the Pulse 0/1 buttons and they should
always remain the default.
9-5
9.1.3.3.4 Hi Gain.
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 11. Changing Hi Gain changes the displayed
detector values for the Hi portions of the current segment. The associated actual gain
values are shown in the following table.
Gain Code A/D Gain MUX Gain Total Gain

0 1 2 1
1 1 2 2
2 1 4 4
3 1 8 8
4 2 1 2
5 2 2 4
6 2 4 8
7 2 8 16
8 4 1 4
9 4 2 8
10 4 4 16
11 4 8 32
9.1.3.3.5 Lo Gain.
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 11. Changing Lo Gain changes the displayed
detector values for the Lo portions of the current segment. The associated actual gain
values are shown in the above table.
9.1.3.3.6 Xray Mode.

This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 8. The default mode is 3. This control
determines the voltage, current and duty cycle for the x-ray generator. Most scans use X-
ray Mode 3, Whole Body uses 3 and IVA IVA (single energy) uses 6. The following table
shows the full set of defined X-ray modes.

X-Ray Mode Pulse Cycle Peak Ma Average Ma High KV Low Kv
0 0 -- -- -- --
1 50% 3 0.75 140 100
2 50% 10 2. 5 -- 100
3 50% 10 240 100
4 50% 3 0.75 -- 80
5 50% 3 0.75 140 80
6 100% 10 5. 0 140
7 50% 10 2. 5 140 --
8 100% 10 5. 0 -- 100
9-6
9.1.3.3.7 Aperture.
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 13. This controls the slit through which the
X-rays pass to limit the dimensions of the X-ray beam.
bea m. This control allows the selection of
a specific aperture in the system and can be used to test aperture movement.
9.1.3.3.8 Average Voltage

This displays the average voltage across all detectors for the Hi Air segment
9.1.3.4 Controls starting with Display
AW-00335_001-0907
9-7. Controls starting with Display

Figure 9-7.
9.1.3.4.1 Display
This has two buttons: GRAPH and TABLE. This controls what is seen on the Main
Display. In GRAPH the Main Display shows as a bar graph (see Figure 9-3) 9-3) with scale
markings on the left side according to how Scale is set (see below). It shows the lo (brown
tinted) and the hi (green tinted) voltages. In TABLE the Main Display shows the data
from the detectors as numeric data.
9.1.3.4.2 Scale
This has three buttons: RAW, LOG and VOLTS. The Default is VOLTS. The Field
Engineer will not use RAW or LOG and the button should always remain the default
(VOLTS). This control sets up the scale markings on the Main Display when the Display
is set to GRAPH and changes the units for the numeric value when the TABLE
TABLE is
displayed.
9.1.3.4.3 Segment
This has three buttons: BONE, TISSUE and AIR. The
Th e default is AIR. This controls the
data segment that are displayed in the GRASPH. The Field Engineer will not use either
BONE or TISSUE and the button should always remain the default (AIR).
9.1.3.4.4 Zoom
By default, In and Zoom
the GARAPH Out.
is displayed at minimum resolution When either function
reaches it maximum the button will be grayed out. Zoom In increases the resolution,
meaning that less of the total data range is displayed on the graph but differences in ba
barr
9-7
heights are magnified. The horizontal scale isn't affected and all detectors are displayed
regardless of the zoom value. Zoom Out will reverse what Zoom In has done.
9.1.3.4.5 Data Current Settings

This reports the Hi and Lo settings of the dark current for Bone, Tissue and Air.
9.1.3.4.6 Subtract Dark Current OFF/ON

The default for this button is OFF. Dark voltage is a residual reading for any equipment
that has current. Hologic allows 1 volt to compensate
c ompensate for dark current (see Figure 9-3).
9-3).
Clicking on this button will remove the dark voltage from the Main Display bar graph.
The Field Engineer will not use Subtract Dark
Da rk Current and it should always remain the
default.
9.1.3.5 Controls starting with Status Bits
AW-00335_001-0908
9-8. Controls starting with Status

Figure 9-8. Bits
9.1.3.5.1 Status Bits

Detector values come back from the scanner as sixteen bit numbers, traveling through
some parts of the hardware on sixteen separate wires. The Status Bits field displays the
most recent value for each bit, and color-codes
c olor-codes whether that bit has ever changed. Red bits
have not been changed, green bits have. The Reset button sets all the bits to red.
9.1.3.5.2 Reset
The Reset button re-starts the process of computing the means and standard deviations for
each filter-segment. It resets the number of samples to zero. It also resets the bits in the
Status Bits display.
9.1.3.5.3 Select Detector

This is an edit box that displays specific data about
a bout the selected detector. Select Detector
has a default of 108 (the middle of the bar graph as shown in Figure 9-3).
9-3). This displays
both the currently selected detector (number) and allows a new detector to be selected by
insert a number in the edit box. A new detector can also be selected by dragging the
vertical blue line on the Main Display bar graph (see Figure 9-9).
9-9). The number displayed in
the edit box will be automatically updated to reflect the line position.
9-8
Click and drag this blue

line to change detectors.
AW-00335_001-0909
9-9.Moving
Figure 9-9. the Detector
9.1.3.5.4 Show Details

Show Details defaults to off. When clicked, a small window pops
pop s up containing detailed
information about one detector, in tabular form (see Figure 9-10).
9-10). This information
includes (values
samples the current
used(most recent) the
to calculate value,
meanmean
andvalue, standard
standard deviation
deviation) and of
for each number
the sixof
filter-segments.
filter-segments. The pop-up window can be dragged wherever the user wants and remains
until Show Details is actively released.
9-10.
Figure 9-10. Show Details Window
9.2 SQDRIVER
The SQDRIVER program is accessed from the Discovery Main Menu by selecting
Utilities|Service Utilities|SQDRIVER. This program is used to calibrate the motors
and can be used as an effect tool for troubleshooting motor movement problems.
9-9
9.3 SQVERIFY
The SQVERIFY program is accessed from the Discovery Main Menu by selecting
Utilities|Service Utilities|SQVERIFY. This program is a diagnostic program, which
can be used to
SQCHECK perform
User a series
Manual of low-level
(080-0707) tests of
for detailed system components.
explanations of its use. Refer to the
9.4 SQKEYPAD
The SQKEYPAD
SQKEYPAD program is accessed
acce ssed from the Discovery Main Menu by selecting
Utilities|Emergency Motion. This program provides the Field Service Engineer with a
method for moving all motors even in conditions where a detected software error
condition would normally prevent any movement of the motors. This program can be used
as a quick means of checking most motor control functions.
9-10
Section A
ERROR MESSAGES
For any system error there may be one, or more, messages. Messages shown in the Err
Error
or Message
Message
List section below may be the first message, or a subsequent message.
All messages, for each system error, are saved in the ERRLOG file.
In the following Err

Error
or Message
Message List
List, error messages are in alphabetical order (by first line of their
message text).
In some cases a message identifier is also provided [in brackets].
brac kets].
The error messages covered in this section may indicate a hardware, or software, error. For
hardware errors a suggested action is provided.
In most cases, software errors are “software checks” that are used during
du ring the software
development process. During normal operation, these messages should neverneve r appear. If they do,
and a suggested action is not provided, call Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
information as possible about what was being done at the time the error occurred (including all
messages for that error, LOCUS field, message identifier, etc.).
NOTE:
Depending on the software running on the unit additional error messages may be available that are not described in
this appendix.
A-1
Error Message List
HARDWARE
ERROR MESSAGE /SOFTWARE LOCUS COMMENT/ACTION
ERROR
Address in the response message did not match the address in the sent message. [E_ADDRESS_MISMA
[E_ADDRESS_MISMATCH_I]
TCH_I]
Action: This message should be reported to Hologic

Hologic Tec
Technical
hnical Support. Include as
much information as possible about the scan.
Analysis aborted. d0= ___ below accep

acceptable
table limit
Hardware d0 is found to be below zero, which is not possible if there are X-rays reaching the
or detector.
Software
Action: This message should be reported to Hologic
Hologic Tec
Technical
hnical Support. Include as
much information as possible about the scan.
Arm and table are in danger of colliding! [E_COLLISION_IMMINENT_I] Comment: The C/C has calculated that the C-arm and table are within 1/4".
Action: If the C-arm and table are really within this distance, the problem is with the
application (or operator) that moved them so close. If they are not, then either the
calibration information for the system is wrong or the mechanical stops for the table
and C-arm have moved. One or more of the motors may have stopped short of the
actual mechanical stop during calibration. Verify
Verify that the positive limit positions for
each motor correspond to the published specs for the model. To recover from this,
select the Utility option from the main menu and then select the emergency Motion
option from the sub-menu. By holding down the Enable button on the operator control
panel, you can use the keypad to move the table and C-arm away from each other.
A-3
HARDWARE
ERROR
Bad checksum in message. [E_BAD_BLOCK_I] Comment: The checksum calculated by the C/C for a message did not match the one in
the message packet.
Action: Either the driver is incorrectly configured, one or more devices are jumpered to
the debug mode, there is a hardware problem on the c ommunication link (cable or
connectors) or one of more of the DSP chips in the C/C or DAS board is not properly
seated. Verify that the DEVICE=C:\MENU\MAPIDEV.SYS line in CONFIG.SYS has
the options /OVERLAP=0 and /HANDSHAKE=1. Check each stepper motor board
and verify that its address is correctly set. Verify that the TZ motor board does not
have the debug jumper installed. Verify
Verify that the communications cable is installed and
properly secured on the back of the C/C board. If the problem persists, it may be
because one (or both) of the DSP chips on the C/C or DAS board is not properly seated
in the PGA socket. Try "massaging" the DSP chip on the C/C board and the one on the
DAS board. If the problem changes (gets worse or better) when you do so, replace the
appropriate board. If the problem
pr oblem persists, place all devices in emulation mode (e.g., by
turning off instrument power and booting in the workstation
w orkstation mode). Disconnect all
devices except the C-arm from the communications link. Turn off C-arm emulation. If
there are no problems, proceed to re-connect each device and take it out of emulation
until the offending device is found. Replace the appropriate board.
BoundaryLine Internal Software Error Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
information as possible about what you were doing at the time.
Cannot generate bad detector map, too many bad detectors Action: One or more detectors is bad. See instructions for running hardware checking
program.
Cannot obtain results of scan ________ of __________
Software Comment: For some reason, the system was unable to obtain the results of a scan that
was selected for normals plotting.
Action: This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support.
Can't open a window Software Action: Ensure that only Hologic software is installed on the computer. If so, report
this message to Hologic Technical
Technical Support. Include as much information as possible
about what you were doing at the time.
A-4
HARDWARE
ERROR
Carm Unable to position device within

w ithin specified tolerance
Hardware Comment: There is a problem with the aperture mechanism.
Action: Check the aperture assembly. Test

Test the aperture positioning with the SUSQ
program.
Corrupted Scan Data Detected Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. In
Include as much
Could not find file extension in Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. In
Include as much
Couldn't write the new record Hardware Comment: The system was unable to write a reference curve that was entered or edited.
or
Software Action: Check that the hard drive is not full. That is, check the message "Room for __
scans" in the status window and ensure that it does not say zero. If it is full, then
archive and delete one or more scans and try again.
If the hard drive is not full, then you have either a hard drive failure or a corrupt
reference curve database.
db_File error __ ..... Software Any message that begins this way should be reported to Hologic Technical Support.
or Include as much information as possible about what you were doing at the time.
db_VISTA error __ .....
Device already in use by foreground task [E_LOCKOUT_I]
MAP
APII Comm
Commeent:
nt: The
The MAP
MAPI drdriver
ver w
was
as alrea
lready
dy op
opeene
ned
d by an
anot
othe
herr ap
appl
pliicat
atio
ion
n whe
when
n the
the
driver attempted to go ON_LINE (i.e., the driver requires exclusive access to the
MAPI driver).
Action: Report this error to Hologic Technical Support.
A-5
HARDWARE
ERROR
STATE Comments:
1. An application attem
attempted
pted to load or execute a state machine
machine when one was already
running, or an application attempted to execute a state machine while one or more
devices were still executing a command, or an attempt to abort the curr
currently
ently
executing state machine failed.

2. Whenever an applicatio
application
n issues a device command and the state machine is
executing a state machine protocol.
Action: Report these errors to Hologic Techni

Technical
cal Support.
MOTOR_
MOTOR_xx
xx Commen
Comment: t: An applic
applicati
ation
on atte
attempt
mpted
ed to modify
modify ste
steppe
pperr mo
motortor parame
parameter
terss wh
while
ile the
motor was moving (acceleration distance/type, first/fina
first/finall rates, position average, etc.),
or an application issued a MOVE_ABS while a MOVE_REL was in progress (or (o r vice
versa).
C-Arm Comments:
attempted
pted to control the laser positioning light when it was under
local control or an application attempted to turn on the laser while the C-arm and
table were within the laser safety distance of each other.
Action: Be sure the table and C-arm are properly positioned before starting a scan.
If the problem persists, report this error to Hologic Technical
Technical Support.
attempted
pted to issue another move command to the apertu
aperture
re shuttle
while it was still moving.
Action: The aperture may not be calibrated and an application attempted to move it
to a calibrated position.
position. The aperture shuttle on the C-arm may be jajammed
mmed and the
driver is still attempting to position it in response to a previous MOVE_ABS
command. Visual
Visually
ly inspect the aperture shuttle and use the MOVE_REL command
to verify that the shuttle is moving. If it is not, fix the mechanical or ele
electrical
ctrical
problem with the aperture shuttle and then recalibrate the aperture.
A-6
HARDWARE
ERROR
Moto
Motor_T
r_TZ
Z Comm
Commen ent:
t: The
The T
TZ
Z sy
syst
stem
em is in se
serv
rvic
icee m
mode
ode;; the
the pede
pedest
stal
alss aare
re mo
movi
ving
ng and
and aan
n
application attempts
attempts to move them in the opposite direction; or the TZ system is
performing a calibration.
Action: Verify
Verify that the TZ board
bo ard service mode switch is in the off position.
po sition.
Note: If you change the service mode swswitch

itch position on the TZ board, you must rese
resett
the TZ microprocessor before the new switch
switch position takes affect. Otherwise,
report this error to Hologic Technical Support.
Device has not been configured [E_NOT_CONFIGURED_I] Comment: Invalid motor calibration data has been sent to the driver (e.g., one or more
of the motor calibration parameters–number of steps, step distance, number of ticks or
tick distance–is less than or zero).
Action: Verify
Verify that the system has been properly calibrated and the normal
nor mal Hologic
system startup procedure has been followed (i.e., reboot the machine and if the
problem persists, recalibrate the motor).
Device is in emulation mode [E_EMULATE_I

[E_EMULATE_I Comment: The device is in emulation
emulation mode. This is not an error but a report of the
device driver internal state. Some QDR 4500 models normally run with emulation
enabled for the devices that are not installed (e.g., the 4500W does not support the AR
device).
Action: None.
Device not ready to perform requested action [E_NOT_READY_I
ST
STA
ATE Comm
Commen
ent:
t: An ap
appl
plic
icat
atio
ion
n att
attem
empt
pted
ed to exec
execut
utee a st
stat
atee mac
machi
hine
ne bu
butt tthe
he st
stat
atee mac
machi
hine
ne is
not ready to execute because one or
o r more of the necessary data structures has not been
downloaded (program or task table).
A-7
HARDWARE
ERROR
C-Ar
C-Arm
m Comm
Commen
entt: A
Att
ttem
empt
pt to turn
turn on X-
X-ra
rays
ys wh
when
en ei
eith
ther
er th
thee filt
filter
er drum
drum is not
not ye
yett lo
lock
cked
ed (if
(if it
is on) or the initial 30-second X-ray delay after startup has not elapsed. Reported as the
device state if the C-arm is reset. Reported as command error for any IS_xxx command
executed from an application (as opposed to executing from a state machine).
Action: Wait
Wait until the filter drum synchronizes to the A/C line and until the high
voltage relay in the X-ray controller is turned on (30 seconds after the system starts).
Moto
Motor_x
r_xx
x Repo
Reportrted
ed as co
comm
mman
and
d err
error
or for
for aany
ny IS
IS_xx
_xxx
x com
comma
mand
nd exec
execut
uted
ed from
from an appl
applic
icat
atio
ion
n (as
(as
opposed to executing from a state machine). Reported as device state if the motor is
reset.
Action: Determine why the motor was reset (e.g., power line brown out).
Moto
Motor_T
r_TZ
Z Repor
Reporte
ted
d as co
comm
mman
andd err
error
or ffor
or aany
ny m
move
ove comm
comman
and
d unti
untill va
vali
lid
d ccal
alib
ibra
rati
tion
on inf
infor
orma
mati
tion
on
has been downloaded. Reported as command error for any IS_xxx comm command
and executed
from an application (as opposed to executing from a state machine).
Action: Verify
Verify that the TZ driver has been calibrated and that the correct Hologic
system startup procedure has been followed (i.e., reboot the system and if the problem
persists, recalibrate the TZ motor)
Device time-out waiting for requested action [E_TIME_OUT_I] Comment: For everything except the state machine, indicates that a message was sent
to the device and a response was not received within 150ms.
Action: Follow the procedure under "BAD CHECKSUM IN MESSAGE." for isolating
the failed device and replace or repair it.
Comment: For the state machine, indicates that one of the self-limiting commands has
timed out or that the state machine continued executing into the next cycle.
A-8
HARDWARE
ERROR
Driver is not installed [E_NOT_INST

[E_NOT_INSTALLED_I]
ALLED_I] Comment: Returned in response to the ON_LINE command to indicate that the MAPI
driver is not installed in the system.
Action: Verify that the line DEVICE=C:\MENU\MAPIDEV.SYS is in the system

CONFIG.SYS
CONFIG .SYS file, that the correct interrupt level (IRQ) and I/O base address are
specified and that the file C:\MENU\MAPIDEV.SYS
C:\MENU\MAPIDEV.SYS is installed on the system.
Driver is off line [E_OFF_LINE_I] Comment: Returned by any driver whenever a command is written to the driver and the
system is OFF_LINE.
Action: Put the driver back on line.
Driver missed a hardware interrupt [E_MISSED_INTERRUP

[E_MISSED_INTERRUPT_I]
T_I] Comment: The filter drum or the X-ray hi/lo monitor is enabled in the C-arm driver
and the driver detected a dropped message from the C-arm microprocessor (indicated
by a mismatch inin the message sequence field).
Action: Verify
Verify that no other software, TSR or operating system is running while you do
a scan (e.g., do not run a scan with while connected to a network or attempt to run a
scan under Windows). This may also be due to a communications error between the AT AT
and the C-arm. Follow the procedure under "BAD CHECKSUM IN MESSAGE. MESSAGE."" to
diagnose I/O errors.
Emergency stop active [E_EMERGENCY_STOP_I] Comment: The system emergency stop is active, either because the operator has
pressed the emergency stop button, one of the emergency stop strips has been touched,
or because the C/C has calculated that the C-arm and the table are within 1/10" of each
other.
Action: If the emergency stop button on the operator panel is down (on),
(on ), pull it up.
Verify that nothing is touching the emergency stop strips on the table. If the C-arm and
table are within 1/10", the problem is with the application (or operator) that moved
them so close. If they are not, see the discussion about
about
E_COLLISION_IMMINENT_I. If both E_COLLISION_IMMINE
E_COLLISION_IMMINENT_I NT_I and
E_EMERGENCY_STOP_I are active, the only way to recover is to manually push the
table and C-arm away from each other and then follow the recovery procedure under
E_COLLISION_IMMINENT_I.
End of file Action: This could occur at the start of a lateral scan if the currently selected scan is not
an analyzed companion AP scan.
A-9
HARDWARE
ERROR
Error closing optical file ________________ Hardware There is a problem writing an optical file. Either the medium is full, or there is a
hardware malfunction.
Error flushing optical file _______________
Action: Check for disk full. Go to DOS, type DIR D: and check for free space.
Error writing optical record ____________ If the disk is not full, call Hologic Technical
Technical Support.
Error copying file _________ Hardware There was an error copying the named file.
Action: Verify
Verify that there was space on the target
target drive. Check the "Room for .. "
message in the status window.
window. Run appropriate diagnostics.
Error creating file

file ______________ _________________
Hardware There is a problem creating a new file (which may be on your hard drive, your diskette,
or or your optical). Either the medium is full, or there is a ha
hardware
rdware error.
error.
Software
Action: First determine which disk drive is involved. The filename should start with a
drive letter,
letter, followed by a colon. Drive A: is diskette, C: is hard drive, and D: is the
optical.
Check for disk full. For diskette, simply try a different

different diskette and see if the proble
problem
m
goes away. For hard drive, check the "Room for ___" message in the status windowwindow..
For optical, type DIR D:.
If the disk is not full,

fu ll, run appropriate diagnostics.
Error initializing graphics module. Action: This can be caused by not enough available memory or an incorrect graphics
adapter. Verify that only Hologic software is installed on the system and that the
graphics adapter has not been modified.
Error in region of interest structure Software Action: This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. I nc
nclude as
much information as possible about what you were doing at the time.
Error opening the flattening input file Action: Disk error or missing software. Check operation of hard disk, and check
consistency of system software with CHEKPART.
Error reading flattening configuration record
Error reading flattening factor record Action: Most likely cause is no flattening done for given scan mode. Re-run BIGFLAT.
BIGFLAT.
A-10
HARDWARE
ERROR
Error reading flattening records Action: Disk error or missing software. Check operation of hard disk, and check
Error reading Optical drive: ____________ Hardware There was a disk problem while reading a file.
Error reading
reading file _______ : _
__________
_________ Action: Run appropriate diagnostics.
Error reading reference attenuation record Action: Flattening may not have been done for this scan mode. Re-run BIGFLAT
BIGFLAT.
Failure at file ________ line ______ Software These messages should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
file extension doesn't start with 'P' in ...
flattening records are not initialized Action: Disk error or missing software. Check operation of hard disk, and check
Garbled Optical File Software The optical file that you are attempting to restore scans from seems to be clobbered.
Action: Run diagnostics on the optical drive.

drive. If this error recurs, report it to Hologic
Tec
Technical
hnical Support.
GetDKernel Internal Software Error Software These messages should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
GetKernel Internal Software Error
A-11
HARDWARE
ERROR
Histogram Overflow in datahist Software These messages should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
Histogram Smoothing Error
Illegal Context Record Type
Illegal high value in qgen
Inconsistent d0 limits in rsattencalc
Indeterminate or bad data for attenuation

curves
Indeterminate Data For k Calculation
Insufficient Data To Determine k/delta0
Internal Buffer Size Exceeded Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. In
Include as much
Internal device request queue full [E_QUEUE_FULL

[E_QUEUE_FULL_I]
_I] Comment: The common buffer area for storing system sounds is full.
Action: Run CHEKPART

CHEKPART to verify system software is correctly installed. Reduce the
size of one or more of the tunes or tune files you used to specify the system sounds.
A-12
HARDWARE
ERROR
Internal driver error [E_INTERNAL_ERROR_I] Comment: If returned in response to an ON_LINE command, indicates that the MAPI
device driver is not properly installed in the system.

Action: Verify that the line DEVICE=C:\MENU\MAPIDEV.SYS is in the system
CONFIG.SYS
CONFIG .SYS file, that the interrupt level (IRQ) and I/O base address are correctly set
and that the file C:\MENU|MAPIDEV.SYS
C:\MENU|MAPIDEV.SYS is installed on the system.
Comment: If returned in response to a XRAY_ON_PHASE,

XRAY_ON_PHASE, XRAY_SEQUENCE,
XRAY_SEQUENCE, or
PULSE_PER_SEG command to the C-arm device, indicates that the currently selected
X-ray mode is invalid.
Action: Report this to Hologic Technical

Technical Support.
Comment: If reported as the device status for the C-arm, it indicates an unrecognized
response from the C-arm micro.
Action: This may be due

d ue to a communications error between the AT and the C-arm.
Follow the procedure under "BAD CHECKSUM IN MESSAGE." to diagnose I/O

errors.
Comment: If reported as the abort code for the state machine, it indicates that the
internal driver event queue was full when the state machine attempted to issue the
system-wide abort code for state machine termination.
Internal Error:....
Error:...... Software Any message that begins this way should be reported to Hologic Technical Support.
Include as much information as possible about what you were doing at the time.
Internal Software Error: ......
Internal stack error [E_STACK_ERROR_I] Comment: Returned by the state machine driver to indicate that the local stack for a
task has overflowed or underflowed.
Action: Report this problem to Hologic.
Invalid ... Software In general, any message that begins with the word "Invalid" should be reported to
Hologic Technical
Technical Support. Include as much information as possible about what you
were doing at the time. See the following "Invalid..." errors for more information.
A-13
HARDWARE
ERROR
Invalid address for message packet [E_INV

[E_INVALID_ADDR_I]
ALID_ADDR_I] Comment: The address of a message packet
packet was invalid. The MAPI driver keeps an
address table that maps each byte address to its respective communications link (SSI,
SCI or C/C). The selected address was not assi
assigned
gned to any link and therefore was not
recognized by the MAPI driver.
Invalid flattening data [E_INVALID_FLAT_DATA_S] Comment: The most likely cause is that the signal for one or more of
o f the detectors is
higher than allowed.
Action: One or more detectors is bad. See instructions for running hardware checking
program.
Invalid identification file. Action: QDR 4500 ID file C:\SQUID.DAT is not valid. Call Hologic Technical
Support.
Invalid machine type in ARRC.TXT

ARRC.TXT.. Action: This is not an error if the machine is not yet calibrated.
Invalid mode for device driver [E_INVALID_MODE_I] C-ar

C-arm
m Comm
Commen
ent:
t: Retu
Return
rned
ed by
by the
the C-
C-ar
arm
m if
if an appl
applic
icat
atio
ion
n att
attem
empt
ptss to chan
change
ge the
the X-r
X-ray
ay m
mode
ode
when X-rays are already on.
A-14
HARDWARE
ERROR
Stat
Statee Comm
Commenent:
t: Retu
Return
rned
ed as the
the dev
devic
icee ssta
tate
te if the C-ar
C-arm
m mic
micro
ropro
proce
cess
ssor
or re
retu
turn
rned
ed an
unrecognized response to the fast query.

errors. Otherwise, report this error to Hologic T
Technical
echnical Support.
Comment: For the state machine driver, this error indicates that either the protocol
attempted to execute a command that is not supported; that an instruction that requires
a register reference did not provide one; or, more commonly
commonly,, an attempt was made to
access the external data buffers and they were either not available or were still being
using by the application.
Action: If you are running any program other than standard Hologic software, remove
it and retry the scan (e.g.,
( e.g., do not run a scan while connected to a network or attempt to
run a scan under Windows). Otherwise, report this error to Hologic T Technical
echnical Support.
Mot
Motor_
or_xx
xx Comment
Comment:: Fo
Forr a sstep
tepper
per motor
motor,, tthe
he appl
applica
icati
tion
on atte
attempt
mpted
ed to m
move
ove a moto
motorr in the
opposite direction in which it is currently moving (i.e., a motor's motion can be
extended in the same direction as the current motion but it cannot reverse motion).
Invalid parameter(s) [E_INVALID_PARAM_I] Comment: The value of the parameter associated with a device command was out of
range.
Action: Report the application in error to Hologic Technical

Technical Support.
Invalid serial number in ARRC.TXT. Action: This is not an error if the machine is not yet calibrated.
Invalid serial number in environ.bat file. Action: Machine serial number is not valid. Call Hologic Technical Support.
Invalid values in bad detector map Action: See instructions for running hardware checking program.
A-15
HARDWARE
ERROR
I/O Error .... Hardware There was an error reading or writing a disk drive. The message should identify the
or drive and say something about the nature of the error.
err or.
Software
Action: If this is an "out of space" error, verify that there is room on the target drive.
Check the "Room for ..." message in the status window.
window. Otherwise, run appropriate
diagnostics on the disk and controller; if the problem involves diskette (Drive A:), try a
different diskette.
Limit Exceeded: ...... Software Any message that begins this way should be reported to Hologic Technical Support.
Local motion active [E_LOCAL_MOTIO

[E_LOCAL_MOTION_I]
N_I] Comment: An application has attempted to enable or disable local motion when one or
more motors were still moving. This is also the abort code reported by the stat
statee
machine when a protocol is aborted to start the local motion state machine.
Action: When moving the system using the operator control panel, wait until all
motion stops before starting an application that requires motor movement (e.g., the
scan program).
Machine serial number is not valid. Action: QDR 4500 ID file C:\SQUID.DAT is not valid. Call Hologic Technical
Support.
Machine type in configuration files is inconsistent. Action: QDR 4500 ID file C:\SQUID.DAT is not valid. Call Hologic Technical
Support.
Machine type is not valid. Action: QDR 4500 ID file C:\SQUID.DAT is not valid. Call Hologic Technical
Support.
Memory allocation error. Action: Verify that only Hologic software is installed on the system.
Message packet canceled [E_CANCELED_I] Comment: The message packet was canceled
canceled before the response was received. This is
not an error but merely records the current state of a message packet.
packet. The driver
normally cancels all outstanding message packets when it goes off line.
Action: None.
A-16
HARDWARE
ERROR
Message packet not sent yet

y et to the C/C [E_WAITING_I]
[E_WAITING_I] Comment: Indicates that the message has been queued up in the MAPI's buffers for
transmission but has not yet been sent. Reported as the Carm device status if the fast
query message was not sent before the beginning of the
th e next A/C line cycle.
Action: Because the driver must communicate with the C-arm every A/C line cycle,
and because all other devices share the communications link, any device that causes an
I/O error (e.g., a timeout) generally causes this error in the C-arm. The first thing to do
is to determine if the problem is really with the C-arm or with another device in the
system. Place all devices in emulati
emulation
on mode (e.g., by turning off instrument power and
booting up in the workstation
workstation mode). Then, first take tthe
he C-arm out of emulation.
emulation. If it
reports no errors, then proceed to take each one ofo f the other devices out of emulation
mode until the one in
in error is found. Also see the dis
discussion
cussion under "BAD
CHECKSUM IN MESSAGE." for diagnosing I/O errors.
Message packet sent and waiting for response [E_SENT_I] Comment: The message has been sent but the response has not yet been received.
Reported as the C-arm device status if the fast query response for a cycle is not
received before the next cycle.
Action: See the discussion of the associated error E_W

E_WAITING_I.
AITING_I.
Missing ARRC.TXT file. Action: Check that ARRC.TXT exists in C:\XCDAC:\XCDATA.

TA. If it does, re-boot to ensure that
the system is correctly initialized. If not, restore ARRC.TXT from a dbarchive backup.
Missing tissue bar initialization file Software The file that contains the calibration information for the tissue bar is missing or has not
been installed.
Action: Install the tissue bar initialization software that comes with the tissue bar.
A-17
HARDWARE
ERROR
Motor direction has reversed during stepping [E_MOTION_REVERSED_I]

[E_MOTION_REVERSED_I] Comment: Whenever a motor is moving, the driver checks its position every three
seconds. If the motor direction at each of these check intervals is not in the correct
direction, the driver stops motion and returns this error.
Motion reversal is primarily due to the stepper motor cutting out because of a thermal
overload and usually occurs on the AY motor. In most cases, a mechanical problem
(loose belt, loose encoder coupling, etc.) causes this problem. In some cases, a bad
encoder and in fewer cases, a bad drive board causes this problem.
Action: Wait
Wait a few minutes for the motor to cool down and re-try the scan.
Check the drive belt tension. Check the encoder coupling setscrew.
setscrew. If the problem is
not corrected, replace the drive board. If these steps fail, replace the encoder motor.
The procedure for these operations can be found in the Remove and ReplaceReplace section of
this manual. If the problem persists, contact Hologic Technic
Technicalal Support.
Motor is at a limit [E_LIMIT_POSITION_I] Comment: An application tried to move the motor beyond the limit position (i.e., the
motor need not necessarily be at a limit).
Action: Be sure that the table and C-arm are at the correct starting position before
starting a scan. Verify that the range of motion (positive limit position) of the motors
(AR, AY, TX, TY and TZ) are correct for the QDR model. Also see the discussion
under E_COLLISION_IMMINENT_I.
Motor power has been turned off because the a

arm
rm and table have collided! [E_COLLISION
[E_COLLISION_STOP_I]
_STOP_I]
Action: To
To proceed, select emergency Motion on the Utility menu. Then push the table
away from the arm. To restart the system, select retry by pressing the <ENTER> key.
No A/C line interrupts! [E_WORKSTATION_BOOT_I] Action: Check that instrument power is on. When the problem is corrected, press
<Enter> to continue. If you want to leave instrument power off, press <ESC> to boot in
the workstation mode. In this mode, you can not do any scans even if you turn
instrument power back on. This massage can occur if the Emergency Stop sswitch
witch is
pushed in.
Refer to the “NO A/C Line Interrupts” message at start-up on page 6-9.
6-9 .
No motion detected while motor stepping [E_NO_MOTION_I]
A-18
HARDWARE
ERROR
Hardware The QDR is equipped with motion detectors which detect actual motion in the X, Y
and C-arm rotation motors. This message occurs when one of these motors was
commanded to move and no motion was detected.
Action: Check for loose belt couplers, tighten set screws A/R.
Check for coupler hitting bearing block, move coupler A/R.
Check motion encoder, replace if defective.
Check Motor & Drive board, replace if defective.
Check stepper translator, replace if defective.
MOTOR$
MOTOR$xx
xx Whenev
Whenever
er a mo
motor
tor iiss mov
moving,
ing, the driv
driver
er ch
check
eckss its p
posi
ositi
tion
on every
every three
three sseco
econds
nds an
and
d
stops stepping if the incremental positions at these check intervals do not match the
motion parameters (final rate) to within approximately 50%.
Action: Determine why the motor is not moving (check motor coupling, drive belt, and
encoder shaft coupling).
MOTOR$TZ
MOTOR$TZ The devic
devicee st
state
ate reported
reported wh
wheneve
eneverr the TZ firmw
firmware
are repor
reports
ts a pedestal
pedestal ttimeou
imeoutt during
during
a move command.
Action: See the discussion of the TZ drive's E_TOLERANCE_I error.
No data for attenuation curves Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. In
Include as much
Not enough memory Software Ensure that only Hologic software is installed on the computer. If so, this message
should be reported to Hologic Tec
Technical
hnical Support. Include as much information as
possible about what you were doing at the time.
Old Whole Body Context Type Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
Operator terminated action [E_OPERA

[E_OPERATOR_I]
TOR_I] Action: None.
Out of memory Software Ensure that only Hologic software is installed on the computer. If so, this message
should be reported to Hologic Tec
Technical
hnical Support. Include as much information as
A-19
HARDWARE
ERROR
Overflow calculating flattening or daily factors Action: Most likely cause is saturation of one or more detectors during the flattening
procedure.
Parameter size is invalid [E_INVALID_SIZE_I] Comment: The device state reported by the C-arm if the response to a fast query is not
a minimum length to encompass all necessary information.

errors.
Parameter size is too large for driver [E_TOO_LONG

[E_TOO_LONG_I]
_I] Comment: For the state machine, indicates that a reference was made beyond the
machine limits (e.g., a register reference that exceeded the number of registers; a jump
to a location beyond the end of the state machine; etc.). For all other devices, indicates
that the message response from the remote micro overflowed the internal buffers and
was partially lost.
Action: For the state machine,

machine, report this error to Hologic T
Technical
echnical Support. For
other devices, this error may indicate
indicate a problem on the communications bus. Follow
the procedure under "BAD CHECKSUM IN I N MESSAGE." for isolating I/O errors.
Patient File Record __ Too Small Hardware These messages indicate problems performing I/O operations (usually to the hard
or drive, but possibly to diskette or optical).
Patient File Record __ Too Large Software
Action: Ensure that there is adequate space on the hard drive (Check the "Room for ..."
message in the status
status window.
window. You should always leave
leave room for 1 or 2 scans). There
may be a disk problem; appropriate
appropriate diagnostics should be run. If you are unable to find
a hardware problem, the message should be reported to Hologic Tec Technical
hnical Support.
PGLINE: ... Software Any message that begins this way should be reported to Hologic Technical Support.
Remote device did not echo command [E_NAK_I]

[ E_NAK_I] Comment: Whenever the first byte in a message response does not match the command
character.
Action: This is probably a communications error between the AT and the

microprocessor.. Follow the procedure under "BAD CHECKSUM IN MESSAGE." to
microprocessor
diagnose I/O errors.
A-20
HARDWARE
ERROR
ROI Limit Error Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
Scan File Record __ Too Small (__) Hardware These messages indicate problems performing I/O operations (usually to the hard
drive, but possibly to diskette or optical).
Scan File Record __ Too Large (__)
Scan has 0 points or lines message in the status
status window.
hnical Support.
Software Error ....... Software Any message that begins this way should be reported to Hologic Technical Support.
Starting phase Out of Range Software This message should be reported to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much
Test failed - absolute max or min limit exceeded Action: One or more detectors is bad. See instructions for running hardware checking
program.
Test failed - maximum SD exceeded Action: Detectors are

are not seeing a uniform beam. Check all hardware having to do
with X-ray generation or detection.
Test failed - mean exceeds limits Action: X-ray beam at edges is not consistent with beam at center
center.. Check X-ray beam
alignment.
The analyze data file either did not exist or did not contain any valid entries
Software The software was not correctly installed (No ANALYZE.DAT file). This might also be
due to a hardware problem with the hard disk drive.
Action: Notify Hologic Te

Technical
chnical Support.
There are no files available to restore ( Optical restore)
A-21
HARDWARE
ERROR
User When restoring files from optical ("Optical" on main menu), you selected an archive
or that contains no scans.
Software
Action: Report this problem to Hologic Technic
Technical
al Support.
There are no records in the Normals Curve database.
Software The reference curve database appears to be totally empty. This condition should never
occur in normal operations.
Action: The Hologic software may not have been installed correctly.
The X-ray controller is not

no t generating A/C line interrupts [E_NO_TIMER_INTERRUPT_I]
Hardware The X-ray Controller assembly generates an interrupt every 1/120 of a second (60HZ
line) or every 1/100 of a second (50Hz line). The PC clock generates 18 interrupts a
second (regardless of line frequency). If two clock ticks occur wit
with
h NO Motor & Drive
board interrupts between them, then this message is produced.
Action: Report this error to Hologic Technical Support. Include as much information as
Refer to the “NO A/C Line Interrupts” message at start-up on page 6-9.
6-9 .
Truncated Patient Record ... Hardware This message indicate problems performing I/O operations (usually to the hard drive,
or but possibly to diskette or optical).
Software
message in the status
status window.
hnical Support.

PDF Service Manual Discovery PDF Compress

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF Service Manual Discovery PDF Compress

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF Service Manual Discovery PDF Compress

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

™

Hologic, Inc. Phone in US: 800-321-4659 Document 080-1085

2.5.1 Service Switches .......................................................................................

Table of Contents iii

2.8.2 X-Ray Controller Board .......................................................................... 2-18

3.2.1 Inspect For Shipping Damage ................................................................... 3-6

3.3.4 Start QDR Software in Service Mode ..................................................... 3-24

4.6 Motor Calibration ............................................................................................

5.6.1 C-Arm Interface Board ........................................................................... 5-17

5.8.4 Rotary Potentiometer ..............................................................................

6.1 Before Starting ...................................................................................................

Table of Contents vii

6.9 Data Communications Problems .......................................................................

viii Table of Contents

The Discovery system employs a patented Automatic Internal Reference

1-1. Discovery®-C and -W System

1-2. Discovery®-A and -SL System

1.1.1 X-Ray Scanning Principles

Before passing through the patient, the beam

1-3. Q Scan Plot

1.2 Functional Overview

1-4. Discovery System Block Diagram

direction (TX), Table

1-5. Discovery Operator's Console Block Diagram

JP1 To/From C-Arm Interface

To/From Control Panel Interface

1-6.Discovery Distribution and Motor Control Block Diagram

To/From C-Arm Aperture Motor

Filter Drum Motor

1-7. Discovery C-Arm Block Diagram

1.3 Product Specifications

SPECIFICATION MODEL DEFINITIO

1.3.1 Exam Mode(s) Performance

AP Spine Array All 8.0 82 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.20 1. 0

AP Spine Turbo All 8.0 21 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.05 1. 0

Hip High Def All 6.0 123 Femur (Total) 0.20 1. 0

1.3.2 Duty Cycle:

All Others 50%

1.3.3 Leakage Technique Factors

1.3.4 Minimum Beam Filtration

1.3.5 Measured Half Value

1.3.6 Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current

1.3.7 Technique Factors for Maximum Line Current

1.3.8 Maximum Deviation

Time: +/- 10%

1.3.9 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors

counting the number

2.2 PCI Communications Controller Board

2.2.1 Interface Connections

Table 2-1. PCI Communications Controller Board/Distribution Board

Signal Pair Description PCI1 Pin Dist2 Pin

Note: 1 PCI = PCI Communication Controller Board

2-1. PCI Communication Command Board/Distribution Board

2.3 Distribution Board

2.3.2 Interface Connections

2-2. Distribution Board High Level Interconnection Diagram

2.4 Motor Controller Board

2.4.2 Interface Connections

2-3. Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Diagram

Table 2-3. Motor Controller Board/Stepper Motor and Position Encoder